Documenti di Didattica
Documenti di Professioni
Documenti di Cultura
for the
for
Stock Redler India Private Limited. # 3(Old No. 18 & 23), 3rd Main, 1st Phase, Peenya Indusrial Area, Bangalore 560058, INDIA.
(080) 30403705/706/707
Telefax (080) 30403708
For
TENUGHAT VIDYUT NIGAM LIMITED (2 X 210 MW- Unit-2)
OWNER:
CUSTOMER:
Apex Industrials
MANUFACTURER:
O & M MANUAL
DOCUMENT TITLE:
Electrical
SIGN
DATE
REV: 0
SIGN
DATE
REVIEWED (Service)
NAME
SIGN
DATE
APPROVED
NAME
SIGN
DATE
1.0 Installation
Note
The drawings and parts lists incorporated in this manual are correct for the
equipment supplied. The title block descriptive information may not always agree
with the information provided in the original proposal or contract, but the drawing
contents are correct for the equipment supplied.
Note
This equipment manual is designed to supplement, not replace, the original
equipment manual supplied with the feeder. It deals only with additional
considerations pertaining to the weighing system electronics and feeder
microprocessor controls.
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
INTRODUCTION
Proprietary Note
The information in this manual, including technical data and copies of drawings,
embodies information proprietary to Stock Equipment Company. This manual is
provided to the user of equipment purchased from Stock Equipment Company for
use only in operation or maintenance of such equipment. Such information in this
manual is not to be used, disclosed, copied, reproduced in whole or part for any use
other than that indicated above, or for any other purpose detrimental to the interests
of Stock Equipment Company. Patents owned by Stock Equipment Company have
been issued or are pending on some of the information in this manual. Any
unauthorized use of this subject matter of such patents is a violation of such patents
and is prohibited by law.
2.
Only qualified personnel are permitted to perform and install the electronic controls.
3.
Wear a wrist type grounding strap that is grounded to the control cabinet chassis.
4.
When replacing the electronic circuit board, do not remove the board from the static shielding bag
it came in until you are ready to install the board.
5.
When removing any electronic circuit board, immediately place it in a static shielding bag.
6.
Stock Equipment Company advises that all printed circuit boards should be returned to the factory
for repair since our technicians are trained to work with electrostatic sensitive components.
Note
If you are not familiar with static control procedures, before replacing electronic
components, refer to US Department of Defense DOD HDBK-263, Electrostatic
Discharge Control Handbook for protection of electronic parts, assemblies,
and equipment.
7.
Contact Stock Equipment Companys Parts Department for a returns good authorization number
to facilitate the return of an electronic circuit board. Boards should be shipped in static shielding type
bags. If packing materials are used, they should be static-dissipative material.
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
1.0 Installation
Table of Contents
PRODUCT USER MANUAL FOR THE DT_9 MICROPROCESSOR CONTROL
AND VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE FEEDER CONVERSION
Manual Content
Section 1.0
Installation
Section 2.0
Section 3.0
Certified Drawings
Section 4.0
Section 5.0
Section 6.0
Vendor Information
Section 7.0
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
INTRODUCTION
Notice
Revised reference material, written text and drawings may be furnished as required
to update the information contained within this manual. When revisions to the
content of this manual are submitted, utilize the Record of Changes form provided
to record all revisions. Specific instructions may be provided in the Revision Packet
for recording and inserting all changes affecting this manual.
Record of Changes
Change
Number
Date
Entered
Description of Changes
Signature
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
1.0 Installation
1.0 Installation
Section Index
Topic
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
RECEIVING INSPECTION
STORAGE PROCEDURES
SCOPE OF CONVERSION
DT_9 MICROPROCESSOR CONTROL CABINET INSTALLATION
VFD CONVERSION KIT INSTALLATION
ELECTRICAL CONVERSION KIT INSTALLATION
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
1-1
1.1
RECEIVING INSPECTION
Upon delivery, inspect the equipment for shortages or evidence of physical damage and make a report to the
independent carrier. Also, notify the Contracts Department of Stock Redler India Pvt. Ltd., to arrange for
the shipment of replacement parts.
1.2
STORAGE PROCEDURES
Prior to shipment from the factory, provisions have been made to protect the equipment in the event that
prolonged storage is required at the job site. These storage procedures are provided as recommendationsto
aid in maintaining the equipment in a warrantable and ready condition.
1.2.1 Storage areas shall be periodically inspected to ensure cleanliness. Discarded packaging and trash
shall be removed. Access shall be limited to authorized personnel. Upon placing an item in storage and prior
to its removal, the packaging and protective covers should be visually inspected to
ensure that all closures are intact. Any defects in the packaging may be repaired, after insuring that the
packaged material is intact and undamaged, using the original method of packaging. Surface preservatives
may be reapplied or touched up as required.
1.2.2 Equipment is to be stored in such a manner as to provide ready access for inspection and
maintenance with a minimum of handling. Items should be positioned so that any markings or labelings can
be easily identified without excessive handling. Shipping documents are attached to the outside of each crate
to identify the equipment contained inside.
1.2.3 All feeders with electronic enclosures mounted to them must be stored in a heated, ventilated
building where ambient temperatures may be controlled between 5C minimum and 50C maximum.
Control enclosure access doors must be tightly closed to engage the sealing gaskets.
1.3
SCOPE OF CONVERSION
1.3.1
S11154
b.
S11160
c.
D43566
d.
Note
System installation, schematic, and connection drawings are provided in Section
3.0, Certified Drawings. Assembly drawings and parts lists are provided in Section
4.0, Mechanical Drawings and Parts Lists and Section 5 .0, Electrical/Electronic
Drawings and Parts Lists.
1-2
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
1.0 Installation
Important
Before performing any work inside the feeder, de-energize the feeder by locking the
main circuit breaker or disconnect switch in the OFF position.
Important
Safety considerations require that electrical apparatus and enclosures be solidly
connected to safety ground.
1.4
Close the inlet valve above the feeder and empty the belt.
1.4.2
De-energize the feeder and close the seal air supply if the feeder is so equipped.
1.4.3
1.4.4
1.4.5
Refer to Drawing S11154 and the drawings in Section 3.0, Certified Drawings. Mount the DT_9
microprocessor cabinet assembly onto the feeder by following the instructions provided on
the drawings.
Important
Do not energize the feeder or the power to the control cabinets until a Stock service
engineer is present. If a service engineer is not present when the feeder or the power
to the control cabinets are energized, damage to the equipment, injury or loss of life
may occur.
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
1-3
Note
Electrical control enclosures must be latched and sealed at all times unless
immediate access to them is required, both as a safety measure and to prevent
moisture damage to components.
1.5
1.6
Refer to Drawing D43566. Install the VFD conversion kit by following the instructions provided on
the drawing.
1.5.2
Refer to Section 2.0 DT_9 Operation and Maintenance for information on programming and
calibration.
Only qualified personnel are permitted to perform and install the electronic controls.
Wear a wrist type grounding strap that is grounded to the control cabinet chassis
When replacing the electronic circuit board, do not remove the board from the static shielding bag it came in
until you are ready to install the board
Stock Equipment Company advises that all printed circuit boards should be returned to the factory for repair
since our technicians are trained to work with electrostatic sensitive components.
Note
Electrical control enclosures must be latched and sealed at all times unless
immediate access to them is required, both as a safety measure and to prevent
moisture damage to components.
1-4
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
1.0 Installation
Note
Before installing electronics cards, all field wiring for the feeder control system must
be checked and verified. Improper wiring may result in severe damage to the
electronics cards when power is applied.
1.6.1
Refer the drawings in Section 3.0, Certified Drawings and Section 5.0, Electrical/Electronic
Drawings and Parts Lists.
1.6.2
Remove the new electronics cards from their individual packages and install them into the
microprocessor assembly by following the instructions provided on the drawings.
1.6.3
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
1-5
1-6
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411 GB
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
PASS - A service you can count on. Fast, comprehensive and anywhere in the world.
Quality and reliability are the cornerstones of our companys philosophy. That is why we consider a comprehensive service concept simply par for the course, from strict quality control, installation and commissioning through to seamless support across the entire life cycle of our products.
With over 30 service stations and over 180 service specialists, you can count on us to be there whenever
and wherever you need us.
During business hours, our service specialists from all business areas are ready to analyze problems and
find the reasons for failures. You can find the Schenck Process location nearest to you on our website
www.schenckprocess.com.
Are you looking for individual and tailor-made service solutions? Then our modular PASS service system is
just right for you. It includes the entire range of services from simple inspections all the way down to a complete service program. Further information can be found at www.schenckprocess.com.
Service:
Quality and reliability form the basis for our corporate philosophy all over the world.
In House Support (Monday through Friday from at least 8 oclock to 5 p.m. CST). Service specialists are
available for technical assistance to answer your questions or assist you in trouble shooting.
STOCK EQUIPMENT COMPANY
16490 Chillicothe Rd.
Chagrin Falls, OH 44023 , USA
Phone: +1 440-543-6000
Fax: +1 440-543-6839
e-mail address: sales@stockequipment.com
1-8
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
1
2 Safety notes................................................................................................................................................ 3
2.1
Signal Words ................................................................................................................................................5
2.1.1
Signal Words for Safety Warnings .......................................................................................................5
2.1.2
Signal Words for Application Notes .....................................................................................................6
2.2
Five Safety Rules of Electrical Engineering .................................................................................................6
2.3
Damaged / Defective Electrical Components ...............................................................................................7
3 Overview .................................................................................................................................................... 9
3.1
What is the DISOCONT Tersus/DT-9? .......................................................................................................9
3.2
Definitions ...................................................................................................................................................10
3.3
Measuring Principle ....................................................................................................................................10
3.4
Operating Modes - Remote ........................................................................................................................12
3.4.1
Gravimetric .........................................................................................................................................12
3.4.2
Volumetric ..........................................................................................................................................12
3.4.3
Volumetric Control..............................................................................................................................12
3.5
Operating Modes OFF/Maintenance .......................................................................................................12
4 DT-9 Setup ............................................................................................................................................... 15
4.1
Setup Notes ...............................................................................................................................................15
4.2
Startup and Functional Check ....................................................................................................................16
4.3
Setup Parameters ......................................................................................................................................17
4.3.1
Commonly Changed Parameters.......................................................................................................17
4.4
Calibration ..................................................................................................................................................20
4.4.1
Performing Calibrations......................................................................................................................20
4.4.2
Weigh Roller Adjustment ...................................................................................................................21
4.4.3
Basic (CAL 1) ....................................................................................................................................22
4.4.4
Span (CAL 2) ....................................................................................................................................23
4.4.5
TC: Span Calibration .........................................................................................................................25
4.4.6
LB: Pulses per Belt ............................................................................................................................26
4.4.7
TA: Tare .............................................................................................................................................26
4.5
Analog Trim Function .................................................................................................................................27
4.6
Belt Monitoring............................................................................................................................................28
4.6.1
Belt Drift Monitoring............................................................................................................................28
4.6.2
Belt Influence Compensation (BIC)....................................................................................................30
4.6.3
Belt Slippage Monitoring ....................................................................................................................30
4.6.3.1 Monitoring Standstill after Startup ......................................................................................................30
4.6.3.2 Belt Slippage with Belt Marking .........................................................................................................30
4.6.3.3 Two-Sensor Belt Slippage Monitoring................................................................................................31
5 Operating and Control Access .................................................................................................................. 33
5.1
Connection between a VHM Operating Panel and a Scales Controller (VCU) ..........................................33
5.1.1
Connection via Ethernet Cable ..........................................................................................................34
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
-i-
Table of Contents
5.1.2
Connection via Bluetooth ...................................................................................................................34
5.1.3
Connection via RS485 .......................................................................................................................34
5.2
Connecting a PC with EasyServe to a Scales Controller (VCU) ................................................................35
5.2.1
Connection via Ethernet .....................................................................................................................35
5.2.2
Connection via RS-232 ......................................................................................................................35
5.2.3
Connection via WLAN ........................................................................................................................35
5.2.4
Connection via Bluetooth ...................................................................................................................36
5.3
Connection between a Web Browser and a VCU Scales Controller ..........................................................36
5.4
Web Server in the Scales Controller VCU..................................................................................................37
6 Operation Using the Touch Screen HMI .................................................................................................... 39
6.1
Initial Configuration ....................................................................................................................................39
6.1.1
The 'Network' Screen ........................................................................................................................39
6.1.2
The 'Display Settings' Screen ...........................................................................................................40
6.1.3
The 'Feeder' Screen ..........................................................................................................................40
6.1.4
The 'Configuration' Screen ................................................................................................................40
6.1.5
The 'Communication' Screen ............................................................................................................40
6.1.6
The 'Calibration' Screen ....................................................................................................................40
6.1.7
Exiting HMI Configuration .................................................................................................................40
6.2
Display Functions ......................................................................................................................................40
6.2.1
The 'Home' Screen ............................................................................................................................40
6.2.1.1 Operating the HMI in 'Off/Maintenance' Mode ...................................................................................41
6.2.1.2 Operating the HMI in 'Remote' Mode .................................................................................................41
6.2.2
The 'Trend' Screen ............................................................................................................................41
6.2.3
The 'Values' Screen ..........................................................................................................................41
6.2.4
The 'Setup' Screen ............................................................................................................................42
6.2.4.1 Data Log Values.................................................................................................................................42
6.2.4.2 Event Log Values ..............................................................................................................................42
6.2.4.3 Parameter Log Values ......................................................................................................................42
6.2.4.4 Parameter Setup ...............................................................................................................................42
6.2.4.5 Trimming the Analog Inputs and Outputs .........................................................................................43
6.2.4.6 Restoring the Factory Default Settings .............................................................................................44
6.2.4.7 Simulation Mode ...............................................................................................................................44
6.2.4.8 Calibrating the Feeder .......................................................................................................................44
6.2.4.9 Setting the Current Time and Date ...................................................................................................45
6.3
Typical Operating Procedures ...................................................................................................................45
7
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 10 -
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Table of Contents
8.5.5
Expert Mode .......................................................................................................................................53
8.5.6
Print Parameters ................................................................................................................................53
8.6
Operating the Feeder .................................................................................................................................54
8.6.1
Scale Operation Screens ...................................................................................................................54
8.6.2
Events ................................................................................................................................................54
8.6.3
Calibration ..........................................................................................................................................54
8.6.4
Service Values ...................................................................................................................................54
8.6.5
Trends ................................................................................................................................................55
8.6.6
Setting Time .......................................................................................................................................56
8.6.7
Options ...............................................................................................................................................56
9 Testing .................................................................................................................................................... 57
9.1
Calibration Weight Test ..............................................................................................................................57
9.2
Chain Test ..................................................................................................................................................57
9.3
Material Test ...............................................................................................................................................58
10 Parameters ............................................................................................................................................... 59
10.1 General Information ....................................................................................................................................59
10.2 DT-9 Parameter List ...................................................................................................................................65
10.2.1
Parameter Overview ..........................................................................................................................66
10.2.2
Parameter Details ..............................................................................................................................82
10.2.2.1 Parameter Block 01 - Hardware Modules ..........................................................................................82
10.2.2.2 Parameter Block 02 - Feeder Definition .............................................................................................84
10.2.2.3 Parameter Block 03 - Control Sources ..............................................................................................91
10.2.2.4 Parameter Block 04 - Rated Data ......................................................................................................97
10.2.2.5 Parameter Block 05 - Feeder control ...............................................................................................100
10.2.2.6 Parameter Block 06 - Feeder Monitoring .........................................................................................101
10.2.2.7 Parameter Block 07 - Belt Monitoring ..............................................................................................108
10.2.2.8 Parameter Block 08 - Filters.............................................................................................................113
10.2.2.9 Parameter Block 09 - Limit Values...................................................................................................114
10.2.2.10 Parameter Block 10 - Calibration Data ............................................................................................118
10.2.2.11 Parameter Block 11 - Rate controller ...............................................................................................121
10.2.2.12 Parameter Block 12 - Moisture.........................................................................................................125
10.2.2.13 Parameter Block 13 - Cleanout control ............................................................................................128
10.2.2.14 Parameter Block 14 - Analog Outputs .............................................................................................130
10.2.2.15 Parameter Block 15 - Digital Inputs .................................................................................................134
10.2.2.16 Parameter Block 16 - Digital Outputs...............................................................................................143
10.2.2.17 Parameter Block 17 - Analog calibration..........................................................................................150
10.2.2.18 Parameter Block 18 - 2-Sensor Slip.................................................................................................154
10.2.2.19 Parameter Block 19 - Maintenance interval .....................................................................................156
10.2.2.20 Parameter Block 20 - Data Logging .................................................................................................157
10.2.2.21 Parameter Block 21 - Communication EasyServe...........................................................................159
10.2.2.22 Parameter Block 22 - Communication Fieldbus...............................................................................160
10.2.2.23 Parameter Block 23 - Ethernet.........................................................................................................165
10.2.2.24 Parameter Block 24 - PLC Outputs..................................................................................................166
10.2.2.25 Parameter Block 25 - Fixed mode configuration..............................................................................168
10.2.2.26 Parameter Block 26 - FCB analog outputs ......................................................................................172
10.2.2.27 Parameter Block 27 - FCB digital outputs ........................................................................................177
10.2.2.28 Parameter Block 28 - Configuration HMI Values .............................................................................180
11 Event (Error) Messages ...........................................................................................................................183
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
-3-
Table of Contents
BV-H6411GB, 1221
-4-
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Table of Contents
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
-5-
DISOCONT Tersus is provided. Please contact STOCK for details on that variant, if needed.
Additional details on the hardware components and the interfaces of the DISOCONT Tersus system are found
in the system manual BV-H2406 and the electrical schematics provided with the equipment.
For service purposes a PC or notebook with software EasyServe (type VPC 20150) can be connected. For details on EasyServe besides the information in this manual see instruction manual BV-H2185.
The controller provides optional means for communication via serial fieldbus of various types to the host plant
control. Details on this communication are found in the separate fieldbus interface manual BV-H2418.
Additional copies of these instructions may be ordered from the Parts Department at Stock Equipment
Company, Chagrin Falls, Ohio. Refer to Part No. ATPDT9VCU20103.
Proprietary Note
The information in this manual, including technical data and copies of drawings, contains information that is proprietary to Stock Equipment Company. This manual is provided to the user of equipment purchased from Stock
Equipment Company for use only in operation or maintenance of such equipment. Information in this manual is
not to be used, disclosed, copied, reproduced in whole or part for any use other than that indicated above, or for
any other purpose detrimental to the interests of Stock Equipment Company. Patents owned by Stock Equipment Company have been issued or are pending on some of the information in this manual. Any unauthorized
use of this subject matter of such patents is a violation of such patents and is prohibited by law.
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
-1-
7. Contact the Stock Equipment Company Parts Department for a returns good authorization number to facilitate the return of an electronic circuit board. Returned components should be shipped in static shielding type
bags. If packing materials are used, they should be made of a static dissipative material.
Note: If you are not familiar with static control procedures, before replacing electronic components, refer to US
Department of Defense DOD - HDBK-263, Electrostatic Discharge Control Handbook for protection of electronic
parts, assemblies, and equipment.
BV-H6411GB, 1221
-2-
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Safety notes
2 Safety notes
To avoid personal injury and equipment damage, follow the safety regulations stated below.
Additionally, you should observe:
Safety hints given in order-specific documentation
Safety hints relating to mechanical components
Instructions and safety tips for parts manufactured by sub-suppliers or that are not part of Schenck Process's
scope of delivery.
When performing installation, commissioning and service work, observe all applicable local regulations.
Intended Application
The measuring system and its connected mechanical components are exclusively designed for weighing and
controlling tasks. Any use other than originally intended is considered inappropriate.
Sources of Risk
If the measuring system has been correctly installed and commissioned, it does not pose any danger during
weigh operations.
Hazards may arise when the system is used for control operations or for transporting weighed goods. Potential
hazards may then arise from e.g. additional devices through which the weighed goods are passed or metered.
Minor risks may arise in these situations if the measuring system is used or operated by untrained personnel.
The measuring system can be part of a more complex plant. The system operating company is fully responsible
for the operating safety of the system.
Personnel
Preparation, assembly, commissioning, operation, maintenance and servicing may only be carried out by qualified personnel.
All persons working on the system are required to observe the safety hints and know the parts of the technical
documentation relevant to their work.
The operating company is responsible for instructing his operators to observe all regulations and instructions
given.
Changing Parameters
The measuring system's functionality is determined by parameters. Only personnel familiar with the device's
mode of operation may alter these parameters (e.g. after training by Schenck Process). Incorrectly set parameters may cause injury or material damage. Furthermore they may also cause considerable disruption to weigh
operations.
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
-3-
Safety notes
Password
Passwords safeguard the parameters against unauthorized alteration. The measuring system operating company must ensure that the password is handled safely.
Design Modifications
Unauthorized modifications to the system and/or use of replacement parts not supplied by Schenck Process
voids Schenck Process's liability for any resulting damages. This especially applies to alterations which could
affect the operating safety of the system.
Replacing Components
Spare parts must meet the technical specifications indicated by Schenck Process. To ensure this requirement is
met, only genuine Schenck Process spare parts should be used. When using other spare parts, the warranty will
be void.
BV-H6411GB, 1221
-4-
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Safety notes
2.1
Signal Words
2.1.1
Potential dangers will always exist when working with technical devices. Dangers will arise if the machine
is incorrectly installed,
is started up incorrectly,
is operated by untrained personnel or
is repaired by unqualified personnel
The following signal words indicate throughout this manual dangers that may arise when handling this machine:
DANGER
This signal word indicates a danger that can immediately cause the most
severe injuries up to and including death.
Follow all instructions to prevent this from occurring.
WARNING
This signal word indicates a danger that can cause serious injuries up to
and including death.
Follow all instructions to prevent this from occurring.
CAUTION
This signal word indicates a danger that can cause slight or medium injuries.
Follow all instructions to prevent this from occurring.
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
-5-
Safety notes
2.1.2
Signal words for information on material damages and on the optimal use of the machine
STRICTLY OBSERVE
Signal word used to identify situations in which material or environmental
damage could occur.
Follow all instructions to prevent this from occurring.
HINT
Signal word used to identify information on using the product economically and at an optimal level of efficiency.
2.2
These fives safety rules must be followed in the order shown before work is begun on electrical systems. Once
the work is finished, they are to be applied in reverse order.
DANGER
Electric shock from live components.
There is a danger of life from an electric shock.
Take all possible precautions to ensure safety before work is begun on live
components. Observe, among other things, the following:
1. Disconnect the components.
2. Secure them against inadvertent restart.
3. Ensure that the components have been de-energized.
4. Above 1 KV: earth and bypass the cables.
5. Cover or shield adjacent, live components.
BV-H6411GB, 1221
-6-
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Safety notes
2.3
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
-7-
Overview
3 Overview
This chapter explains the principle functions of the DISOCONT Tersus system used in conjunction with a Stock
coal feeder.
3.1
The DISOCONT Tersus is a versatile family of modular weighing electronics for use with weighing and feeding
systems.
The DISOCONT Tersus performs all weighing and processing functions required for the measuring and feeding
of bulk solids. It is designed for continuous measuring and control tasks as well as discontinuous batching.
Used in conjunction with the specific application software for weighing and feeding tasks, the DISOCONT Tersus
can be used in the following industries:
Power
Steel
Basic Materials
Cement
Food
Chemical.
In connection with the corresponding mechanical equipment, the following systems are supported:
Belt Scales
Weigh Feeders
Solids flow meters (chutes)
Solids flow feeders
Loss-in-weight, gain-in-weight feeders
Mass flow meters (Coriolis meters)
Mass flow feeders (Coriolis feeders)
Filling systems.
The Stock DT-9 configuration of the DISOCONT Tersus is a modified version, optimized for feeding coal in power plant environment. There are two different versions of the DT-9. One is a completely redesigned and updated
version that is used in new installations. The second one uses the same components and software but has been
optimized for use as an upgrade to existing Stock 8085, 196, and 196NT installations. This version uses the
196NT connectors and mounting footprint.
VCU 20103 Designed for new installations where backwards compatibility is not required. This version is identified by the steel mounting frame and screw type electrical connectors. A Touch Screen HMI is always used
when a VCU 20103 is installed.
VCU 20104 Designed as a drop in replacement for the 196NT in existing installations. This version is identified
by the brown Amp style electrical connectors. The VCU 20104 can be used with either a Touch Screen HMI or
with an existing 196NT display.
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
-9-
Overview
3.2
Definitions
The table below explains some basic terms used in this manual.
Abbreviation
Meaning
Explanation
Unit
Actual feed
rate
Feedrate
setpoint
Totalized
amount
Belt speed
Inches/sec, m/sec
Belt load
Lbs/inch, Kg/m
QB
Platform load
Controller
magnitude
Xd
Deviation
3.3
Lbs, Kg
mA
Measuring Principle
The belt weighing system is designed to continuously weigh the amount of material transported on the feeder
belt. The actual weight of material transported is calculated by multiplying the feeder belt load, in lbs/inch, times
the feeder belt speed. The systems used to measure these two values are described below.
Belt Load
The feeder weight signal is generated by two load cells that support a single weigh roller. Two weigh span rollers
are located on each side of the weigh roller to accurately define the length of belt (and amount of coal) being
supported by the weigh roller.
Since the load cells only support half of the weight on the weigh span (each load cell supports 25 percent of the
total weight) the effective platform length (Leff) is calculated as:
Leff = Lg / 2
Leff = Effective platform length
Lg = Total platform length
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 10 -
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Overview
The microprocessor computes the feeder belt load by repeatedly reading the voltage signal from each load cell
and converting the signal into a digital value (binary number) using an analog to digital (A/D) converter. Each
value is then compared to parameters stored in permanent memory to determine if the signal is within acceptable limits, and if it is, it is stored for use. The same operation is then performed on the other load cell, and the
signals are compared to each other to test their validity. If the signals are determined to be invalid, the feeder is
switched to volumetric operation and the controller uses a simulated belt load calculated from an historical average stored in memory. If the signals are determined to be valid, the two load cell signals are summed, the tare is
subtracted and the result is multiplied by a scaling factor based on the load cell data specified in P04.01 LC
Characteristic Value and P04.02 LC Rated Capacity to determine the nominal weight of material on the belt. This
nominal value is then multiplied by the three range correction factors (P10.03, P10.04 and P10.05) to determine
the actual weight (QB).
The belt load (Q) is computed from the total weight (QB) as follows:
Q = QB / Leff
Note: The 196NT parameter 10 Weigh Span Length is the full distance between the two weigh span rollers. The
DT-9 parameter P04.03 Effective Platform Length is half the distance between the two weigh span rollers. For
any given feeder, the value used by the DT-9 should be one half of the value used by the 196NT.
Belt Speed
During normal feeder operation, the belt speed is calculated from the motor RPM rather then being measured
directly. The relation ship between motor speed and belt speed is determined during calibration and is displayed
as P10.02 Pulses per length.
The feeder control accepts a feedrate set point from the source selected using parameter P03.02 Feedrate Setpoint . This signal is compared with a computed feedrate derived from measured weight and speed signals to
generate the system error signal which is used to adjust the speed of the motor. Compensation for system stability is provided in the software using parameters P11.01 P-Component KP and P11.02 I-Component TN. These
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 11 -
Overview
calculations are repeated periodically and at each iteration, the actual feedrate is multiplied by the time interval
to calculate the totalizer increment. Separate totals are kept for gravimetric and volumetric operation.
3.4
The Remote Operating Mode is provided for normal operation, with the feeder feeding coal under control of the
plant control system. The source for the Start/Stop signal is designated by P03.01Feeder Start and the source
for the feedrate setpoint is designated by P03.02 Feedrate Setpoint. Analog feedback signals are generated
based on the entries to parameter block 14 Analog Outputs. Digital feedback signals (relay outputs) are generated based on the entries to parameter block 16 Digital Outputs.
While in the Remote Operating Mode, the feeder can use one of three systems to generate the required belt
speed set point.
Details for the different modes can be found in the appendix.
3.4.1
Gravimetric
Gravimetric Mode is the normal mode of operation. The feed rate is calculated using the belt speed and the actual belt load, and is controlled by the feed rate demand signal supplied by the plant control system. Parameter
P03.05 Maximum Feedrate, corresponds to the maximum demand signal and the minimum feed rate is set by
parameter P03.06 Minimum Feedrate. Parameter P02.05 Nominal Flow Rate should always match parameter
P03.05 Maximum Feedrate. The system can be set to produce an error if the demand signal is outside to normal
range.
3.4.2
Volumetric
Volumetric Mode is used when an error is detected in the weighing system. The actual feed rate is calculated
using the belt speed and an assumed belt load based on the average value over the last several hours, and is
controlled by the feed rate demand signal supplied by the plant control system. Parameter P03.05 Maximum
Feedrate, corresponds to the maximum demand signal and the minimum federate is set by parameter P03.06
Minimum Feedrate. Parameter P02.05 Nominal Flow Rate should always match parameter P03.05 Maximum
Feedrate. The system can be set to produce an error if the demand signal is outside to normal range.
3.4.3
Volumetric Control
Volumetric Control Mode is a variation of the gravimetric mode that is used when the feeder weigh system is
working correctly but the material on belt switch indicates that the belt is empty. The displayed feedrate and the
customer feedback signal is still based on the actual material being fed and the gravimetric total is still being
incremented but the belt speed is determined as if the feeder were in volumetric mode. This mode is used to
prevent the feeder from running to maximum belt speed when material flow is lost.
3.5
The OFF/Maint mode is is provided so that the feeder can be isolated from the plant control system during
startup, calibration and other maintenance operations. In this operating mode, the plant start/stop and demand
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 12 -
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Overview
signals are ignored and feedback signals are not generated. The feeder must be in OFF/Maint mode before a
system calibration can be performed. When the feeder is operated in the OFF/Maint mode, the belt speed is set
based on the value of parameter P02.16 Maintenance Speed. This is an open loop signal calculated as a percentage of the full scale signal to the motor speed control (see parameters P11.04 Lower Limit, P11.05 Upper
Limit and P01.06 Controller Magnitude Offset).
In OFF/Maint mode belt can be started via the buttons on the VHM, via the Local key on the 196NT keyboard or
a digital input as defined by P15.25 DI: Local Start .
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 13 -
DT-9 Setup
4 DT-9 Setup
This section describes the startup process when a new feeder is installed or when an existing DT-9 is replaced.
CAUTION
Installing the DT-9 in a feeder that uses the Stock Load Cell Amplifier
Installing the DT-9 in a feeder that uses the Stock Load Cell Amplifier will damage the DT-9. The old style Load Cell Amplifier must be replaced with the new
version before the DT-9 can be used.
CAUTION
DO NOT connect a normal Ethernet cable to X96 (red RJ45 connector).
This connector uses normally unused wires in the CAT 5 cable to provide power
to the touch screen display. Failure to follow this warning may result in damage
to the DT-9 or to the attached network device.
HINT
The weigh span is specified using parameter P04.03 Effective Platform
Length.
This parameter is the distance between the weigh roller and either one of the
weigh span rollers. This is one-half the value used by the 196NT, which is the
distance between the weigh span rollers.
4.1
Setup Notes
This section is a general description of the feeder setup process. This process can be performed using either
the touch screen HMI or a PC loaded with the EasyServe software. Section Operation Using the Touch
Screen HMI [39] describes the Touch Screen HMI and Section Operation Using EasyServe [49] describes EasyServe.
Events (Error conditions) are usually defined using three parameters. The first, which is usually hidden by
default, defines the input signal that initiates the event, the second specifies the delay between the time
when the error is detected and the time when the event is generated, and the third, specifies the type of
event that is generated (A, W1, W2 or IG). In most cases, the Event (error) can be disabled by setting the
type of event to IG.
The DT-9 has 15 digital inputs (DI 1 through DI 15) and 13 digital outputs (DO 1 through DO 13). Each is
assigned to a specific function, and wired to the appropriate external device. These assignments are hidden
and should not be changed. See chapter Default I/O Points for a list of the default assignments.
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 15 -
DT-9 Setup
The DT-9 has one analog input (AI 1) and two analog outputs (AO 1 and AO 2). AI 1 is normally used as the
customer demand signal, AO 1 is normally used to control the motor speed control and AO 2 is normally
used as the customer feedback signal. These assignments are hidden and should not be changed.
The DT-9 has four slots for auxiliary analog I/O cards (channels A10-A13). These channels are not normally
used. Contact Stock engineering if special analog I/O signals are required.
4.2
This procedure verifies that the feeder and its controls are operating properly, simulates feeder trip conditions,
and checks the principal input/output connections.
1. Apply power to the feeder.
2. Insure that the feeder is in OFF/Maint mode and that the touch screen HMI is set to the home screen.
3. Set the feeder parameters as described in section Setup Parameters [17].
4. Interpret event messages, if any, and correct faults.
5. Unbalance the load cells by engaging the calibration weight on one side of the weigh roller. The display
should indicate volumetric mode. Unbalance each load cell in order to check both sides, then remove the
calibration weight(s).
6. Press and maintain the Jog>> button to verify that belt travel is in the in correct direction.
7. Run the feeder in LOCAL mode by pressing the Run>> button. The feeder will operate at the maintenance
speed programmed in P02.16 Maintenance Speed. Check the motor speed for stability.
8. Run the feeder in LOCAL by pressing the Run>> button. Set the Belt Drive Motor (Run Enable) switch to the
STOP position. The feeder should stop and the display should show a IL01 Event: Run Disabled error message. Acknowledge the event and return the Belt Drive Motor switch to its normal position.
9. Stop the feeder and deflect the material-on-belt limit switch paddle to simulate a loaded belt. Run the feeder
in the LOCAL mode to verify that the feeder trips. If it does not, check the adjustment of the paddle switch
cams.
10. Check the event display or the event line on EasyServe. They should both show a W M12 Event: Coal on
Belt alarm message with a time stamp. Acknowledge the event and return the coal-on-belt paddle to its normal position
11. Calibrate the feeder as described in section Calibration [20].
12. Align the analog inputs and outputs as described in section Analog Trim Function [27].
13. Hang the calibration weights. Produce or simulate a feeder start permissive. Check feedrate and feedback
linearity by applying demand signals of 100, 75, 50, and 25 percent. Compare each demand signal applied
to the feedback signal output. Compare the demand feedrate setpoint (service value 4) with the measured
feed rate of the feeder for each signal.
14. Energize the feeder in the REMOTE mode and deflect the discharge pluggage alarm (or touch the discharge
pluggage sensor with a metal rod). After the preset delay in P15.10, the feeder should be de-energized. If
the feeder does not trip, check the adjustment of the cams for the paddle switch or the sensitivity setting of
the sensor according to the procedure in the original equipment manual.
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 16 -
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
DT-9 Setup
15. Check the event display or the event line on EasyServe. They should both show a W M07 Event: Discharge
Pluggage alarm with a time stamp. Acknowledge the event and return the discharge switch to its original
state.
16. Return the feeder to REMOTE operation.
4.3
Setup Parameters
The microprocessor controller is tailored to specific feeders and customers needs by the setup parameters.
Feeder-specific physical dimensions must be entered as well as user-selectable display modes and set points.
These values are stored in permanent memory and are only entered once. See section Parameters [59] for a
complete list and description of the parameters.
Note: In any given application, the majority of the DT-9 parameters are either not used, or fixed by the design of
the feeder and cabinet. These parameters can be viewed using EasyServe in expert mode (default password
7353) but should not be changed.
The controllers will come preprogrammed from Stock Equipment Company but if changes are needed, there are
two ways to do this:
Using EasyServe Software (See section Parameters [59])
Using the Touch Screen HMI (See Section The 'Setup' Screen [42])
4.3.1
The following is a list of parameters that are commonly changed during startup. Their values should be recorded
for future reference. See section Parameters [59] for a complete list and detailed descriptions.
P-No.
P-Name
Actual
The following parameters set the feedrate associated with a 100 % demand signal (usually 20 mA). They must
always be set to the same value. See project specific documentation for the correct value.
P02.05
P03.05
Maximum Feedrate
The following parameter is the belt speed associated with the nominal (maximum) feedrate and the nominal
material density. It is calculated as:
P02.05 Nominal Flow Rate) / (300 X Nom. Density X P04.10 Load cross section
Inputs are in lbs/hour, lbs/cubic ft and square feet. Results are in inches/sec.
P02.06
Nominal Speed
The following parameter sets the minimum feedrate clamp. See project specific documentation for the correct
value.
P03.06
Minimum Feedrate
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 17 -
DT-9 Setup
P-No.
P-Name
Actual
The following parameter selects the text string displayed on the top line of the touch screen HMI.
P02.03
Scale Name
The following parameters select the units and formats that are used to display the various feeder information on
the display.
P02.01
Language
P02.02
Units
P02.07
Display Formats
P02.08
P02.09
Counter 1 Unit
P02.10
Counter 2 Unit
P02.11
Counter 3 Unit
The following parameter selects the demand signal to the motor speed control when the feeder is running in
local mode. It is normally set to 50 %.
P02.16
Maintenance Speed
The following parameter specifies the length of belt that is supported by the load cells. It must be set to the distance between the first weigh span roller and the central weigh roller (one half the distance between the weigh
span rollers). See project specific documentation for the correct value.
P04.03
The following parameter specifies the characteristics of the motor tachometer. See project specific documentation for the correct value.
P04.09
P/rev
The following parameter specifies the area under the leveling bar. See project specific documentation for the
correct value.
P04.10
P07.02 sets the maximum time between Belt Motion Monitor (BMM) pluses and P07.03 selects the type of event
that is generated when this limit is exceeded. Set P07.03 to IG if a BMM is not installed. See project specific
documentation for the correct values.
P07.02
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 18 -
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
DT-9 Setup
P-No.
P-Name
P07.03
Actual
A / W1 / W2 / IG
The following parameter specifies the distance between the calibration probe bosses. See project specific
documentation for the correct value.
P10.01
The following parameter specifies the actual value of the calibration weigh. This value is stamped on the weight.
P10.08
Calibration Weight
The following parameters specify the cleanout conveyor duty cycle. Set P13.02 to zero to run the cleanout conveyor continuously.
P13.02
CleanOut ON Time
Hours
P13.03
Hours
The following parameters control the Loss of Material on Belt event. Setting P05.14 to A causes the feeder trip
(stop the feeder) when the coal on belt signal is lost during normal operation. Setting P05.14 to W1 or W2 will
produce a warning. P05.13 sets the delay between the time that the signal is lost and the time that the event is
generated (This is normally set to one second). Set P05.14 to IG to disable this feature.
P15.13
P15.14
A / W1 / W2 / IG
The following parameters are used to control the Level/Temperature Sensor event. The Level/Temperature
Sensor input is normally connected to either a flow monitor in the downspout or a temperature switch at the
feeder discharge. Setting P15.21 to A causes the feeder trip (stop the feeder) when the coal flow monitor indicates a loss of flow in the downspout. Setting P15.21 to W1 or W2 will produce a warning. P15.20 sets the delay
between the time that the signal is detected and the time that the event is generated. Set P15.20 to 100 lbs for a
quick response. Set P15.21 to IG to disable this feature. See project specific documentation for the correct value.
P15.20
P15.21
A / W1 / W2 / IG
The following parameters specify the Ethernet communications address. The default values should not be
changed unless the DT-9 is connected to a local network.
P23.01
IP Address
P23.02
Net Mask
P23.03
Gateway
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 19 -
DT-9 Setup
4.4
Calibration
The feeder should be calibrated at startup, after one month of initial operation and every six months there after.
Calibration should also be performed following a weigh roller adjustment or replacement of the belt, the CPU
board, or a load cell module. The controller should also be calibrated after the controller firmware is updated or a
Load Default Values operation is performed. Calibration is accomplished in two separate steps.
Step one of calibration consists of the elimination of system tare, which includes the weight of the weigh roller,
load cell support assembly, and the feeder belt. It also involves measuring belt speed and its relationship to motor speed. Step two calibrates the load cell output with a known weight.
Cancellation of feeder tare is performed by measuring the average weigh system output over exactly two belt
revolutions (eight tape passes) and then subtracting this amount from the total weight measurement. When the
belt is running empty, it produces a zero average contribution to the totalized weight. In normal operation, the
average tare is automatically subtracted from the gross weight of the belt. Therefore, only the material weight on
the belt is reflected as totalized weight.
While the empty belt is being weighed, the belt speed is also being accurately measured. This is done by measuring the time it takes a retro-reflective marker, attached to the belt, to travel between two fixed points on the
feeder body. This parameter is measured eight times to determine repeatability and to compensate for variations
in belt thickness. From this data, the belt speed is calculated and the relationship between belt speed and motor
speed is established. The feeder operates with zero belt slippage. Therefore, the ratio of belt speed to average
motor speed is constant. This ratio is stored in memory and is used to determine the belt speed for any motor
speed.
The span of the weighing system is set after the tare has been measured. A known weight is applied to the
weigh roller and the average output over exactly two belt revolutions (eight tape passes) is measured. This calibrated span factor is stored in memory and used to accurately determine the value of the weight of the material
on the belt.
Note: The DT-9 parameter P04.03 Effective Platform Length is the distance from either weigh span roller to the
central weigh roller, which is supported by the load cell. This is half the distance between the two weigh span
rollers. For any given feeder, the value used by the DT-9 should be one half of the value used by the 196NT.
4.4.1
Performing Calibrations
The following special calibration processes can be preformed for testing or special maintenance operations, but
are not normally required.
1. TC: Span calibration - Chain test calibration.
2. LB: Pulses / Belt - Belt speed calibration.
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 20 -
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
DT-9 Setup
4.4.2
For the feeder to weigh accurately, the central weigh roller must be aligned with the weigh span rollers within
0.002 inch (0.05 mm). Refer to Fig.
Note: The parts shown may differ from those that actually shipped. This figure is to be used as a general
guideline.
Weigh Roller Adjustment Procedure
1. Mount the calibration weight on both load cells.
2. Insert the checking bars (A2451-1) through the discharge end access door of the feeder, adjacent to the
sides of the belt, and with their machined surfaces resting on the weigh span and weigh rollers.
3. Beginning on either side, insert a 0.005 in. shim between each of the three rollers and the machined surface
of the checking bar (three places).
6 Adjustment Block
2 .005 SHIM
7 Plug
3 Checking Bar
8 Jam Nut
4 Belt
9 Drag Link
5 Load Cell
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 21 -
DT-9 Setup
1. Loosen the jam nut, and then turn the adjustment block to lower the weigh roller.
2. Slowly turn the adjustment block to raise the weigh roller until the shim is touching both checking bar and
weigh roller (slip fit). Tighten the jam nut.
3. Similarly, adjust the weigh roller on the opposite side of the feeder.
4. Remove the checking bars.
5. Remove the calibration weights.
6. The feeder must be recalibrated after weigh roller adjustment. (See procedure on next page.)
4.4.3
Basic (CAL 1)
This operation measures the tare factor and the belt speed factor and updates the following parameters.
P10.02 Pulses per length
P10.10 Basic Tare
P10.11 Belt Circuit No.
Note: The calibration results are not saved to the parameter table until the operator accepts them buy pressing
<Apply> in EasyServe, <SAVE> on the (optional) Touch Screen HMI or <ENTER> on the 196NT display.
Requirements:
The weigh span must be level prior calibration. If the weigh roller height has been adjusted, a complete calibration (Basic (Cal 1) and Span (Cal 2)) must be performed.
The calibration probes must be installed and in the correct location.
Cal probe A is located closer to the feeder inlet.
De-energize the DT-9 before installing the probes.
Four retro-reflective tape clips must be installed on the belt.
The tape clips must be farther apart than the distance between the cal probes or a Probe Error will be
generated and the calibration will not complete.
Four tape clips are normally used but two can be used if the feeder is very shot or eight can be used if
the feeder is very long or slow. If two tape clips are used, the feeder will be calibrated over four belt revolutions, instead of two, and P10.11 Belt Circuit No. will be twice the correct value. If eight tape clips are
used, the feeder will be calibrated over one belt revolution and P10.11 Belt Circuit No. will be half the
correct value.
The feeder must NOT be in volumetric mode.
The feeder must be in OFF/Maint mode.
The feeder belt must be empty.
The calibration weights must NOT be installed.
Calibration Procedure:
Before starting the calibration, record the values of parameters P10.02 Pulses per length and P10.10 Basic Tare
1. These will be used later to verify that the calibration results are consistent.
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 22 -
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
DT-9 Setup
2. If the calibration is being performed using EasyServe, navigate to the calibration window using the Tools |
Calibration Programs menu items. If the (optional) touch screen HMI is being used, first log in, then go to the
calibration display by pressing the <Setup> and <Calibration> buttons.
3. Select Basic (Cal 1)
4. Initiate the Basic (Cal 1) calibration process by pressing the <Start> button in EasyServe or the (optional)
Touch Screen HMI, or the <CAL 1> button on the 196NT display.
5. The feeder will begin to run and go through a stabilization process.
The motor will first run at a one-half the value specified in P02.16 Maintenance Speed, then at the full
value of P02.16.
6. After Stabilizing, the feeder will go through eight tape passes. The DT-9 will display the pass number and
tachometer pulses on the screen.
7. Upon completion of the calibration four values will be displayed on the screen:
Deviation (Variation between belt speed measurements)
Belt Circuit No (P10.11)
Basic Tare (P10.10)
Pulses per Length Value (P10.02).
8. After successful completion, the screen will prompt you to either save or cancel the calibration values.
Note: If the calibration results in bad values, correct any mechanical issues and run the calibration program
again.
9. Press the <SAVE>, < ENTER> or <Apply> button to store the new calibration values, or the <EXIT> or
<Cancel> button to abort the calibration leaving the parameters unchanged.
10. After the calibration has been performed, verify that the results are consistent by comparing the latest values
of P10.02 and P10.10 to the previous values (Recorded in step 1). Calculate the percent change using the
formula [100 x (new value - old value) / (new value)]. If the result is greater then 0.25 %, check for mechanical errors in the weigh system and repeat the calibration.
4.4.4
Span (CAL 2)
This operation measures the load cell span factor and the belt speed factor, and updates the following parameters.
P10.03 Range Correction TW
P10.11 Belt Circuit No.
Note: The calibration results are not saved to the parameter table until the operator accepts them buy pressing
<Apply> in EasyServe, <SAVE> on the (optional) Touch Screen HMI or <ENTER> on the 196NT display.
Requirements:
The weigh span must be level prior calibration. If the weigh roller height has been adjusted, a complete calibration (Basic (Cal 1) and Span (Cal 2)) must be performed.
The calibration probes must be installed and in the correct location.
Cal probe A is located closer to the feeder inlet.
De-energize the DT-9 before installing the probes.
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 23 -
DT-9 Setup
Calibration Procedure:
1. Before starting the calibration, record the value of parameters P10.02 Pulses per length and P10.03 Range
Correction TW. These will be used later to verify that the calibration results are consistent.
2. If the calibration is being performed using EasyServe, navigate to the calibration window using the Tools |
Calibration Programs menu items. If the (optional) touch screen HMI is being used, first log in, then go to the
calibration display by pressing the <Setup> and <Calibration> buttons.
3. Select Span (Cal 2)
4. Initiate the Span (Cal 2) calibration process by pressing the <Start> button in EasyServe or the (optional)
Touch Screen HMI, or the <CAL 2> button on the 196NT display.
5. The screen will prompt to add the calibration weight. The top line of the display will show the value entered in
P10.08 and the bottom line show what the load cells are measuring based on the current calibration parameters. Press the <ENTER> or <Start> button to proceed with calibration.
6. The feeder will begin to run and go through a stabilization process
The motor will run at the value specified in P02.16 Maintenance Speed.
7. After Stabilizing the feeder will go through eight tape passes
The pass number and tachometer pulses will be displayed on the screen
8. Upon completion of the calibration, four values will be displayed on the screen.
Deviation (Variation between belt speed measurements)
Belt Circuit No (P10.11)
Range Correction TW (P10.03)
Pulses per length. Value (P10.02)
9. After successful completion, the screen will prompt you to either save or cancel the calibration values.
Note: If the calibration results in bad values, correct any mechanical issues and run the calibration program
again.
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 24 -
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
DT-9 Setup
10. Press the <SAVE>, < ENTER> or <Apply> button to store the new calibration values, or the <EXIT> or
<Cancel> button to abort the calibration leaving the parameters unchanged.
11. After the calibration has been performed, verify that the results are consistent by comparing the latest values
of P10.02 and P10.03 to the previous values (Recorded in step 1). Calculate the percent change using the
formula [100 x (new value - old value) / (new value)]. If the result is greater then 0.25 %, check for mechanical errors in the weigh system and repeat the calibration.
4.4.5
This operation performs a chain calibration using the values in P10.07 Simulation Travel (Belt Rev.) and P10.09
Test Chain Weight. The results are used to update the following parameter.
P10.04 Range Correction TC.
Note: The calibration results are not saved to the parameter table until the operator accepts them buy pressing
<Apply> in EasyServe, <SAVE> on the (optional) Touch Screen HMI or <ENTER> on the 196NT display.
Note: The calibration probes are not used during this operation and do not need to be installed.
Requirements:
The weigh span must be level prior calibration. If the weigh roller height has been adjusted, a complete calibration (Basic (Cal 1) and Span (Cal 2)) must be performed.
The feeder must NOT be in volumetric mode.
The feeder must be in OFF/Maint mode.
The feeder belt must be empty.
The calibrated test chains must be installed.
Calibration Procedure:
1. Before starting the calibration, record the value of parameter P10.04 Range Correction TC. This will be used
later to verify that the calibration results are consistent.
2.
If the calibration is being performed using EasyServe, navigate to the calibration window using the Tools |
Calibration Programs menu items. If the (optional) touch screen HMI is being used, first log in, then go to the
calibration display by pressing the <Setup> and <Calibration> buttons.
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 25 -
DT-9 Setup
4.4.6
The LB: Pulses per Belt calibration process is not intended for use in coal feeder applications and should not
normally be preformed.
4.4.7
TA: Tare
This operation measures the weight of the empty belt (tare factor) for a period of time based on the value of
P10.11 Belt Circuit No. times P10.07 Simulation Travel (Belt Rev.), and updates the following parameter.
P10.10 Basic Tare
Note: The calibration results are not saved to the parameter table until the operator accepts them buy pressing
<Apply> in EasyServe, <SAVE> on the (optional) Touch Screen HMI or <ENTER> on the 196NT display.
Note: The calibration probes are not used during this operation and do not need to be installed.
Requirements:
The weigh span must be level prior calibration. If the weigh roller height has been adjusted, a complete calibration (Basic (Cal 1) and Span (Cal 2)) must be performed.
The feeder must NOT be in volumetric mode.
The feeder must be in OFF/Maint mode.
The feeder belt must be empty.
The calibration weights must NOT be installed.
Calibration Procedure:
1. Before starting the calibration, record the value of parameter P10.10 Basic Tare. This will be used later to
verify that the calibration results are consistent.
2. If the calibration is being performed using EasyServe, navigate to the calibration window using the Tools |
Calibration Programs menu items. If the (optional) touch screen HMI is being used, first log in, then go to the
calibration display by pressing the <Setup> and <Calibration> buttons.
3. Select TA: Tare calibration.
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 26 -
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
DT-9 Setup
4. Initiate the TA: Tare calibration process by pressing the <Start> button in EasyServe or the (optional) Touch
Screen HMI. This process cannot be performed using the 196NT display.
5. The feeder will begin to run and go through a stabilization process
Run the motor at the value specified in P02.16 Maintenance Speed.
6. After Stabilizing, the feeder will run for the specified time (P10.07 times P10.11). The DT-9 will display the
percent completion and the current tare value as a percentage of the rated belt load. The nominal belt load is
defined as the nominal flow rate divided by the nominal belt speed.
7. Upon completion of the calibration two values will be displayed on the screen:
Deviation Percent deviation between the new tare value and the previous value.
Tare Tare value as a percentage of the nominal belt load.
8. After successful completion, the screen will prompt you to either save or cancel the calibration values.
9. Press the <SAVE>, < ENTER> or <Apply> button to store the new calibration values, or the <EXIT> or
<Cancel> button to abort the calibration leaving the parameters unchanged.
Note: If the calibration results in bad values, correct any mechanical issues and run the calibration program
again.
10. After the calibration has been performed, verify that the results are consistent by comparing the latest value
of P10.10 to the previous value (Recorded in step 1). Calculate the percent change using the formula [100 x
(new value - old value) / (new value)]. If the result is greater then 0.25 %, check for mechanical errors in the
weigh system and repeat the calibration.
4.5
The feeder controls respond to a feed rate demand signal and return isolated analog feedback signals. W hen the
input and output modules associated with these signals are used with the plants control system, they must be
adjusted prior to operating the feeder under remote control. To perform this procedure, Stock Equipment Company recommends the Fluke Model 87 Digital Multimeter or equivalent. The DC accuracy for milliamps should be
0.2 % and the DC accuracy for voltage should be 0.1 % plus 1 digit. It also must have a 4 digit highresolution mode.
Setting analog trim values using the touch screen HMI (See section Operation Using the Touch Screen HMI
[39])
Setting analog trim values using EasyServe (See section Operation Using EasyServe [49])
Note: The plant combustion control system is the preferred source of the demand signal. This will precisely align
the feeder to the control system.
The DT-9 has one built in analog input (4 - 20 mA or 0 10 VDC) and two built in analog outputs (4 - 20mA only). These I/O channels are described below.
1. AI 1: Connected to wires SIG+ & SIG- (X6-3, X6-4 or X6-3, X6-5). This input is normally used for the customer demand signal. The value in P03.02 Feedrate Setpoint (normally hidden) should be set to AI 1.
2. AO 1: Connected to wires 142, 143 & 144 (X6-6 and X6-7). This output is normally used for the motor speed
control (VFD). The value in P11.03 AO: Motor Speed Control should be set to AO 1.
3. AO 2: Connected to wires 139, 140 & 141 (X6-8 and X6-9). This output is normally used for the customer
feedback signal. The value in P14.04 AO: Actual Flow Rate should be set to AO 2.
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 27 -
DT-9 Setup
In addition to the built in analog channels, there are four slots in which analog I/O cards can be installed. Parameter group 1 is used to assign each slot to an analog I/O channel (AI 2 through AI 5 or AO 3 through AO 6). Slots
can be either input or output, depending on the type of card installed. Each card is individually isolated.
1. A10: Connected to terminal blocks X12-1 and X12-2. Can be assigned to AI 2 or AO 3.
2. A11: Connected to terminal blocks X12-3 and X12-4. Can be assigned to AI 3 or AO 4.
3. A12: Connected to terminal blocks X12-5 and X12-6. Can be assigned to AI 4 or AO 3.
4. A13: Connected to terminal blocks X12-7 and X12-8. Can be assigned to AI 5 or AO 6.
4.6
Belt Monitoring
The DISOCONT Tersus has an expanded belt monitor integrated into it that monitors belt drift and slippage. Belt
drift monitoring is activated by configuring the source for the belt sensor in the P07.04 DI: Source Belt Sensor
parameters. Monitoring may only be activated if the conveyor is equipped with a belt with integrated triangular
markings and if the sensor has been installed.
Additionally, differences in weight across the belt, unavoidable despite its high quality, can be identified over one
belt circuit and be compensated for (BIC). This function is activated by the P07.05 BIC Active parameters.
Belt-drift switches feed to inputs used for the identification of external events. Furthermore, belt motion can be
monitored using additional (1 or 2) sensors (parameter group '2-Sensor Slip').
4.6.1
The sensor records the position relative to the feeder frame of the triangles integrated into the belt. The result is
presented after one complete belt circuit.
The departure of the course of the belt from the neutral position can be shown in the operating area Setup.
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 28 -
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
DT-9 Setup
P07.04
Defines the input channel used to connect the sensor that monitors the triangle in the belt and
activates the function.
P07.08
Defines system behavior if the sensor and the triangles identify belt slippage.
P07.09
The length L of the triangle, measured in the direction of belt motion (value is given in the scales
data sheet), as per the diagram.
P07.10
P07.11
Measured value for the neutral position relative to the feeder frame. Upon commissioning, the
sensor must be set such that the display for deviation from the neutral position indicates zero.
Small deviations can be adjusted later via parameters.
P07.14 - P07.18
Tolerance thresholds and reactions to events belt-drift (advance warning) and belt-drift (critical
condition).
The factory defaults are suitable for most situations.
Procedure to be followed
Step
Task
1
Execute the adjustment program 'LB: Pulses/Belt' and use the result after two complete belt circuits.
Set the sensor relative to the belt so that the course indicator shows zero. Small deviations can be adjusted
via P21.01.
For example:
For P07.12 = 0, display of belt drift = 0.2 then
For P07.12 = -0.2, display of belt drift = 0
By altering the value of P21.01, belt drift can be simulated and the system's reaction to this condition can be
observed.
Set P07.12 back to its original value after the test.
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 29 -
DT-9 Setup
4.6.2
The automatic belt influence compensation (BIC = Belt Influence Ccompensation) monitors and corrects the
influence of the belt on the material weight measurement. As with belt monitoring, it requires a sensor and a
marking in the belt. BIC improves feed consistency and batch accuracy, if batch mode is preset.
For the initial commissioning, we recommend switching BIC off (P07.05 = NO). The belt-drift monitoring [28]
must be activated to enable this function.
After commissioning, BIC can be activated once normal bulk material conditions have been established on the
belt (P07.05 = YES). The parameters for the belt drift monitoring must have been set. The BIC will have measured the belt influence after around 10 belt circuits and will be able to correct the weight value accordingly. It
does not require setting.
4.6.3
Belt slippage is defined as the difference between the speed of the belt as set by the head pulley and the actual
speed of the belt. Belt slippage can result from an excessively high removal force on the bulk material from the
hopper, from soiling of the drive roller or from excessively low belt tension. Slippage influences directly measuring and feeding accuracy, as the measured value for belt speed is calculated using the rotational speed of the
motor.
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 30 -
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
DT-9 Setup
Setting
P18.01
P18.02
P18.04
P18.05
P18.06
P18.07
Tolerance threshold level for the difference of the speed measured across both measuring channels in relation to the actual speed.
P18.08
P18.09
Tab. 3 : Setting and adjusting the two-sensor belt slippage monitoring
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 31 -
Operating source
Service work
VHM touch
VHM touch
User Interface
Type
(fixed)
VHM Operating Panel
(mobile per cable or wireless)
Fieldbus from the control computer
(X)
Host computer
EasyServe PC software
EasyServe
DANGER
Feeding can be started with the operating panel. This switches on drives
and bulk material may flow. The operator must ensure that no damage can
be caused by beginning feeding before doing so.
Dangerous situations may arise if communication is interrupted while the
device is being operated via a non-permanent line (pluggable cable, wireless). Therefore, such methods of accessing control should be reserved
for service work only.
5.1
After a loss of power at the operating panel, the console will try automatically to reconnect to the scales with
which it was communicating before the power failure after a specific, adjustable period of time. During this time
the 'Feeder' page can again be selected to select a different scale.
If a data connection exists and communication with a different scales is to be activated, the existing connection
must first be closed. This can be done after logging on as a privileged user with the key '<->Scale'.
An error message is displayed on the screen if a connection is lost. If the connection cannot be re-established
after several attempts, the operating panel will open the configuration dialog.
The selection of a scales is shown in the following chapters, depending on the medium of communication.
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 33 -
5.1.1
Precondition: The VHM operating panel must be connected to the ethernet network to which the control unit
VCU is also connected. The hardware requirements are described in the system manual BV-H2406.
The channel 'Ethernet' must be selected in the operating panel configuration (Configuring the Communication
Path (Com)).
Once the first connection has been made, the operating panel searches for VCU controllers in the network and
displays the outcome on the page 'Feeder'. A scales can be selected and a data connection to it established by
pressing the corresponding key.
5.1.2
Preconditions: A bluetooth adapter must be connected both to the operating panel and the scales. The scale
has to be in the range of the function. The hardware requirements are described in the system manual BVH2406.
The Bluetooth channel has to be selected (Configuring the Communication Path (Com)) in the configuration of
the operator panel.
Once the communication path has been selected, the console will search for bluetooth adapters within range.
Other Bluetooth adapters can be found and displayed along with controller VCUs. The outcome is shown on the
page Feeder.
Note: A complete search for all bluetooth adapters can take several seconds. A progress indicator is displayed
during the search. There will also be Bluetooth adapters shown that no connection can be established to, either
because they are not DISOCONT Tersus controllers or there is already a different data connection.
Scales can be selected and a data connection to them established by pressing the corresponding key. It may
take several seconds before a connection is established. The respective status will be shown in the header of
the operating panel while a connection is being established.
Note: Connection can be established to one scales only, assuming the scales are not already connected to another bluetooth adapter. The other connection may first need to be closed. If there is another connection, the
operating panel will try constantly to connect.
If bluetooth is used, the scales to whose bluetooth adapter a connection has been established is the only scales
with which communication can be made. The ethernet destination address may not be changed in the VHM.
5.1.3
Prerequisites: The operator panel and controller have to be in the same RS485 network. The hardware requirements are described in the system manual BV-H2406.
The RS485 channel has to be selected in the configuration of the operating panel (Configuring the Communication Path (Com)).
Once the communication path has been selected, the operator panel will switch to the Feeder page. This is
where the address of VCU is set. The last digits of the Ethernet address (P25.07) of the scale controller will be
used again for addressing at the RS485 bus.
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 34 -
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
The system performs a check of the communication path once the address has been entered. If communication
can be established under the address entered, this is indicated by a green marking beside the address number.
Otherwise this marking will be red.
Communication with the scales can be established with the key 'Con.Scale'.
Note: The operating panel is the master at the bus. Therefore only one operating panel can be connected to the
bus at any one time.
5.2
5.2.1
If the connection is to be established by cable the connection should be made using ethernet.
Preconditions: The EasyServe PC is connected with an ethernet cable to the scales network.
Note: Use either an uncoded VCU socket or, if using a red-coded socket, use a special cable (yellow) for the
connection.
The EasyServe address must be in the same ethernet subnetwork as the scales' address. If necessary the address can be changed by EasyServe in the scanner. A scales can also be addressed using a router if the network has already been configured. The scales address would then be entered manually, not using the scanner.
The PC must then have an IP address in the directly connected subnetwork.
The EasyServe Connection I Ethernet (Scanner) menu item is the easiest way to select. This will display all of
the scales available in the network. The scales' connection parameters can be altered and a connection to the
scales made here.
If the scale is connected to a different subnet, it can be selected manually using Connection | Ethernet (manual)
and entering the IP address of the scale.
5.2.2
RS-232 is used to make a connection in special cases only, e.g. when no connection can be made via ethernet.
It may be necessary to establish a connection via RS-232 if there is a power failure to a device while a software
program is being loaded into it in order to re-load the software.
Precondition: The PC serial interface (COM) is connected by cable to VCU socket X97. For details see the
system manual BV-H2406.
Use the EasyServe menu item 'Connection | Serial...' to connect.
The only permissible transfer format is 38400 baud, 8-O-1. Select the PC COM port and the address of the
scales. The is stored in scales parameter P21.01 Own Address.
Note: A software update can take up to 20 minutes using the RS-232 interface. Other functions work slower than
they would if the connection was made using Ethernet.
5.2.3
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 35 -
Preconditions: The scales have been connected with a W LAN modem to the Ethernet. The WLAN modem has
been configuered as an access point and its ethernet address is in the same subnetwork as the scales. The PC
also has a WLAN modem, and the IP address of the PC is in the same network as the scales' IP address.
In general the W LAN modem is configured using a browser before use. This configuration is described in the
modem's user manual.
The WLAN in the PC is activated and the WLAN access point selected. Once the connection to the WLAN access point has been made, all of the functions can be accessed on the PC as they would if an ethernet connection were made by cable.
5.2.4
A connection is more complicated to establish via bluetooth than via WLAN. The only scales that can be accessed is the one to whose bluetooth adapter the connection was established.
Preconditions: Scales and PC are equipped with bluetooth adapters.
Establishing a connection:
1
The PC user must enter a PAN once the connection to the bluetooth adapter has been established.
The address of the bluetooth scales is one number lower than the scales' IP-subnetwork set by parameter. The PC address must be in the same subnetwork.
The scales can now be selected using the scanner or by means of a direct address input. Other scales
in the network cannot be addressed.
5.3
Preconditions: The PC has an ethernet connection to the VCU. Java is installed on the PC and can be started.
Temporary file storage may not be activated in Java as this can cause erroneous status messages to occur.
Establishing the connection: The URL of the operator interface homepage must be entered into the browser
address line. This URL arises as follows:
< Adresse>/hmi/start_<Skalierung>x.html
Address: VCU IP address
Scaling: size of the display on the screen. The values 2, 3 or 4 can be entered.
Example: http://192.168.240.1/hmi/start_2x.html
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 36 -
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
The user interface in the browser corresponds largely to the display on the VHM operating panel with the exception of the field in which a different scales can be selected, which is not available. The configuration dialogs for
the VHM operating panel itself are also not available. Keyboard and mouse are used for operation so the entry
keyboard is not shown on the screen.
5.4
The controller comes with a web server that opens a scales 'homepage'. This homepage is available in English
only.
Preconditions: The PC has an ethernet connection to the VCU.
Establishing the connection: The IP address of the controller must be entered into the browser address line.
Various data from the controller can be called up in the left-hand navigation bar.
Navigation entry
Function
HMI_2x
Open at a different scale the same controller interface as is in the operating panel. Also
refer to: Connection between a Web Browser and a VCU Scales Controller [36]
HMI_3x
HMI_4x
Events
Parameter changes
Command Log
Totalizer hourly
Table of hourly-saved totalizing integrators / counters. The values can also be viewed
on the operating panel VHM.
The minute after the full hour at which the saving occurs can be set in P20.01.
Totalizer daily
Memory depth is approx. 1,000 entries. All entries are recorded with the entry time. The table is refreshed only
when it is called up. The values can be exported into a PC file for analysis with standard programs using selectcopy-paste.
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 37 -
6.1
Initial Configuration
When the DT-9 is first powered up, the HMI will automatically log in to the connected DT-9 controller. In order to
change the settings of the HMI itself, it is necessary to log out of the DT-9 and log into the HMI via the following
steps:
1. From the Home screen, press the [Login] button and enter the DT-9 password (the default is 7353). The
Home screen will reappear and the [Login] button will change to [Logout] to indicate that you have successfully logged in to the DT-9.
2. Press the [Sel. Scale] button. A prompt will appear asking if you really want to exit the scale. Press [YES].
3. The main HMI configuration screen will now appear. A list of available DT-9 controllers on the local subnet
will be displayed on the upper left portion of the screen, and the main function buttons will be displayed along
the right edge. The display function buttons are described in the following subsections. Most of the function
buttons will be grayed out and unavailable. To gain full access, press the [Login] button and enter the HMI
password (the default is 7353). Press the [Start] button to return to the main HMI configuration screen, or
press the [Change Password] button to change the display password. All of the function buttons will now be
available, indicating that you have successfully logged in to the HMI.
6.1.1
Press the [VHM Addr.] button to change the network settings of the HMI. This screen allows you to set the IP
Address, Subnet, and Gateway of the HMI. These settings should be obtained from your network administrator.
Press the [Save] button to save any changes you have made to these settings before exiting.
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 39 -
6.1.2
Press the [Display] button to adjust the HMI display settings. The Inactivity Timeout parameter defines the
length of time that the HMI will remain at full brightness after being touched before entering Sleep Mode and
dimming the display. The Working Brightness parameter adjusts the brightness of the display during normal
operation, and the Sleeping Brightness parameter adjusts the brightness of the display during Sleep Mode.
Press the [Save] button to save any changes you have made to these settings before exiting.
6.1.3
Press the [Feeder] button to select the DT-9 controller that the HMI will connect to. A list of all available DT-9
controllers on the local subnet will be displayed, and the selected controller will be indicated with a check mark.
To connect to a different DT-9, press the check box next to the desired controller and then press the [Select]
button. The HMI will then connect to the new DT-9 the next time it is power cycled or when the [Con. Scale] button is pressed. To rescan the local subnet, press the [Scan] button.
6.1.4
Press the [Config] button to adjust the networking options of the HMI. The URL of start page parameter defines
the start page of the DT-9s embedded web server. The Start timeout in seconds parameter defines the amount
of time that the HMI will attempt to connect to the attached DT-9 before defaulting to the HMI configuration
screen.
6.1.5
Press the [Com] button to change the method by which the HMI will communicate with an attached DT-9 controller. The available options are Ethernet, Bluetooth, and RS485. The factory default is Ethernet, and this
should not be changed.
6.1.6
Press the [Calibration] button and follow the on-screen prompts to calibrate the touch screen.
6.1.7
Press the [Con. Scale] button to exit the HMI calibration screen and return to the DT-9 Home screen.
6.2
Display Functions
6.2.1
The Home screen is the first screen displayed after the HMI has finished booting. It displays the current status of
the feeder, and contains the main operating controls.
The Mode Select buttons are located on the bottom left of the Home screen, and are used to select the operating
mode of the feeder (See sections Operating Modes - Remote [12] and Operating Modes OFF/Maintenance
[12] for more information on operating modes).
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 40 -
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
6.2.2
The Trend screen is a customizable line graph that can be used to plot various data items that are logged by
the DT-9 over time. See Appendix C for a list of available data items.
6.2.3
The Values screen displays information about the feeder on two sub screens, which can be accessed by pressing the [Values] or [Totals] buttons.
The [Totals] button displays the following data:
Material Total is the total amount of material delivered by the feeder, and is the sum of the Gravimetric and
Volumetric Totals.
Gravimetric Total is the total amount of material delivered by the feeder while operating in Gravimetric
Mode.
Volumetric Total is the total amount of material delivered by the feeder while operating in Volumetric Mode.
The [Reset] button will reset all three totalizers. The total values cannot be recovered after the [Reset] button
is pressed.
The [Values] button displays the following data:
Belt Speed shows the current speed of the belt in feet or meters per second.
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 41 -
Belt Load shows the weight of the material on the belt per unit of belt length in pounds per foot or kilograms
per meter.
Speed shows the shaft speed of the belt drive motor in revolutions per minute.
Density shows the currently calculated density of the material on the belt in pounds per cubic foot or kilograms per cubic meter.
6.2.4
The Setup Screen is used to configure the DT-9 and to access the various log files that are stored by the controller.
The following buttons are initially shown on the Setup screen: [Data Log], [Event Log], [Param Log], [Parameter], and [] (Right Arrow).
Pressing the Right Arrow button causes the display to scroll to the following additional buttons: [Trim], [Defaults],
[Simulation], [Calibration], and [Set Time]. Pressing the Right Arrow button again will cause the display to scroll
back to the initial list of buttons.
The [Trim], [Defaults], and [Calibration] buttons will be grayed out and unavailable unless the user is logged in to
the DT-9. The user must also log in before changing any of the parameters that are accessed via the [Parameter] button.
To log in to the DT-9, press the [Login] button, enter the DT-9 password (the default is 7353), and press [Login]. The previously selected screen will reappear and the [Login] button will change to [Logout] to indicate that
you have successfully logged in to the DT-9.
The following subsections describe the various screens that are accessed via the buttons on the Setup screen.
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 42 -
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
The top half of the Parameter screen displays the current Parameter Block. The bottom half of the screen displays the various parameters that are available in the selected Parameter Block. Press the Up and Down Arrow
buttons to scroll through the various blocks and parameters.
To change the value of a parameter, press the [Edit] button (Note: the user must be logged in to change parameter values). If the parameter contains a list of possible settings, a set of Up and Down Arrow buttons will appear
and can be used to scroll through the available options. If the parameter contains a discrete value, a text box will
appear. Press the [Save] button to save any changes that were made to the parameter value, or press the [Exit]
button to exit without saving any changes.
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 43 -
STRICTLY OBSERVE
The feedrate indicated and the feedback signal differ from the real rate of
flow.
Wrong of missing coal feeding. Wrong material totalizer.
When Simulation Mode the loadcell signal and the speed signal will be simulated in a way that the actual rate
shown follows the demand signal. This allows for.
Check of the interface to the plant control
Check of fieldbus signals
Demonstration and training
For coal feeding operation the Simulation Mode must be switched off again.
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 44 -
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
6.3
1. When filling the bunker, first close the inlet valve to minimize the filling pressure on the feeder and to avoid
compaction of the material at the feeder inlet. This precaution is unnecessary if the bunker is refilled while at
least 8 to 10 feet (2.43 to 3.05 meters) of material remain in it.
2. When starting the feeder, open the inlet valve slowly to load the belt at a controlled rate and to minimize
compaction at the feeder inlet.
3. Energize the feeder controls at the disconnect switch in the control cabinet. Observe that the HMI is illuminated.
4. From the [HOME] screen, press the [Remote] button. Upon receipt of a customer-generated feeder start
command and a demand signal from the combustion control system, the feeder begins to operate and the
display indicates that the feeder is running forward.
5. As material fills the feeder belt, the display indicates that the feeder is feeding material.
6. The DT-9 will begin totalizing the weight and updating the current feeder information.
7. The feeder will respond automatically to the changing demands of the combustion control system until it is
de-energized.
8. For a brief stop with a loaded belt, press the [OFF/Maint.] button
9. For a clean shutdown with an empty belt, close the inlet valve while the feeder is still running. When the belt
is emptied, press the [OFF/Maint] button. This procedure is recommended whenever the feeder will be inactive for a long period of time, since it eliminates the possibility of material compaction at the feeder inlet due
to consolidation caused by its own weight.
10. To jog the feeder belt forward, press the [OFF/Maint] button followed by the [Jog >>] button on the microprocessor keyboard for as long as motion is required. Pressing the [<< Jog] button will jog the feeder belt backwards.
11. To operate the feeder in the MAINTENANCE mode for inspection or servicing, press the [OFF/Maint] button
followed by the [Run >>] button. The feeder will run forward at the speed programmed in P02.16 Maintenance Speed. Pressing the [<< Run] button will cause the feeder to run backwards at the same speed.
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 45 -
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 47 -
8.1
Designed as PC program for DISOCONT commissioning and servicing, EasyServe lets you perform any operat
ing and calibrating operation. The program is operable under Microsoft W indows 2000/XP/Vista/7 operating
systems. The control unit lets you perform all controlling and calibrating operations without restrictions. The menu
control permits flexible and easy adjustment, lets you access service data, operate the scale for servicing,
and customize the menu texts on PC screen and all operator units.
8.2
Pentium or CPU-compatible
900MB free hard disk space
VGA display, 32768 color monitor recommended
Operating systems Microsoft Windows 2000/XP/Vista/7 with latest service packs
Mouse or other type of pointer
CD-ROM drive.
8.3
Installation
EasyServe
Insert CD VPC20150 into CD-ROM drive. Normally, installation starts automatically. If not, open Windows explorer select your CD-ROM drive. To open, double click on file. The automatic installation program prompts you
through a number of dialogs, for you to confirm.
Upgrade
If an old EasyServe version is available on your PC it must be removed (using Control Panel | Add or Remove
Programs) before the installation can be performed.
Attention
To be able to install the EasyServe program, your name must be registered as user in the group of administra
tors under W indows 2000/XP/Vista/7. To execute program, main user rights are required.
8.4
Before EasyServe can be used it must be installed on a laptop or PC, an Ethernet cable must be installed between the DT-9 and the PC and the PC must be configured for direct Ethernet communications. This process is
described below.
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 49 -
CAUTION
DO NOT use the RJ45 connector marked X96 to connect the DT-9 to a laptop or PC.
This connector is designed to supply power for the Touch Screen HMI through
normally unused connections. Connecting a PC to X96 could cause damage to
the DT-9, the PC or both. A red cover is normally installed over this connector to
prevent it from being used with a PC.
8.4.1
Connecting to Feeder
The EasyServe program and an Ethernet connection are used for most DT-9 Programming operations. The DT9 cannot generate an IP address for the computer running EasyServe so the PC must be set to a static IP address. The DT-9 default IP address is 192.168.240.1 and the PC must be on the same subnet. Set the PC address to 192.168.240.254 as starting point. One of several ways to do this is listed below.
Windows XP
1. Select Network Connections in Control Panel
2. Double click on the Local Area Connection line to bring up Local Area Connection Status dialog box. If you
have more then one Local Area Connection you probably want to select the one that is not connected.
3. Click on the Properties button (under the General tab) in the Local Area Connection Status dialog box. This
will bring up the Local Area Connection Properties dialog box.
4. Under the General tab, scroll down to Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) line, select this line then press the Properties button. This will bring up the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties dialog box.
5. In the General tab, the Obtain an IP address automatically button will normally be set, and the Alternate Configuration tab will be visible. Select the Alternate Configuration tab.
6. If an alternate IP address has already been entered, record this value. Select the User Configured button
then enter the IP address (192.168.240.254) and the Subnet mask (255.255.255.0) to use with the DT-9.
Leave the Default gateway field blank.
Note: It is not necessary to remove the alternate IP address once the DT-9 update has been completed.
When the Ethernet port is configured as described above, the PC/Laptop can be connected to a DT-9 or a
company network without changing the settings.
7. If the Ethernet port has been set to a fixed IP address, the Obtain an IP address automatically button will not
be set and the Alternate Configuration tab will not be visible. In this case either the fixed IP address can be
changed, by changing the IP address and Subnet mask fields in the Use the following IP address: box, or by
selecting the Obtain an IP address automatically button and following steps 5 and 6. In either case, the previous IP address and Subnet mask should be recorded prior to making any changes.
8. Select OK and back out.
9. Make the physical connection to the DT-9 by installing a CAT 5 cable (either straight through or crossover)
between the PC Ethernet port and any of the RJ45 connectors on the DT-9 except X96. X96 uses normally
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 50 -
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
unused connection to supply power to the Touch Screen HMI and connecting a PC to X96 could cause
damage to the DT-9, the PC or both. See the warning above.
10. Start EasyServe and select the Connection | MODBUS TCP (Scanner) option. The controller if connected
should be displayed. Select the controller and select Connect.
11. If there are more than one Ethernet connection on the computer EasyServe may have a problem deciding
which one to use. Rebooting the computer (not just logging out) while the DT-9 is connected and running will
usually fix this problem. If this doesnt work the other connection may have to be disabled.
Windows Vista
1. Select Network Connections in Control Panel.
2. Double click on Network and Sharing Center.
3. Click on the Manage Network Connections line, on the left side of the window.
4. Double click on the network connection that will be used to communicate with the DT-9. This is normally
marked Local Area Connection.
5. In the Local Area Connection Status window, click on the Properties button. This will bring up the Local Area
Connection Properties dialog box.
6. Proceed to step 4. above.
8.4.2
Once a feeder connection has been established, you have to register to make any parameter changes or operate the feeder. To do this click on the red lock toolbar button it will change to a yellow key (or go to Edit Register or press F2 on the keyboard).
HINT
Once registered any parameter changes or commands are sent to the
feeder immediately.
To unregister click the yellow key toolbar button and make it go back to red lock (or go to Edit Unregister or
press F3 on the keyboard).
8.5
Parameter Set
Once connected to a DT-9 go to View Parameter set: Online to access the parameter set. Its displayed along
the left side of the screen organized by parameter block. To view the parameters click on a block and they will be
displayed on the right.
At the bottom of the parameter set the events and hardware configuration can be accessed.
Events
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 51 -
All the events for the DT-9 are listed here in groups similar to the parameters. Click on a group to see the
event names and numbers on the right. The parameter that corresponds to the event will be listed after
the name. If you click the event name on the right it will take you to the parameter that controls it.
Hardware configuration
This contains a list of all the Analog inputs/outputs, digital inputs/outputs and Load Cells. Just like the
event list if you click the event name on the right it will take you to the parameter that controls it.
8.5.1
.PAR Files
Feeder files for EasyServe are saved as .PAR files. To load a .PAR go to File | Open. Once the file has been
opened, the parameters can be viewed and changed. The background color remains a bluish-gray as long as
you are just editing a .PAR file and have not loaded it to a DT-9.
To send the file, a feeder connection is required. Once the connection has been established, the background
changes to white and displays the parameter set currently on the DT-9. Open the .PAR file you wish to load or
go if it was already opened you can just go to View and select the parameter set by name. The background
should go back to the bluish gray color as before. Go to File | Transmit, check the box of the parameter set to be
loaded and click OK. Click OK on the next pop up saying it may take a minute.
8.5.2
Read/change Parameters
8.5.3
A set of custom default parameters can be loaded to the DT-9 controller. Loading custom defaults will load the
parameters setup by Stock Equipment.
STRICTLY OBSERVE
Edited parameters and calibrating values are reset.
We recommend that you print parameters using the Print Parameters function
before loading default values.
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 52 -
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
To load:
Go to Tools | Commissioning | Load Custom Defaults. EasyServe will ask for verification that you want to
load defaults. Click Yes to load the default parameters.
8.5.4
A set of Factory default parameters can be loaded to the DT-9 controller. These are the controller default values,
NOT the initial Stock values.
STRICTLY OBSERVE
The Load Default Parameters operation will reset all calibration values and
any parameters that have been edited, and will also reset the Custom Default Parameters.
Stock recommends that parameters be printed or saved to disk before loading
default values. Stock does not recommend loading factory defaults except after
a firmware update, or when a memory error is detected.
To load:
Go to Tools Commissioning Load Custom Defaults. EasyServe will ask for verification that you want to
load defaults. Click Yes to load the default parameters.
8.5.5
Expert Mode
Parameter access permissions can be modified using expert mode. The three options available are:
R: Read access only. The parameter cannot be edited.
W: Writable. The parameter can be viewed and edited.
H: Hide. The parameter cannot be viewed or edited unless in Expert mode.
To access Expert mode click Edit | Expert Mode (or press F6). EasyServe will prompt for a password to enter
Expert Mode. The default password is 7353. Press enter or click ok once the password is entered. Now when
viewing parameters, there will be a square to the left of the parameter value with one of the above letters in it
representing the parameter state. Click on the square to change status.
8.5.6
Print Parameters
A printout of the parameter set can be done by going to File | Print. A window will pop up giving you a few
checkbox options for what to include on the printout:
Only changed Parameters Parameters that have been changed since the last loading of a parameter file.
Only visible Parameters Does not print any parameters that have been set to hidden in expert mode.
Hardware configuration This will add a list of the analog/digital inputs/outputs, and Load cells to the end of
the parameter set on the printout
Click print when ready to proceed with printout.
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 53 -
8.6
8.6.1
The main screen of EasyServe can either display the parameter set (as described above) or Scale (feeder) Operation 1 and 2. To change this go to View then select one of the options above the line on the pull down
menu. A DT-9 connection is required to access the scale operation or online parameter set screens.
Scale Operation 1:
This is the screen to use when operating the feeder from EasyServe. The feeder can be placed in remote, local and jog from this screen. Feeder operation is the same as it is when using the 196NT display
(See section Operation using the 196NT Display). This is also where the totalizers can be reset. Along
with this real time feeder, information is displayed on the right side.
Note: To operate the feeder, you must have a connection and be registered.
Remote - Click the remote button to put the feeder in REMOTE mode. The button will change to
OFF/Maint and Remote will be displayed to the left. Click the button again to put the feeder back in OFF
mode.
Local - Click the RUN>> button to run the feeder in LOCAL mode. Click the button again to stop the
feeder and place it back in OFF mode. The RUN<< button will run the feeder in reverse.
Jog - Click and hold to JOG>> the feeder. Click and hold the JOG<< to jog the feeder in reverse.
Reset Totalizer - Click button to reset the totalizer.
Scale Operation 2:
This screen gives status information only. The feeder can not be controlled. Along with normal operational info, the load cells can be monitored if they are connected.
8.6.2
Events
Events will be displayed across the bottom of the EasyServe screen (The event can also be viewed by going to
View | Events, bringing up the event window). Alarms and warnings can be acknowledged, after correcting the
situation, by clicking on the red X toolbar button. The event message on the bottom will go back to No Events.
8.6.3
Calibration
8.6.4
Service Values
The service values on EasyServe are displayed in pop-up windows. Up to ten windows can be opened at one
time. To open a service value window go to View Service Values, and select one. There is no difference in the
ten windows the same information can be accessed from any of them. The values are divided up by eight tabs
across the top to access different information as listed below.
1. MV 1
Load cell info
Tachometer Hz
Speed set point
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 54 -
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
8.6.5
Trends
Like the service values, ten trend windows can be opened. W ithin each trend window the following values can be
viewed.
Feeder On
Flow Rate
Totalizer 1
Totalizer 2
Belt Load
Belt Speed
Actual Setpoint
Deviation
To open a trend window, add the desired values, and modify the trend, follow these steps.
1. Go to View Trend and select one of the ten trends.
2. The trend window will pop up. W hatever the last selected values were, for that trend window number, will be
displayed.
3. To change the scaling of the graph or add a name click the third button from the left on the top of the trend
window (the modify button). A window will pop up, edit the fields in the top right to the desired values.
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 55 -
4. While still in the modify window click on value 1 on the left side.
5. Here you can select what you want to appear on the trend. To add this value to the trend make sure the display field is set to yes. Next, click the signal source button. A window will pop up where you can select one of
the above mentioned values. Select the one you want and click apply.
6. The name and color can be modified for each value also in the fields below the signal source button.
7. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to add as many values as you want to the trend.
8. Click save and close to apply the settings to the trend.
Note: The first two buttons at the top left are for starting record and stopping the trend. The fourth button (red X)
deletes the recorded trends.
8.6.6
Setting Time
To adjust the date/time of the DT-9, go to Tools | Commissioning | Adjust Date/Time. Select the date/time in the
window that pops up then click OK.
8.6.7
Options
The EasyServe options can be accessed by going to Tools | Options. The options window opens and has 4 tabs.
This window lets you change language preferences, communication settings, display settings, print settings and
working folder for the parameter set loaded. You can also load the factory default parameters, STOCK DOES
NOT RECOMMEND LOADING FACTORY DEFAULTS.
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 56 -
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Testing
9 Testing
9.1
9.2
Chain Test
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 57 -
Testing
9.3
Material Test
No check or calibration using check weights can perfectly simulate actual conditions. The actual accuracy can
only be determined with a material test. The DT-9 allows errors found during this testing to be easily corrected
using Parameter P10.05 Range Correction TM.
Requirements
Handling route from weighing platform to material collecting point is totally clean.
No material is diverted during the test.
If feed screws or air slides are provided between platform and collecting point, run the system with material
for approx. 30m minutes before starting the material test. This will allow the normal build-ups to form on feed
units.
Do not remove dust or clean the equipment during the test.
Hoppers or vehicles transporting the material to a legal-for-trade commercial scale have been cleaned and
re-weighed before filling (tare weight).
Example:
The figure shows the operating principle of a material test.
Within a certain period of time, e.g. 15 min., an actual material amount MW of 4.9 t is fed. The material value MA
displayed on DISOCONT is 5.0 t. The new value of P09.01 Limit: Actual Flow Rate MIN is computed using the
following formula:
Parameter P09.01 (new) = Parameter P09.01 (old) * MW / MA
In our example, value is 0.98.
Enter new value into Parameter P10.05 Range Correction TM.
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 58 -
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Parameters
10 Parameters
This chapter discusses the parameters available with DT-9. Some parameters are not normally used on Stock
coal feeders. These parameters are hidden by default and are marked as Normally Hidden in the parameter list
below. These parameters can be viewed, modified or made visible using the Expert Mode in EasyServe. Use the
Edit | Expert Mode menu selection or the F6 key. The default password is 7353.
10.1
General Information
Parameters are variable features or data used to adapt DT-9 to the application.
There are two principal types of parameter:
Selection parameters - for selection from multiple Options
Select characteristic values (e.g., display unit, control behavior)
Select event classes (determine reaction on events)
Select hardware configuration (source, unit, channel, level)
Numeric parameters - for direct input of numeric values
Parameters can be changed during operation. However, parameters influencing measuring result, e.g., display
filters, must not be changed.
Default Values:
The DT-9 controller saves two different sets of default parameter value, referred to as Factory Defaults and Custom Defaults. Factory Defaults are set in the controller firmware and cannot be modified. These values provide a
common starting point for new systems. Custom Defaults can be modified in the field and can store the custom
settings used for a particular installation. Custom Defaults are set during factory testing.
All parameters are preset with default values that dont normally need to be changed. You can recall default values using the "Load Factory Defaults" function and the Load Custom Defaults function.
Identification:
Parameters are organized by function group and identified as follows:
"Group number - parameter number - parameter name", e.g., P01.02 Event: Communication ARM7.
Parameters Attributes:
The DT-9 is versatile system that can be user programmed for a variety of application and many of the parameters required for one application are not required for others. To simplify operation, each parameter has a parameter attribute that can be set to hidden (H), read only (R) or read/write (W). Special parameters that are not normally used in Stock feeders are factory set to default values and then hidden. Their current values, default values and hidden status can be changed in EasyServe, using Expert Mode (Menu: Edit | Expert Mode). The default password is 7353.
Dependencies:
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 59 -
Parameters
There are parameters whose availability depends on other parameters setting values. These dependencies are
stated in the header of every parameter description.
Abbreviations:
Hardware Devices
Description
VCU
VHM
ARM7
196NT
DT-9
Signal
Source/Destination
Description
FB
OP
DI
Digital Input
DO
Digital Output
AI
Analog Input
AO
Analog Output
LC
Load Cell
LS
Logical Signal
VCU1
VCU2
VCU3
V103
Located on VCU20103
V104
Located on VCU20104
FRQ
Frequency Output
R-L
n/a
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 60 -
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Parameters
Event Classes
Description
W1
W2
IG
Signals
Description
Flow rate
Belt load
VB
Belt speed
TCI
FRI
VAP
PLS
FCB
Description
1.
2.
3.
4.
Hardware Configuration
When signal path configuration parameters are set, the source/destination determines whether unit, channel and
level must be additionally indicated or not. The following table applies:
Possible hardware configurations:
Source
Unit
Channel
Level
FB
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 61 -
Parameters
Source
Unit
Channel
VCU103
AI1 - AI4
VCU104
AI1 - AI3
VCU1
AI1 - AI2
VCU2
AI1 - AI2
VCU3
AI1 - AI2
VCU103
AO1 - AO4
VCU104
AO1 - AO4
VCU1
AO1 - AO3
VCU2
AO1 - AO3
VCU3
AO1 - AO3
Level
OP
v
n/a
AI
AO
LC
VCU103
VCU104
VCU1
LC1 - LC2
VCU2
VCU3
DI
VCU103
VCU104
VCU1
VCU2
VCU3
DO
VCU103
VCU104
VCU1
VCU2
DI1 - DI12
DI1 - DI12
DI1 - DI7
HIGH, LOW
DI1 - DI7
DI1 - DI7
DO1 - DO13
DO1 - DO14
DO1 - DO8
DO1 - DO8
HIGH, LOW
DO1 - DO8
VCU3
Fieldbus (FB), control unit (OP), speed (v), not assigned (n/a) and the low-resolution analog input (DI4) does not
require additional specification for unit, channel or level.
Analog inputs (AI), outputs (AO) and load cell (LC) require the unit to be specified.
Digital inputs (DI) and outputs (DO) require unit, channel and level to be specified.
Example:
Parameter P 16.21 determines the relay output that indicates that a warning (W 1 or W2) event is active.
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 62 -
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Parameters
Default: DO 13 High
Options:
The first row shows the parameter description and default values. By default, the output relay is either DO 8 for
the VCU 20103, or DO 13 for the VCU 20104. The available digital outputs for the two DT-9 versions are shown
in the next two rows.
Event Messages
Event messages report abnormal states, e.g. errors or limit value excess.
STRICTLY OBSERVE
Always correct the cause of a fault before acknowledging it.
The feeder has the potential to cause injuries or damage if this is not done.
Code
Display / Effect
Alarm
All measuring and control operations are aborted. System goes to safe state.
This type of event is the same as a feeder trip on the 196NT.
Warning 1
W1
The event is annunciated and remains active until it has been acknowledged.
Measuring and control tasks are not affected. This type of event is similar to
some type of alarms on the 196NT.
Warning 2
W2
The event is annunciated and remains active until the cause has been corrected. It is not necessary to acknowledge this type of event. Measuring and
control tasks are not affected. This type of event is similar to some type of
alarms on the 196NT.
Ignore
IG
Event is not annunciated. Measuring and control tasks are not affected.
Events are classified in the following groups with the priority shown:
Event Group
Symbol
System message
SY
Sequence monitoring
SC
Electrical system
WE
Mechanical system
WM
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 63 -
Parameters
Event Group
Symbol
Material flow
MF
Interlocking
IL
Controllers
CO
Calibration
CA
Maximum
HI
Minimum
LO
Example:
Some parameters specify the response to an error event.
Parameter P01.02 determines the response to event SY12, Event: Communication ARM7.
P01.02 Event: Communication ARM7
Event Group: SY
Number: 12
Options:
IG
Default: A
A (Stop feeder)
W1 (Warning Manual reset)
W2 (Warning Automatic reset)
The first row shows the parameter description and default values. By default, an alarm is generated and the
feeder is stopped. The second row shows the event group and number (SY12), and the third row shows the
available digital outputs for the two DT-9 versions. All of the normal event options are available for this event.
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 64 -
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Parameters
10.2
A complete set of DT-9 parameters is listed below with options, default values and descriptions. The factory default values are selected based on either, the requirements of the existing wiring groups or the most commonly
used values. Some parameters are shown as Hidden. These parameters are not visible from the feeder display
and it should not normally be necessary to changed them. If it is necessary to view or modify these parameters
set EasyServe to Expert mode (View | Expert Mode). The default password is 7353. This will make the parameters visible in EasyServe and allow the parameter attributes (H-Hidden, R-Read only & W-Read/Write) to be
changed.
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 65 -
Parameters
Name
Default
Customer
Sys ID
P01.01 [82]
W2
4218
P01.02 [82]
5752
P01.03 [82]
NO
5746
P01.04 [82]
NO
5747
P01.05 [82]
NO
5748
P01.06 [82]
NO
5749
02 - Feeder Definition
Number:
Name
Default
P02.01 [84]
Language *
ENGLISH
4224
P02.02 [84]
Units *
English
4225
P02.03 [84]
Scale Name *
DISOCONT TERSUS CF
6238
P02.04 [84]
Password *
10000
4292
P02.05 [84]
50000 lb/h
4226
P02.06 [84]
Nominal Speed *
3 inch/s
4227
P02.07 [84]
Display Formats *
SELECTABLE
4228
P02.08 [84]
----.- lb/h
4229
P02.09 [84]
Counter 1 Unit *
------- lb
4230
P02.10 [84]
Counter 2 Unit *
------- lb
4232
P02.11 [84]
Counter 3 Unit *
------- lb
4233
P02.12 [84]
DO
4239
P02.13 [84]
Totalizer Increment *
100 lb
4254
P02.14 [84]
0.1 s
4231
P02.15 [84]
W2
5745
P02.16 [84]
Maintenance Speed *
50 %
5670
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 66 -
Customer
Sys ID
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Parameters
P02.17 [84]
DO
5753
P02.18 [84]
10 Hz/(t/h)
5708
P02.20 [84]
Codepage *
Unicode UTF-8
6242
P02.21 [84]
DC_Mode *
NO
6243
03 - Control Sources
Number:
Name
Default
Customer
Sys ID
P03.01 [91]
Feeder Start *
DI
4241
P03.02 [91]
Feedrate Setpoint *
AI
4242
P03.03 [91]
Setpoint Range *
20 mA
4243
P03.04 [91]
Setpoint Offset *
4 mA
4244
P03.05 [91]
Maximum Feedrate *
50000 lb/h
5686
P03.06 [91]
Minimum Feedrate *
5000 lb/h
5687
P03.07 [91]
n/a
5722
P03.08 [91]
n/a
5723
P03.09 [91]
30 s
5709
P03.10 [91]
DI
4245
P03.11 [91]
W2
4246
P03.12 [91]
5707
P03.13 [91]
Speed Setpoint *
200 rpm
5682
P03.14 [91]
Frate Setpoint
5684
P03.15 [91]
Density Setpoint *
50.955 lb/ft3
5815
Number:
Name
Default
P04.01 [97]
LC Characteristic Value *
3 mV/V
4257
P04.02 [97]
LC Rated Capacity *
100 lb
4258
P04.03 [97]
18 inch
4259
P04.04 [97]
Lever Ratio *
4260
P04.05 [97]
Angle *
0 degree
4261
P04.06 [97]
Speed Measurement *
DI
4262
04 - Rated Data
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Customer
Sys ID
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 67 -
Parameters
P04.07 [97]
LC
4263
P04.08 [97]
LC
4269
P04.09 [97]
60 P/rev
5690
P04.10 [97]
157 inch2
5730
Number:
Name
Default
P05.01 [100]
Volum on LC failure
YES
4270
P05.02 [100]
IG
4271
P05.03 [100]
0s
4274
P05.04 [100]
NO
4679
P05.05 [100]
1%Q
4680
05 - Feeder control
Customer
Sys ID
06 - Feeder Monitoring
Number:
Name
Default
P06.01 [101]
Event: Stand-By
IG
4289
P06.02 [101]
0 % Io
4290
P06.03 [101]
4291
P06.04 [101]
IG
4293
P06.05 [101]
IG
4294
P06.06 [101]
IG
4295
P06.07 [101]
IG
4296
P06.08 [101]
IG
4297
P06.09 [101]
Time Deviation
20 s
4298
P06.10 [101]
Threshold Deviation
5%
4299
P06.11 [101]
Factor Deviation
4320
P06.12 [101]
Event: Deviation
W2
4300
P06.13 [101]
IG
4301
P06.14 [101]
Event: Memory
W1
4302
P06.15 [101]
IG
5418
P06.16 [101]
n/a
4304
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 68 -
Customer
Sys ID
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Parameters
P06.17 [101]
IG
4305
Number:
Name
Default
P07.01 [108]
n/a
5724
P07.02 [108]
10 s
5698
P07.03 [108]
IG
5725
P07.04 [108]
n/a
4497
P07.05 [108]
BIC Active
NO
4498
P07.06 [108]
n/a
4499
P07.07 [108]
Slip Value
10 % LB
4507
P07.08 [108]
Event: Slip
IG
4508
P07.09 [108]
n/a
4511
P07.10 [108]
Sensor Length
3.23 inch
4500
P07.11 [108]
Sensor Width
4.73 inch
4501
P07.12 [108]
Sensor Offset
0 inch
4502
P07.13 [108]
Belt Drift
1.18 inch
4503
P07.14 [108]
W1
4504
P07.15 [108]
Belt Skew
1.58 inch
4505
P07.16 [108]
4506
P07.17 [108]
n/a
4509
P07.18 [108]
n/a
4510
Number:
Name
Default
P08.01 [113]
LC Filter
3s
4334
P08.02 [113]
1s
4328
P08.03 [113]
1s
4329
P08.04 [113]
5702
P08.05 [113]
1s
4331
P08.06 [113]
1s
4332
07 - Belt Monitoring
Customer
Sys ID
08 - Filters
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Customer
Sys ID
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 69 -
Parameters
P08.07 [113]
Filter: Deviation
1s
4333
Number:
Name
Default
P09.01 [114]
5 % Io
4337
P09.02 [114]
IG
4338
P09.03 [114]
120 % Io
4339
P09.04 [114]
IG
4340
P09.05 [114]
60 % Q
4341
P09.06 [114]
IG
4342
P09.07 [114]
120 % Q
4343
P09.08 [114]
IG
4344
P09.09 [114]
5%V
4345
P09.10 [114]
IG
4346
P09.11 [114]
120 % V
4347
P09.12 [114]
IG
4348
P09.13 [114]
Temperature MAX
80 C
5518
P09.14 [114]
Event: Temperature-MAX
IG
5519
09 - Limit Values
Customer
Sys ID
10 - Calibration Data
Number:
Name
Default
P10.01 [118]
36 inch
5693
P10.02 [118]
300 P/inch
4256
P10.03 [118]
Range Correction TW
5731
P10.04 [118]
Range Correction TC
5732
P10.05 [118]
Range Correction TM
5733
P10.06 [118]
60 s
4353
P10.07 [118]
5703
P10.08 [118]
Calibration W eight
70 lb
4354
P10.09 [118]
4.3 lb/inch
5715
P10.10 [118]
Basic Tare
0 lb/inch
4355
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 70 -
Customer
Sys ID
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Parameters
P10.11 [118]
1000000 P/B
4357
Number:
Name
Default
P11.01 [121]
P-Component KP
0.05 mA/%
4369
P11.02 [121]
I-Component TN
1s
4370
P11.03 [121]
AO
4400
P11.04 [121]
Lower Limit
4 mA
4371
P11.05 [121]
Upper Limit
20 mA
4372
P11.06 [121]
4 mA
4373
P11.07 [121]
Position at STOP
Lower Limit
4374
P11.08 [121]
KP speed controller
0.07 mA/%
5734
P11.09 [121]
VAP Active
NO
4480
P11.10 [121]
Platform Dis.Length
0 % LB
4482
P11.11 [121]
0.01 mA/Hz
5920
P11.12 [121]
0 mA
5921
P11.13 [121]
Bypass
0 mA
4375
P11.14 [121]
0s
4378
P11.15 [121]
0s
4379
P11.16 [121]
Adaptation 1
NO
4382
P11.17 [121]
Adaptation 2
NO
4383
Number:
Name
Default
P12.01 [125]
Moisture Active
NO
5386
P12.02 [125]
Moisture Select
n/a
5399
P12.03 [125]
n/a
5387
P12.04 [125]
Nominal Moisture
10 %
5388
P12.05 [125]
Moisture Offset
4 mA
5389
P12.06 [125]
Moisture Range
20 mA
5390
P12.07 [125]
n/a
5400
11 - Rate controller
Customer
Sys ID
12 - Moisture
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Customer
Sys ID
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 71 -
Parameters
P12.08 [125]
Moisture MAX
20 %
5391
P12.09 [125]
n/a
5392
P12.10 [125]
IG
5393
P12.11 [125]
n/a
5394
P12.12 [125]
4 mA
5395
P12.13 [125]
20 mA
5396
P12.14 [125]
NO
5397
13 - Cleanout control
Number:
Name
Default
Customer
Sys ID
P13.01 [128]
n/a
4277
P13.02 [128]
CleanOut ON Time
1h
4278
P13.03 [128]
1h
4279
P13.04 [128]
n/a
4404
P13.05 [128]
20 s
4405
P13.06 [128]
IG
4406
Number:
Name
Default
P14.01 [130]
AO: Setpoint
n/a
4385
P14.02 [130]
Setpoint Offset
4 mA
4386
P14.03 [130]
Setpoint Range
20 mA
4387
P14.04 [130]
AO
4388
P14.05 [130]
4 mA
4389
P14.06 [130]
20 mA
4390
P14.07 [130]
n/a
4391
P14.08 [130]
4 mA
4392
P14.09 [130]
20 mA
4393
P14.10 [130]
AO: Speed
n/a
4394
P14.11 [130]
Speed Offset
4 mA
4395
P14.12 [130]
Speed Range
20 mA
4396
14 - Analog Outputs
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 72 -
Customer
Sys ID
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Parameters
P14.13 [130]
AO: Deviation
n/a
4397
P14.14 [130]
Deviation Offset
4 mA
4398
P14.15 [130]
Deviation Range
20 mA
4399
P14.16 [130]
n/a
4306
P14.17 [130]
AO: Density
n/a
5924
P14.18 [130]
Density Offset
4 mA
5925
P14.19 [130]
Density Range
20 mA
5926
Number:
Name
Default
P15.01 [134]
n/a
4419
P15.02 [134]
n/a
4420
P15.03 [134]
IG
4417
P15.04 [134]
n/a
4418
P15.05 [134]
IG
5904
P15.06 [134]
IG
5905
P15.07 [134]
n/a
5414
P15.08 [134]
n/a
5415
P15.09 [134]
DI
5716
P15.10 [134]
2s
5697
P15.11 [134]
5717
P15.12 [134]
DI
5718
P15.13 [134]
1s
5704
P15.14 [134]
IG
5719
P15.15 [134]
5754
P15.16 [134]
prop to Rate
5705
P15.17 [134]
DI
5720
P15.18 [134]
5721
P15.19 [134]
DI
5726
P15.20 [134]
100 lb
5699
P15.21 [134]
5727
15 - Digital Inputs
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Customer
Sys ID
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 73 -
Parameters
P15.23 [134]
n/a
5735
P15.24 [134]
n/a
5736
P15.25 [134]
n/a
5737
P15.26 [134]
n/a
5738
P15.27 [134]
n/a
5739
P15.28 [134]
IG
4430
P15.29 [134]
n/a
4431
P15.30 [134]
IG
4730
P15.31 [134]
n/a
4731
P15.32 [134]
IG
4732
P15.33 [134]
n/a
4733
P15.34 [134]
n/a
4421
P15.35 [134]
n/a
5922
Number:
Name
Default
P16.01 [143]
DO
4433
P16.02 [143]
n/a
4434
P16.03 [143]
n/a
5671
P16.04 [143]
DO
5740
P16.05 [143]
n/a
5672
P16.06 [143]
DO
5741
P16.07 [143]
n/a
5673
P16.08 [143]
n/a
4435
P16.09 [143]
DO: ALARM
DO
4436
P16.10 [143]
n/a
5674
P16.11 [143]
DO: Deviation
n/a
4437
P16.12 [143]
n/a
4438
P16.13 [143]
n/a
4439
P16.14 [143]
n/a
4440
P16.15 [143]
n/a
4441
16 - Digital Outputs
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 74 -
Customer
Sys ID
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Parameters
P16.16 [143]
n/a
4442
P16.17 [143]
n/a
4443
P16.18 [143]
DO
4444
P16.19 [143]
n/a
5675
P16.20 [143]
n/a
4445
P16.21 [143]
DO: W ARNING
DO
4759
P16.22 [143]
n/a
5676
P16.23 [143]
DO: Feeding
DO
5742
P16.24 [143]
n/a
5677
P16.25 [143]
DO
5750
P16.26 [143]
n/a
5678
17 - Analog calibration
Number:
Name
Default
P17.01 [150]
4 mA
5755
P17.02 [150]
20 mA
5756
P17.03 [150]
4 mA
5757
P17.04 [150]
20 mA
5758
P17.05 [150]
4 mA
5759
P17.06 [150]
20 mA
5760
P17.07 [150]
4 mA
5761
P17.08 [150]
20 mA
5762
P17.09 [150]
4 mA
5763
P17.10 [150]
20 mA
5764
P17.11 [150]
4 mA
5765
P17.12 [150]
20 mA
5766
P17.13 [150]
4 mA
5767
P17.14 [150]
20 mA
5768
P17.15 [150]
4 mA
5769
P17.16 [150]
20 mA
5770
P17.17 [150]
4 mA
5664
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Customer
Sys ID
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 75 -
Parameters
P17.18 [150]
20 mA
5665
P17.19 [150]
4 mA
5666
P17.20 [150]
20 mA
5667
P17.21 [150]
4 mA
5668
P17.22 [150]
20 mA
5669
P17.23 [150]
0 mA
5908
P17.24 [150]
0 mA
5909
P17.25 [150]
0 mA
5910
P17.26 [150]
0 mA
5911
P17.27 [150]
0 mA
5912
P17.28 [150]
0 mA
5913
Number:
Name
Default
P18.01 [154]
NO
5433
P18.02 [154]
Source Sensor 1
Speed
5434
P18.03 [154]
DI: Sensor 1
n/a
5435
P18.04 [154]
100 P/inch
5436
P18.05 [154]
DI: Sensor 2
n/a
5437
P18.06 [154]
100 P/inch
5438
P18.07 [154]
Slip Value 2
2 % LB
5439
P18.08 [154]
Event: Slip 2
IG
5440
P18.09 [154]
DO: Slip 2
n/a
5443
18 - 2-Sensor Slip
Customer
Sys ID
19 - Maintenance interval
Number:
Name
Default
Customer
Sys ID
P19.01 [156]
Maintenance Electric
3000 h
4465
P19.02 [156]
IG
4466
P19.03 [156]
3000 h
4467
P19.04 [156]
IG
4468
20 - Data Logging
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 76 -
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Parameters
Number:
Name
Default
Customer
Sys ID
P20.01 [157]
0 min
5743
P20.02 [157]
0 min
5744
P20.03 [157]
1 min
6288
P20.04 [157]
752
6289
P20.05 [157]
755
6290
P20.06 [157]
1872
6291
P20.07 [157]
1874
6292
P20.08 [157]
1876
6293
P20.09 [157]
2316
6294
P20.10 [157]
1880
6295
P20.11 [157]
1894
6296
P20.12 [157]
2230
6297
P20.13 [157]
2232
6298
21 - Communication EasyServe
Number:
Name
Default
Customer
Sys ID
P21.01 [159]
Own Address
4520
P21.02 [159]
Baud Rate
38400
4521
P21.03 [159]
Format Data
8-N-1
6189
22 - Communication Fieldbus
Number:
Name
Default
P22.01 [160]
Protocol Type
NO
4528
P22.02 [160]
Timeout Host
5s
4529
P22.03 [160]
4530
P22.04 [160]
Modbus-Version
compatible Stock
5729
P22.05 [160]
Word Sequence
I:std/L:std
6246
P22.06 [160]
Byte Sequence
High - Low
6245
P22.07 [160]
Configuration
FIXED_8_16
4661
P22.08 [160]
Address
4531
P22.09 [160]
Resolution
4096
4533
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Customer
Sys ID
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 77 -
Parameters
P22.10 [160]
Baud rate
19200
4535
P22.11 [160]
Data Format
8-O-1
4656
P22.12 [160]
Physics
RS232
6186
P22.13 [160]
Address
16
4539
P22.14 [160]
FLOAT-Format
IEEE
4540
P22.15 [160]
Address
63
4541
P22.16 [160]
Baud rate
125K
4542
P22.17 [160]
Parameter
NO
4658
P22.18 [160]
Preset Count
4734
P22.19 [160]
READ_ID Count
4659
P22.20 [160]
NO
4786
P22.21 [160]
Remote IP Address FB
192.168.240.250
4787
P22.22 [160]
W2
5680
P22.23 [160]
Configuration
PARA_ID_6_15
5923
Number:
Name
Default
P23.01 [165]
IP Address
192.168.240.1
6235
P23.02 [165]
Net Mask
255.255.255.0
6236
P23.03 [165]
Gateway
0.0.0.0
6237
Number:
Name
Default
P24.01 [166]
DO: PLC 1
n/a
4662
P24.02 [166]
DO: PLC 2
n/a
4663
P24.03 [166]
DO: PLC 3
n/a
4664
P24.04 [166]
DO: PLC 4
n/a
4665
P24.05 [166]
DO: PLC 5
n/a
4666
P24.06 [166]
DO: PLC 6
n/a
4667
P24.07 [166]
DO: PLC 7
n/a
4668
P24.08 [166]
DO: PLC 8
n/a
4669
23 - Ethernet
Customer
Sys ID
24 - PLC Outputs
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 78 -
Customer
Sys ID
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Parameters
P24.09 [166]
AO: PLC 1
n/a
4670
P24.10 [166]
AO: PLC 2
n/a
4671
Name
Default
Customer
Sys ID
P25.01 [168]
ID Preset Value 1
320
6247
P25.02 [168]
ID Preset Value 2
352
6248
P25.03 [168]
ID Preset Value 3
384
6249
P25.04 [168]
ID Preset Value 4
592
6250
P25.05 [168]
ID Preset Value 5
6251
P25.06 [168]
ID Preset Value 6
6252
P25.07 [168]
ID Preset Value 7
6253
P25.08 [168]
ID Preset Value 8
6254
P25.09 [168]
ID Read Value 1
752
6256
P25.10 [168]
ID Read Value 2
816
6257
P25.11 [168]
ID Read Value 3
1552
6258
P25.12 [168]
ID Read Value 4
1872
6259
P25.13 [168]
ID Read Value 5
1894
6260
P25.14 [168]
ID Read Value 6
2230
6261
P25.15 [168]
ID Read Value 7
2232
6262
P25.16 [168]
ID Read Value 8
2234
6263
P25.17 [168]
ID Read Value 9
6264
P25.18 [168]
ID Read Value 10
6265
P25.19 [168]
ID Read Value 11
6266
P25.20 [168]
ID Read Value 12
6267
P25.21 [168]
ID Read Value 13
6268
P25.22 [168]
ID Read Value 14
6269
P25.23 [168]
ID Read Value 15
6270
P25.24 [168]
ID Read Value 16
6271
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 79 -
Parameters
Number:
Name
Default
Customer
Sys ID
P26.01 [172]
FCB_AO 01
n/a
P26.02 [172]
Offset FCB_AO 1
4 mA
6272
P26.03 [172]
Range FCB_AO 1
20 mA
6273
P26.04 [172]
Reference FCB_AO 1
1000
6274
P26.05 [172]
FCB_AO 02
n/a
P26.06 [172]
Offset FCB_AO 2
4 mA
6275
P26.07 [172]
Range FCB_AO 2
20 mA
6276
P26.08 [172]
Reference FCB_AO 2
1000
6277
P26.09 [172]
FCB_AO 03
n/a
P26.10 [172]
Offset FCB_AO 3
4 mA
6278
P26.11 [172]
Range FCB_AO 3
20 mA
6279
P26.12 [172]
Reference FCB_AO 3
10000
6280
P26.13 [172]
FCB_AO 04
n/a
P26.14 [172]
Offset FCB_AO 4
4 mA
6281
P26.15 [172]
Range FCB_AO 4
20 mA
6282
P26.16 [172]
Reference FCB_AO 4
1000
6283
P26.17 [172]
FCB_AO 05
n/a
P26.18 [172]
Offset FCB_AO 5
4 mA
6284
P26.19 [172]
Range FCB_AO 5
20 mA
6285
P26.20 [172]
Reference FCB_AO 5
1000
6286
P26.21 [172]
FCB Variant
Empty
5902
P26.22 [172]
Event: FCB-Error
5903
20481
20482
20483
20484
20485
Name
Default
P27.01 [177]
FCB_DO 01
n/a
20529
P27.02 [177]
FCB_DO 02
n/a
20530
P27.03 [177]
FCB_DO 03
n/a
20531
P27.04 [177]
FCB_DO 04
n/a
20532
P27.05 [177]
FCB_DO 05
n/a
20533
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 80 -
Customer
Sys ID
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Parameters
P27.06 [177]
FCB_DO 06
n/a
20534
P27.07 [177]
FCB_DO 07
n/a
20535
P27.08 [177]
FCB_DO 08
n/a
20536
P27.09 [177]
FCB_DO 09
n/a
20537
P27.10 [177]
FCB_DO 10
n/a
20538
P27.11 [177]
FCB_DO 11
n/a
20539
P27.12 [177]
FCB_DO 12
n/a
20540
P27.13 [177]
FCB_DO 13
n/a
20541
P27.14 [177]
FCB_DO 14
n/a
20542
P27.15 [177]
FCB_DO 15
n/a
20543
P27.16 [177]
FCB_DO 16
n/a
20544
P27.17 [177]
FCB_DO 17
n/a
20545
P27.18 [177]
FCB_DO 18
n/a
20546
P27.19 [177]
FCB_DO 19
n/a
20547
P27.20 [177]
FCB_DO 20
n/a
20548
Name
Default
P28.01 [180]
HMI Value 01
1884
6299
P28.02 [180]
HMI Value 02
1880
6300
P28.03 [180]
HMI Value 03
2276
6301
P28.04 [180]
HMI Value 04
2292
6302
P28.05 [180]
HMI Value 05
2236
6303
P28.06 [180]
HMI Value 06
2234
6304
P28.07 [180]
HMI Value 07
2224
6305
P28.08 [180]
HMI Value 08
2226
6306
P28.09 [180]
HMI Value 09
1904
6307
P28.10 [180]
HMI Value 10
1960
6308
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Customer
Sys ID
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 81 -
Parameters
Event Group: SY
Default: W2
Number: 07
The parameter selects the error condition generated when communications between the
DT-9 and the touch screen HMI are lost for more then 10 seconds. The touch screen HMI
must be connected to the X96 Ethernet port. This connector is located toward the center of
the board, is marked in red and is keyed for a special cable.
The parameter should be set to W2 (Warning with automatic reset).
Actions:
- Check operation of touch screen display (see display section).
- Check cable connections.
- Is correct Ethernet connection used?
P01.02
Event Group: SY
Default: A
Number: 12
The parameter selects the error condition generated when communications between the
ARM9 main processor and the ARM7 auxiliary processor are lost.
The parameter must always be set to A (Stop feeder) because the controller can not operate when communications are lost.
Action:
- Check cable connections between boards.
- Replace controller.
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 82 -
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Parameters
P01.03
Alternative:
NO
AI2 (Analog In 2)
AO3 (Analog Out 3)
Default: NO
This parameter specifies the analog I/O card that is installed in position A10. It is connected
to terminal blocks X12-1 and X12-2.
This I/O port is not normally used on the VCU 20103 and this parameter is normally set to
NO.
P01.04
Alternative:
NO
AI3 (Analog In 3)
AO4 (Analog Out 4)
Default: NO
This parameter specifies the analog input card that is installed in position A11. It is connected to terminal blocks X12-3 and X12-4.
This I/O port is not normally used on the VCU 20103 and this parameter is normally set to
NO.
P01.05
Alternative:
NO
AI4 (Analog In 4)
AO5 (Analog Out 5)
Default: NO
This parameter specifies the analog input card that is installed in position A12. It is connected to terminal blocks X12-5 and X12-6.
This I/O port is not normally used on the VCU 20103 and this parameter is normally set to
NO.
P01.06
Alternative:
NO
AI5 (Analog In 5)
AO6 (Analog Out 6)
Default: NO
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 83 -
Parameters
This parameter specifies the analog input card that is installed in position A12. It is connected to terminal blocks X12-7 and X12-8.
This I/O port is not normally used on the VCU 20103 and this parameter is normally set to
NO.
Language
Alternative:
DEUTSCH
ENGLISH
OTHER
Default: ENGLISH
This parameter selects the language used in DT 9 displays. W hen it is set to OTHER the
individual display strings can be set using EasyServe.
P02.02
Units
Alternative:
Metric
English
Default: English
This parameter selects the units used for displays and parameter inputs. Either SI (metric)
or normal American (English) units may be selected.
P02.03
Scale Name
This parameter specifies the text string to identify the feeder and is shown on the top line of
the touch screen HMI.
This parameter is set according to customer preference.
P02.04
Min: 1000
Password
Default: 10000
Max: 9999
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 84 -
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Parameters
This parameter specifies the password used to restrict access to various controller functions.
Note: This parameter can be changed using EasyServe in the event that the password is
lost.
Note: Some functions may require an alternate password. The default value is 7353.
P02.05
Min: 0 lb/h
This parameter is used to specify the feeder design feedrate. It is similar to 196NT Setup
05 (Maximum Feedrate) and is used for limit alarms and display outputs. It should always
be set to the same value as parameter P03.05 Maximum Feedrate. It is also used to scale
the analog I/O channels and to calculate the simulated load when the controller is installed
on a volumetric feeder.
This parameter is set based on customer requirements and the mechanical design of the
feeder. Check the project manual or certified drawings to insure that the proper value is
selected.
Note: If both P04.07 Source Load Cell and P04.08 Source Load Cell 2 are set to Not Used,
the load cells will be disabled and the system will operate as a volumetric feeder. The DT-9
will calculate an assumed belt load based on P02.05 Nominal Flow Rate and P02.06 Nominal Speed as shown below.
Nominal Belt Load = (P02.05 Nominal Flow Rate) / (3600 X P02.06 Nominal Speed)
P02.06
Nominal Speed
Default: 3 inch/s
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 85 -
Parameters
This parameter is used to scale the belt speed analog output (i.e., Maximum analog signal
= Nominal speed) and serves as the reference value for limit value monitoring. Nominal
speed, together with nominal feedrate, is used to calculate the nominal belt load.
Nominal speed is calculated as:
(P02.05 Nominal Flow Rate) / (300 X Nom. Density X P04.10 Load cross section)
Note: If both P04.07 Belt LC Left and P04.08 Belt LC Right are set to Not Used, the load
cells will be disabled and the system will operate as a volumetric feeder. The DT-9 will calculate an assumed belt load based on P02.05 Nominal Flow Rate and P02.06 Nominal Belt
Speed as shown below.
Nominal Belt Load = (P02.05 Nominal Flow Rate) / (3600 X P02.06 Nominal Belt Speed)
P02.07
Display Formats
Alternative:
STANDARD
SELECTABLE
Default: SELECTABLE
This parameter allows the operator to either, accept the standard set of display formats
(determined by the controller based on the P02.05 Nominal Flow Rate) or to select the
display formats individually using parameters P02.08 through P02.11.
This parameter should be set according to customer preference. The default value is
STANDARD, which is suitable for most applications.
P02.08
Alternative:
------ lb/h
----.- lb/h
---.-- lb/h
--.--- lb/h
------ t/h
----.- t/h
---.-- t/h
--.--- t/h
----.-- lb/min
------ lb/s
----.- lb/s
---.-- lb/s
--.--- lb/s
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 86 -
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Parameters
This parameter selects the format used to display feedrate values. It is only visible when
parameter P02.07 Display Formats is set to SELECTABLE and the available options depend on the selection value of parameter P02.02 Units.
This parameter should be set according to customer preference.
P02.09
Counter 1 Unit
Alternative:
------- lb
-----.- lb
----.-- lb
---.--- lb
------- t
-----.- t
----.-- t
---.--- t
Default: ------- lb
This parameter selects the format used to display the total value in Counter 1. It is only
visible when parameter P02.07 Display Formats is set to SELECTABLE and the available
options depend on the selection value of parameter P02.02 Units.
This parameter should be set according to customer preference.
P02.10
Counter 2 Unit
Alternative:
------- lb
-----.- lb
----.-- lb
---.--- lb
------- t
-----.- t
----.-- t
---.--- t
Default: ------- lb
This parameter selects the format used to display the total value in Counter 2. It is only
visible when parameter P02.07 Display Formats is set to SELECTABLE and the available
options depend on the selection value of parameter P02.02 Units.
This parameter should be set according to customer preference.
P02.11
Counter 3 Unit
Default: ------- lb
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 87 -
Parameters
Alternative:
------- lb
-----.- lb
----.-- lb
---.--- lb
------- t
-----.- t
----.-- t
---.--- t
This parameter selects the format used to display the total value in Counter 3. It is only
visible when parameter P02.07 Display Formats is set to SELECTABLE and the available
options depend on the selection value of parameter P02.02 Units.
This parameter should be set according to customer preference.
P02.12
Alternative:
DO
n/a
This parameter specifies the digital output used for the Total Coal Integrator (TCI).
The TCI cycles continuously while the feeder is in operation. To prevent premature failure
of the output relay this parameter should always be set to DO 12 (Reed Relays - Terminal
blocks X16-3 through X16-6).
P02.13
Min: 0 lb
Totalizer Increment
Default: 100 lb
Max: 100000 lb
This parameter sets the weight associated with each Total Coal Integrator (TCI) pulse. It is
the same as 196NT Setup 07 (Remote Totalizer Data Logging Increment).
The TCI output frequency is based on parameter P02.11, parameter P02.12 and the actual
feedrate. If the values selected for these parameters require an output frequency greater
then the maximum frequency of the selected device, an error (MF 14 - P02.13) will be generated. See parameter P02.12 for more information.
This parameter is normally set to either 100 Lbs or 100 Kg.
P02.14
Min: 0 s
Default: 0.1 s
Max: 10 s
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 88 -
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Parameters
This parameter sets the duration of each Total Coal Integrator (TCI) pulse. It is the same as
196NT Setup 35 (Remote Totalizer Pulse W idth).
The TCI output frequency is based on this parameter, parameter P02.11 and the actual
feedrate. If this combination of values requires an output frequency greater then the maximum frequency of the selected device, an error (MF 14 - P02.13) will be generated.
The maximum pulse frequency can be calculated as:
Frequency = (P03.05 Maximum Feedrate) / ((3600) x ( P02.11))
When the TCI output is directed to an open collector or reed relay output the maximum
possible pulse frequency is 10 Hz (P02.12 set to 0.05 sec). When the TCI output is directed
to a mechanical relay output the maximum possible pulse frequency is 1.0 Hz (P02.12 set
to 0.5 sec). W hen the pulse length (P02.12) is increased, these values are reduced.
The maximum possible frequency (in Hz) is calculated as:
Max. possible freq. = 1 / (2 X P02.12 (in sec))
To insure that the TCI output works correctly the maximum pulse frequency must always be
less then the maximum possible frequency.
P02.15
Event Group: MF
Default: W2
Number: 14
The parameter selects the error condition generated when totalizer pulses for the Total
Coal Integrator (TCI) output are generated faster then the TCI output can operate. See
parameter P02.14 Pulse Length Total for more information.
This parameter should be set to W2.
Action: Set P02.13 Totalizer Increment and/or P02.14 Pulse Length Total to a smaller value.
P02.16
Min: 0 %
Maintenance Speed
Default: 50 %
Max: 100 %
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 89 -
Parameters
This parameter determines the Motor Speed Control (MSC) demand signal used during
maintenance (local, calibrate, jog) operations. It is similar to 196NT Setup 01 (Speed Setpoint) except that the MSC demand signal is set rather then the actual motor speed (open
loop operation). The actual motor RPM is determined by the characteristics of the motor
and the MSC.
This parameter is normally set to 50% which will produce a motor speed of approximately
900 RPM with a 4 pole, 60 Hz motor.
P02.17
Alternative:
DO
n/a
This parameter specifies the digital output used for the Feed Rate Indicator (FRI). This
parameter output can only be set to DO 13 (terminal block X6-1 and X6-2) which is an isolated, unpowered, transistor output.
P02.18
Min: 0 Hz/(t/h)
Default: 10 Hz/(t/h)
The value of this parameter is used to calculate remote Feedrate Indicator (FRI) output
frequency. It must be selected so that the FRI output at the minimum feedrate (see P03.06)
is greater then 1.0 Hz and the FRI output at the maximum feedrate (see P03.06) is less
then 1000 Hz.
This parameter is normally set to 10.0 Hz / Ton/hr
P02.20
Codepage
Alternative:
Standard (8859-1)
Latin-2 (8859-2)
Cyrillic (1251)
Japanese Shift-JIS
Chinese 936 (GBK)
Chinese EUC-CN
Unicode UTF-8
Unicode UTF-16
P02.21
DC_Mode
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 90 -
Default: NO
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Parameters
Alternative:
NO
YES
This parameter allows for changing of the type of load cell excitation voltage.
When set to NO, the load cell is supplied by a rectangular AC voltage. This mode should be
used in case the load cell is connected straight to the load cell interface of the controller.
This mode provides best suppression of thermal effects in the load cell cable and terminals.
When set to YES, the load cell is supplied by a DC voltage. This mode requires the installation of an external load cell amplifier close to the load cell with a transmission of the DC
output signal on a higher voltage and current level to suppress thermal effects in the load
cell cable and terminals.
Feeder Start
Alternative:
DI
OP
FB
This parameter selects the digital input used as the feeder start command.
Caution: This is a static input! Switching to remote control mode with the start input activated will start the feeder.
This parameter is normally set to DI 2 High (terminal block X1-4) and is connected to wire
112.
P03.02
Feedrate Setpoint
Alternative:
AI
OP
FB
R-L
Default: AI V103.AI1
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 91 -
Parameters
This parameter selects the source for the feedrate demand signal and can be set to the
following values:
AI 3 for use with an analog (usually 4-20mA) input signal on SIG+ and SIGR-L for use with the Raise/Lower input signals (See P03.07 and P03.08). The demand signal is set to its lower limit in case the feeder is switched off.
OP for use with EasyServe
FB or remote control using a Field Bus
This parameter is normally set to AI 3. Check the certified drawings to insure that the proper value is selected.
P03.03
Min: 0 mA
Setpoint Range
Default: 20 mA
Max: 1000 mA
This parameter determines the nominal 100% signal level for the analog input channel. It
should be set to 20.0 for a 0-20mA, 4-20mA or 0-10V input.
This parameter is normally set to 20.00 mA and is only active when P03.02 is set to an
analog input signal.
Note: When an analog input card is used, the input jumper must be set toward the outside
of the card for a voltage input signal and toward the middle of the card for a current input
signal.
P03.04
Setpoint Offset
Min: -200 mA
Max: 200 mA
Default: 4 mA
This parameter determines the nominal 0% signal level for the analog input channel.
This parameter is normally set to 4.00 mA and is only active when P03.02 is set to an analog input signal. If a zero based signal (0-20mA or 0-10V) is used it must be set to 0.00 mA.
Note: When an analog input card is used, the input jumper must be set toward the outside
of the card for a voltage input signal and toward the middle of the card for a current input
signal.
P03.05
Min: 0 lb/h
Maximum Feedrate
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 92 -
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Parameters
This is the maximum feedrate clamp. The feeder will not operate above this rate regardless
of the feedrate demand signal. This is similar to the 196NT parameter 05 (Maximum Feedrate). It should always be set to the same values as parameter P02.05 Nominal Flow Rate.
This parameter is set based on customer requirements and the mechanical design of the
feeder. Check the project specifications or certified drawings to insure that the proper value
is selected.
P03.06
Min: 0 lb/h
Minimum Feedrate
This is the minimum feedrate clamp. The feeder will not operate below this rate regardless
of the feedrate demand signal. This is similar to the 196NT parameter 06 (Minimum Feedrate).
This parameter is set based on customer requirements and the minimum motor speed.
Check the project specifications or certified drawings to insure that the proper value is selected.
P03.07
Alternative:
n/a
DI
Default: n/a
This parameter selects the digital input signal used as the raise feedrate setpoint command.
This parameter is only active if P03.02 is set to R-L.
This parameter is normally set to DI 3 High (terminal block X1-2), or Not Used, and is
connected to wire 113.
P03.08
Alternative:
n/a
DI
Default: n/a
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 93 -
Parameters
This parameter selects the digital input signal used as the lower feedrate setpoint command.
This parameter is only active if P03.02 is set to R-L.
This parameter is normally set to DI 11 High (terminal block X4-5), or Not Used, and is
connected to wire 114.
P03.09
Min: 5 s
Default: 30 s
Max: 300 s
This parameter determines the speed at which the feedrate setpoint changes when the
raise or lower input is active. The value represents the approximate time, in seconds, for
the setpoint to go from 0% to 100%. This is similar to the 196NT parameter 28 (Raise/Lower Response Time).
This parameter is only active if P03.02 is set to R-L.
P03.10
Alternative:
DI
n/a
FB
This parameter selects the digital input signal used as the belt motor start permissive.
When it is enabled, (set to a digital input) an active signal on the designated input is required to start the belt drive motor. When it is set to n/a, this feature is disabled.
This parameter is normally set to DI 8 - High (terminal block X3-4) and is connected to (wire
111).
Caution: Setting this parameter to n/a will disable the Run Enable feature and create an
unsafe operating condition. The Run Enable input must ALWAYS be enabled and connected to a user accessible stop switch.
P03.11
Event Group: IL
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 94 -
Default: W2
Number: 01
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Parameters
The parameter selects the method used to annunciate the error condition when the Run
Enable input is not active. Setting the parameter to IG does not disable the Run Enable
feature but it does prevent an error from being generated.
The parameter is normally set to W2 so that there is an indication on the display when the
feeder is disabled.
Cause of event:
- When a touch screen HMI is used, parameter P03.10 Source Run Enable must be set to
DI 8, which is connected to the stop switch mounted under the HMI. This switch is used to
stop the feeder in the event that the HMI is disabled or disconnected.
Action:
- Check the position of the Run Enable switch.
- Check the wiring to the Run Enable switch.
Note: The Run Enable switch is not normally used with the Stock 196NT display and in this
case P03.10 Source Run Enable must be set to n/a to allow motor operation.
P03.12
Alternative:
Keyboard only
Keyboard & Local
Keyb.,Remote & Local
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 95 -
Parameters
This parameter is used to enable the Remote (P15.23 DI: Remote CTRL) and Local
(P15.25 DI: Local Start) digital inputs. The Remote and Local digital inputs are edge triggered, meaning that their function is initiated by the transition from OFF to ON or, ON to OFF
rather then by their state. This type of operation allows the feeder to be stopped due to an
error condition or a keyboard input, even when the digital input is active.
The operation of the Remote and Local digital inputs is described below.
Keyboard Only - Both the Remote and Local digital inputs are ignored at all times.
Keyboard & Local - The Remote input is ignored but the Local input is active. If the feeder
is in OFF/Maint mode and stopped, energizing the Local input will cause the feeder to run
in Local mode. If the feeder is in OFF/Maint mode and running, de-energizing the Local
input will cause the feeder to stop.
Keyboard, Remote & Local - Both the Remote and Local input are active. If the feeder is in
OFF/Maint mode and stopped, energizing the Local input will start the feeder in Local mode
and energizing the Remote input will force the feeder into Remote mode. If the feeder is in
OFF/Maint mode and running, the Remote input will be ignored and de-energizing the Local
input will stop the feeder. If the feeder is in Remote mode, the Local input is ignored and deenergizing the Remote input will force the feeder into OFF/Maint mode.
The keyboard is always enabled regardless of the value selected for this parameter.
This parameter is normally set to Keyboard Only.
P03.13
Min: 10 rpm
Speed Setpoint
This parameter is used to set motor RPM when P03.14 Run Mode Select is set to Speed
Setpoint.
P03.14
Alternative:
Frate Setpoint
Speed Setpoint
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 96 -
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Parameters
This parameter allows the feeder to operate in remote at a fixed motor speed. It is normally
set to Frate Setpoint for normal control and when in this mode the controller responds to
the Analog input or Raise/Lower contacts. When Speed Setpoint is selected the motor
speed is fixed at the value specified in P03.13 Speed Setpoint and the controller does not
respond to either the analog input or the Raise/Lower contacts. Selecting Speed Setpoint is
similar to setting 196NT Setup 03 (Run Mode Select) to 5 (RPM Setpoint).
This parameter MUST be set to Frate Setpoint
P03.15
Min: 1 lb/ft3
Density Setpoint
This parameter specifies the bulk material density in weight per volume. The value is relevant during the very first startup of the feeder and in case the feeder doesn't have load cells
to deternine the belt load.
LC Characteristic Value
Default: 3 mV/V
Max: 10 mV/V
This parameter specifies the Load cell rated output. Both load cells must have the same
output value. Our normally use 3.000 mV/V load cells.
P04.02
Min: 0.5 lb
LC Rated Capacity
Default: 100 lb
Max: 220000000 lb
This parameter specifies the rated capacity of each load cell. Both load cells must have the
same capacity. Our normally use 100.0 Lbs (50 kg) load cells but smaller load cells may be
used for low capacity feeders or feeders with a short weigh span.
This parameter is normally set to 100.0 Lbs (50 kg). Check the project manual or certified
drawings to insure that the proper value is selected.
P04.03
Max: 50 inch
Default: 18 inch
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 97 -
Parameters
This parameter specifies the length of belt that is supported by the load cells. Our use a
three roller weighing system with one weighing roller, supported by the load cells, and two
fixed weigh span rollers. In this configuration, one half of the weight between the weigh
span rollers is supported by the load cells and this parameter must be set to one half of the
distance between the weigh span rollers.
This parameter must be set to the value of 196NT Setup 10 W eigh Span Length, normally 18 inches (45.7cm) on new feeder installations and 19.146 (48,6 cm) on mechanical
feeder conversions.
P04.04
Min: 0.01
Lever Ratio
Default: 1
Max: 2
This parameter is used to specify the ratio of weigh on the load cell and total platform weigh
on multi weigh roller systems.
This parameter MUST be set to 1.000.
P04.05
Min: 0 degree
Angle
Default: 0 degree
Max: 60 degree
This parameter is used to specify the feeder inclination and is used to adjust the weight
signal when the load cell is mounted perpendicular to the belt on an inclined feeder. The
load cells in our are always mounted vertically, to eliminate weighing errors, and this adjustment is not necessary.
The parameter must be set to 0.00 degrees.
P04.06
Speed Measurement
Alternative:
DI
n/a
This parameter selects the digital input used for the tachometer input signal.
This parameter is normally set to DI 15 (terminal block X5-1 & X5-2) and is connected to
(wires 145 & 146).
Note: If DI 14 is selected, a NAMUR type sensor must be used, and connected to X5-3 &
X5-4.
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 98 -
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Parameters
P04.07
Alternative:
LC
n/a
Default: LC V103.LC1
This parameter specifies the input channel connected to the load cell on the left side of the
feeder (viewed in the direction of belt travel).
This parameter should always be set to LC 1.
Note: Setting both P04.07 Source Load Cell and P04.08 Source Load Cell 2 to Not Used,
will disable the load cells and force the system to operate as a volumetric feeder. The DT-9
will calculate an assumed density and belt load based on P02.05 Nominal Flow Rate and
P02.06 Nominal Speed.
P04.08
Alternative:
LC
n/a
Default: LC V103.LC2
This parameter specifies the input channel connected to the load cell on the right side of
the feeder (viewed in the direction of belt travel).
This parameter should always be set to LC 2.
Note: Setting both P04.07 Source Load Cell and P04.08 Source Load Cell 2 to Not Used,
will disable the load cells and force the system to operate as a volumetric feeder. The DT-9
will calculate an assumed density and belt load based on P02.05 Nominal Flow Rate and
P02.06 Nominal Speed.
P04.09
Min: 1 P/rev
Default: 60 P/rev
This parameter specifies the number of pulses generated by the tachometer for each revolution of the motor. It is similar to 196NT Setup 09 tachometer type.
This parameter is set based on the type or tachometer that is installed. In most (but not all)
cases, feeders that use a VFD control use a tachometer that produces 60 pulses per revolution and feeders that use an Eddy Current Clutch use a tachometer that produces 12
pulses per revolution. Check the project specifications or certified drawings to insure that
the proper value is selected.
P04.10
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 99 -
Parameters
This parameter specifies the area under the inlet leveling bar.
This parameter is normally set to 157.0 square inches (1013 square cm). Check the project
specifications or certified drawings to insure that the proper value is selected.
Volum on LC failure
Alternative:
NO
YES
Default: YES
This parameter allows the DT-9 to force the feeder into volumetric mode in the event of a
weighing system failure. Volumetric mode is independent of the event generated in P05.02
Event: Volum. caused by LC-error.
This parameter should always be set to YES.
P05.02
Event Group: CO
Default: IG
Number: 05
The parameter is used to specify the type of error that is generated in the event of a
weighing system failure. This event is independent of volumetric mode.
This parameter should be set to IG (Ignore).
Cause of event:
- Indicates that the system is in volumetric mode due to failure in the weighing system.
Action to be taken:
- Check for load cell wiring errors or imbalanced load cell inputs.
P05.03
Min: 0 s
Default: 0 s
Max: 2000 s
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 100 -
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Parameters
This parameter specifies the amount of time that the feeder continues to totalize after the
belt has stopped.
This parameter should always be set to 0.0 sec.
P05.04
Alternative:
NO
YES
Default: NO
This parameter is used to specify that the DT-9 should stop totalizing and set the weight
signal to zero when the load on the belt reaches a low limit specified by P05.05 Zero DropOut Limit
This parameter must be set to NO.
P05.05
Min: 0 % Q
Default: 1 % Q
Max: 10 % Q
This parameter specifies the limit at which the weight signal will be set to zero and the DT-9
will stop totalizing if P05.04 Zero Drop-Out Active is set to YES.
This parameter should be set to 1.00%.
Event: Stand-By
Event Group: SC
Default: IG
Number: 02
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 101 -
Parameters
The parameter selects the error condition generated when the belt drive motor is stopped
because the motor demand signal is less than the limit specified in P06.02 Stand-By Limit
Value.
The parameter should be set to IG (Ignore).
Cause of event:
- Scale is in standby mode, i.e. setpoint is smaller than set standby limit (Parameter P06.02
Stand-By Limit Value ). Material pre-feeder cuts off.
P06.02
Min: 0 % Io
Default: 0 % Io
Max: 100 % Io
If the motor speed control (MSC) demand signal goes below the limit specified by this parameter, the required motor speed is set to zero and the motor start contact is deenergized. There is a 3 second delay before the motor is stopped and no delay before it is
restarted.
Setting this parameter to 0% deactivates this function.
This parameter should normally be set to 5%.
P06.03
Event Group: CA
Default: A
Number: 02
The parameter selects the error condition generated when the tachometer signal is lost or
is greater than 3600 Hz.
The parameter should be set to A (Stop Feeder).
Cause of event:
- Input frequency is zero or exceeds 3600 Hz.
Action:
- Insure that the motor is turning.
- Insure that parameter P04.06 Speed Measurement is set to the correct input.
- Check the tachometer wiring.
- Check the tachometer signal using a frequency counter or oscilloscope.
P06.04
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 102 -
Default: IG
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Parameters
Event Group: CA
Number: 01
The parameter selects the error condition generated when the load cell signal is invalid. If
P05.01 Volum on LC failure is set to YES, this condition will force the feeder into volumetric
mode, regardless of the value selected here.
The parameter should be set to IG (Ignore).
Cause of event:
- Load cell cable wrong.
- Measuring amplifier A/D converter is in saturated state.
- Supply voltage is below 19V.
- Error must be available for minimum 3s.
Action:
- Check cabling.
- If cabling is OK, load cell amplifier could be defective.
- Check for either possibility. If scale cannot be restarted after remedy of fault, turn device
off and restart.
P06.05
Event Group: LO
Default: IG
Number: 01
The parameter selects the error condition generated when either of the load cell signals is
less than 3% of the full scale value. If P05.01 Volum on LC failure is set to YES, this condition will force the feeder into volumetric mode regardless of the value selected here.
The parameter should be set to IG (Ignore).
P06.06
Event Group: HI
Default: IG
Number: 01
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 103 -
Parameters
The parameter selects the error condition generated when either of the load cell signals is
greater than the maximum allowable value. If P05.01 Volum on LC failure is set to YES, this
condition will force the feeder into volumetric mode regardless of the value selected here.
This parameter should be set to IG (Ignore).
Cause of event:
- Load cell load is higher than 110% of load cells rated capacities.
Full scale value:
125% with 2.85mV/V load cells
175% with 2mV/V load cells
Action:
- Check material infeed.
P06.07
Event Group: SC
Default: IG
Number: 01
The parameter selects the error condition generated when the feedrate demand signal is
greater than the feedrate limit as determined by the operating mode. In gravimetric mode,
the limit is the lesser of P02.05 Nominal Flow Rate or P03.05 Maximum Feedrate. In volumetric mode, the limit is 3 times P02.05 Nominal Flow Rate.
The parameter should be set to IG (Ignore).
Depending on selected mode:
a) In gravimetric mode, setpoint is limited to nominal feed rate.
b) In volumetric mode, limitation starts from values exceeding 3 times the nominal value.
c) Emergency setpoint is active.
P06.08
Event Group: W E
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 104 -
Default: IG
Number: 01
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Parameters
The parameter selects the error condition generated when the controller restarts after a
loss of power. If it is set to A, the feeder will not restart after power is lost during normal
remote mode operation.
This parameter should be set to IG (Ignore).
Cause of event:
- Power failure. Power supply failed or cut off. During power failure, no totalization takes
place. Scale does not start automatically, independent of event class.
P06.09
Min: 0 s
Time Deviation
Default: 20 s
Max: 600 s
This parameter specifies the maximum time that the actual feedrate can differ from the
feedrate setpoint by an amount greater than P06.10 Threshold Deviation before an error is
generated.
This parameter is normally set to 20 sec.
P06.10
Min: 0 %
Threshold Deviation
Default: 5 %
Max: 100 %
This parameter specifies the minimum amount that the actual feedrate can differ from the
feedrate setpoint without generating an error. The error is generated after a delay specified
by P06.09 Time Deviation.
This parameter is normally set to 5.0 %.
P06.11
Min: 0
Factor Deviation
Default: 1
Max: 1
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 105 -
Parameters
This parameter allows P06.10 Threshold Deviation to be adjusted based on the feedrate
setpoint. This allows the effective threshold to be reduced as the feedrate setpoint is reduced.
When P06.11 is set to 1.0 there is no adjustment and the effective threshold is always
equal to P06.10 Threshold Deviation. W hen P06.11 is set to 0.0 the effective deviation is
calculated by multiplying P06.10 Threshold Deviation by a factor equal to the (feedrate
setpoint) / (P02.05 (Nominal Flow Rate).
This parameter should be set to 1.0.
P06.12
Event: Deviation
Event Group: HI
Default: W2
Number: 05
The parameter specifies the event that is generated when the actual feedrate can differ
from the feedrate setpoint by an amount greater than P06.10 Threshold Deviation for a time
greater than P06.09 Time Deviation.
The parameter is similar to the 196NT Feedrate Error and should be set to W 2.
Action:
- Check for loss or material on belt.
P06.13
Event Group: CO
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 106 -
Default: IG
Number: 01
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Parameters
The parameter selects the error condition generated when the motor speed control demand
signal reaches its upper limit.
The parameter should be set to IG (Ignore).
Cause of event:
- Feed rate controller control magnitude has reached upper response threshold. After some
time, message HI-5 (Deviation) is additionally output.
1. Material flow missing or irregular.
2. External feed rate controller wrongly set.
Action:
- Check material discharge and control magnitude (service value Y). At nominal feed rate, Y
should be 10 to 14mA.
P06.14
Event: Memory
Event Group: SY
Default: W1
Number: 01
The parameter selects the error condition generated when the controller detects an error in
the internal non-volatile memory. Reload the non-volatile memory by using the "Load
Default Parameters" function to correct this error. If the problem persists, the controller must
be replaced.
The parameter should be set to A (Stop feeder).
Note: The Load Default Parameters function will reset all of the controller's internal parameters, including Calibration and Trim. After this operation is performed, all parameters
must be reset, the feeder must be recalibrated and the analog I/O channels must be retrimmed.
P06.15
Event Group: W E
Default: IG
Number: 08
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 107 -
Parameters
The parameter selects the error condition generated when the analog feedrate demand
signal is more then 0.4 mA below the minimum value (P03.04 Setpoint Offset).
The parameter should be set to IG (Ignore).
Cause of event:
- The signal available across an analog input is smaller than the offset. A tolerance space
of 0.4 mA is built in for ensuring that events are not constantly set and deleted with noisy
input signals around the offset.
Action:
- Check analog input (Sig+ & Sig-) wiring.
P06.16
Alternative:
n/a
DO
Default: n/a
This parameter selects the digital output used to switch to the secondary tachometer in a
dual tachometer system. The output is reset when the feeder is switched off.
This parameter should be set to n/a in a single tachometer system and DO 3 in a dual tachometer system. DO 3 is normally used by P16.07 DO: Feeder Run Reverse (2nd) which
must be set to not used.
P06.17
Event Group: CA
Default: IG
Number: 09
Event is detected in case the primary tachometer doesn't deliver pulses during normal operation.
Alternative:
n/a
DI
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 108 -
Default: n/a
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Parameters
This parameter selects the digital input used for the Belt Motion Monitor (BMM).
This parameter is normally set to DI 12 - High (terminal block X4-2) and is connected to
wire 115.
P07.02
Min: 0 s
Default: 10 s
Max: 50 s
This parameter sets the maximum delay between Belt Motion Monitor (BMM) pulses before
a BMM error (P07.03 Event: Belt Motion Monitor) is generated. It is the same as 196NT
Setup 17 (Belt Motion Monitor Delay). The interval is determined when the feeder is operating at its minimum design feed rate and is equal to the time necessary for the pulley or
roller which inputs the sensor to make one complete revolution, divided by two, plus ten
percent. Therefore, time intervals for motion monitors mounted to the tension roll or belt
take-up pulley will be considerably longer than those for sensors mounted to the weigh
span roller.
Example: If the motion monitor is mounted to the weigh span roller which make revolution
every 20 seconds at minimum feed rate, the time interval between pulses before the belt is
certain not to be moving is: 20 / 2 = 10 + 10% = 11.
Note: To disable this function if a belt motion monitor is not installed set P07.03 Event: Belt
Motion Monitor to IG.
P07.03
Event Group: WM
Default: IG
Number: 10
The parameter selects the error condition generated when the belt motion monitor (BMM)
pulse delay is exceeded.
The parameter is normally set to A (Stop Feeder) if a BMM is installed. Setting it to IG (Ignore) will disable the BMM feature.
Cause of event:
- The Belt Motion Monitor (BMM) pulse delay (P07.02) has been exceeded.
P07.04
Alternative:
n/a
DI
Default: n/a
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 109 -
Parameters
The digital input for the belt sensor. This function can be checked with the corresponding
service value.
DI: Sensor input DI13 or DI14 should be used.
n/a: BIC and the belt monitoring functions are inactive. This is used if a belt with V-guide
and without mark in the belt is installed.
P07.05
BIC Active
Alternative:
NO
YES
Default: NO
This parameter is used to activate the Belt Influence Compensation (BIC) system. The BIC
system is used in batching feeders to tare individual sections of the belt separately so that
batches that are less then a full belt length are weighted accurately.
The BIC feature is not used in continuous feeding systems and this parameter should always be set to NO.
P07.06
Alternative:
n/a
DI
Default: n/a
This parameter is used to specify a digital input that is used to freeze the tare value while
the BIC feature is active.
This parameter is normally set to n/a.
P07.07
Min: 0 % LB
Slip Value
Default: 10 % LB
Max: 20 % LB
This parameter specifies the maximum amount that the belt speed measured by the belt
slip input can differ from belt speed measured by the tachometer input, without generating
an error.
This parameter is normally set to 10.0 % LB.
P07.08
Default: IG
Event: Slip
Event Group: WM
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 110 -
Number: 02
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Parameters
The parameter selects the error condition generated when the belt slip exceeds the limit
specified in parameter P07.07 Slip Value.
The parameter is normally set to IG.
P07.09
Alternative:
n/a
DO
Default: n/a
This parameter selects the digital output that is energized when the Belt Slip event is active.
This parameter is normally set to IG.
P07.10
Min: 0.01 inch
Sensor Length
Length of the metallic markings worked into the belt in the direction of belt travel.
P07.11
Min: 0.01 inch
Sensor Width
Width of the metallic markings worked into the belt at right angles to the direction of belt
travel.
P07.12
Min: -400 inch
Sensor Offset
Default: 0 inch
The zero point of recording the belt drift can be corrected with the offset. Unfortunately, this
restricts the maximum display zone. This is why greater differences should be calibrated by
mechanically shifting the sensor.
The new display = the old display - the offset
P07.13
Min: 0.01 inch
Belt Drift
Threshold value for belt misalignment identification to generate an event message Event:
Belt Drift.
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 111 -
Parameters
P07.14
Event Group: WM
Default: W1
Number: 04
P07.15
Min: 0.01 inch
Belt Skew
Threshold of the belt drift for detection of event Event: Belt Skew.
P07.16
Event Group: WM
Default: A
Number: 03
P07.17
Alternative:
n/a
DO
Default: n/a
P07.18
Alternative:
n/a
DO
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 112 -
Default: n/a
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Parameters
LC Filter
Min: 0.25 s
Default: 3 s
Max: 300 s
This parameter sets the amount of digital filtering used on the load cell signals. It is similar
to the 196NT Setup 19 W eight Signal Filter.
P08.02
Min: 0 s
Default: 1 s
Max: 600 s
This parameter sets the amount of digital filtering used on the feedrate value displayed on
the display, EasyServe and field bus interface. It is similar to the 196NT Setup 20 Feedback
Signal Filter.
P08.03
Min: 0 s
Default: 1 s
Max: 600 s
This parameter sets the amount of digital filtering used on the feedrate signal sent to the
analog output channel. It is similar to the 196NT Setup 20 Feedback Signal Filter.
P08.04
Min: 0 %
Default: 15 %
Max: 200 %
This parameter specifies point at which the point at which the feedback filter is overridden
and the actual feedrate is displayed. This is used so that large changes are displayed
quickly. This parameter is the same as 196NT Setup 21 (Feedback filter override
threshold).
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 113 -
Parameters
P08.05
Min: 0 s
Default: 1 s
Max: 600 s
This parameter sets the amount of digital filtering used on the belt load signal sent to the
analog output channel.
P08.06
Min: 0 s
Default: 1 s
Max: 600 s
This parameter sets the amount of digital filtering used on the belt speed signal sent to the
analog output channel.
P08.07
Min: 0 s
Filter: Deviation
Default: 1 s
Max: 600 s
This parameter sets the amount of digital filtering used on the deviation signal sent to the
analog output channel.
Min: -10 % Io
Max: 200 % Io
Default: 5 % Io
This parameter sets the point at which a minimum feedrate event is generated.
This parameter is normally set to 5 % of the nominal flow rate (P02.06).
P09.02
Event Group: LO
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 114 -
Default: IG
Number: 02
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Parameters
The parameter determines the type of event that is generated when the feedrate is less
than the value specified in P09.01 Limit: Actual Flow Rate MIN.
The parameter is normally set to IG (Ignore)
P09.03
Min: -10 % Io
Max: 200 % Io
Default: 120 % Io
This parameter sets the point at which a maximum feedrate event is generated.
This parameter is normally set to 120 % of the nominal flow rate (P02.06).
P09.04
Event Group: HI
Default: IG
Number: 02
The parameter determines the type of event that is generated when the feedrate exceeds
the value specified in P09.03 Limit: Actual Flow Rate MAX.
This parameter is normally set to IG (Ignore)
Cause of event:
- Flow rate exceeds set maximum value.
P09.05
Min: -10 % Q
Max: 200 % Q
Default: 60 % Q
This parameter sets the point at which a minimum belt load event is generated.
This parameter is normally set to 60 % of the nominal belt load (calculated from the nominal
flow rate and the nominal belt speed).
P09.06
Event Group: LO
Default: IG
Number: 03
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 115 -
Parameters
The parameter determines the type of event that is generated when the feedrate is less
than the value specified in P09.05 Limit: Load MIN. Set this value to W 2 to simulate the
196NT low density alarm.
The parameter is normally set to IG (Ignore)
Cause of event:
- Belt load smaller than set minimum value.
P09.07
Min: -10 % Q
Max: 200 % Q
Default: 120 % Q
This parameter sets the point at which a maximum belt load event is generated.
This parameter is normally set to 120 % of the nominal belt load (calculated from the nominal flow rate and the nominal belt speed).
P09.08
Event Group: HI
Default: IG
Number: 03
The parameter determines the type of event that is generated when the feedrate exceeds
the value specified in P09.07 Limit: Load MAX.
The parameter is normally set to IG (Ignore)
Cause of event:
- Belt load exceeds set maximum value.
P09.09
Min: -10 % V
Max: 200 % V
Default: 5 % V
This parameter sets the point at which a minimum belt speed event is generated.
This parameter is normally set to 5 % of the nominal belt speed (P02.06).
P09.10
Event Group: LO
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 116 -
Default: IG
Number: 04
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Parameters
The parameter determines the type of event that is generated when the feedrate is less
than the value specified in P09.09 Limit: Speed MIN.
The parameter is normally set to IG (Ignore)
Cause of event:
- Belt speed is smaller than set minimum value.
P09.11
Min: -10 % V
Max: 200 % V
Default: 120 % V
This parameter sets the point at which a maximum belt speed event is generated.
This parameter is normally set to 120 % of the nominal belt speed (P02.06).
P09.12
Event Group: HI
Default: IG
Number: 04
The parameter determines the type of event that is generated when the feedrate exceeds
the value specified in P09.01 Limit: Actual Flow Rate MIN.
The parameter is normally set to IG (Ignore)
Cause of event:
- Belt speed exceeds set maximum value.
P09.13
Min: 30 C
Temperature MAX
Default: 80 C
Max: 90 C
Maximum allowed temperatur inside the VCU. W hen the actual temperature exceeds the
threshold event Event: Temperature-MAX is generated.
See also: P09.14 Event: Temperature-MAX
P09.14
Event: Temperature-MAX
Event Group: MF
Default: IG
Number: 13
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 117 -
Parameters
The event will be detected in case the actual temperature is above the threshold (P09.13
Temperature MAX). The controller might fail to function.
Countermeasures:
- Check temperatur of environment
- Install cooler close to the controller
10.2.2.10
The parameters of this group contain the setpoints for setup programs and their outputs. Adjustment values that
have been lost can be completely reconstructed by entering earlier values.
If replacements are made it is sufficient to load the previously set parameters into the new unit. No readjustment
is necessary.
P10.01
Default: 36 inch
This parameter specifies the distance between the two calibration probe bosses. It is the
same as the 196NT Setup 12 Calibration Probe Span
This parameter must match the physical characteristics of the feeder but in most cases, it is
set to 36 inches (91,5 cm) for new feeder installations or 38.7 inches (98,3 cm) on mechanical weighing feeder conversions.
P10.02
Min: 1 P/inch
This parameter indicates the number of tachometer pulses per lenght unit of belt travel. It is
calculated by the DT-9 during the calibration process based on the time it takes for a calibration tape to travel between the two calibration probes.
This parameter should not normally be changed by the operator.
P10.03
Min: 0.5
Range Correction TW
Default: 1
Max: 2
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 118 -
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Parameters
This parameter indicates the correction factor applied to the load cell reading based on a
dead weight calibration (TW: Span Calibration). It is calculated by the DT-9 during the calibration process based on the weigh system characteristics specified in Parameter Group 4,
and on the calibration weight specified in P10.08 Calibration Weight.
This parameter should not normally be changed by the operator.
Note: The gross weight on the load cells is calculated based on the load cell characteristics
specified in Parameter Group 4 and the product of the three correction factors specified in
P10.03 thru P10.05.
P10.04
Min: 0.5
Range Correction TC
Default: 1
Max: 2
This parameter indicates the correction factor applied to the load cell reading based on a
chain calibration (TC: Span Calibration). It is calculated by the DT-9 during the calibration
process based on the weigh system characteristics specified in Parameter Block 4, and on
the test chain weight specified in P10.09 Test Chain Weight.
This parameter should not normally be changed by the operator.
Note: The gross weight on the load cells is calculated based on the load cell characteristics
specified in Parameter Block 4 and the product of the three correction factors specified in
P10.03 thru P10.05.
P10.05
Min: 0.5
Range Correction TM
Default: 1
Max: 2
This parameter specifies the correction factor applied to the load cell reading based on a
material test. It is calculated by the operator based on the difference between the totalized
value, indicated by the DT-9, and the actual value, determined by an external static scale.
Note: The gross weight on the load cells is calculated based on the load cell characteristics
specified in Parameter Block 4 and the product of the three correction factors specified in
P10.03 thru P10.05.
P10.06
Min: 1 s
Default: 60 s
Max: 9999 s
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 119 -
Parameters
This parameter specifies the duration of the LB: Pulse/Belt calibration process. This process counts the number of tachometer pulses received during the specified time and place
the result in P10.11 Belt Circuit No..
P10.07
Min: 0.5
Default: 2
Max: 5000
This parameter specifies the duration, in belt revolutions, of the TC: Span Calibration process. This process performs a span calibration using P10.09 Test Chain Weight as the
calibration weight, and places the result in P10.04 Range Correction TC.
This parameter should be set to 2.0 belt revolutions.
P10.08
Calibration Weight
Min: 0.001 lb
Max: 22000 lb
Default: 70 lb
This parameter specifies the value of the calibration weight used during the span portion of
a feeder calibration (TW: Span Calibration). It is the same as the 196NT Setup 13 Calibration W eight
The correct value is normally stamped on the calibration weight.
P10.09
Min: 0 lb/inch
This parameter specifies the value of the calibration chain used when a chain calibration
(TC: Span Calibration) is preformed. It is similar to the 196NT Setup 36 Test Chain W eight
P10.10
Basic Tare
Min: 0 lb/inch
Default: 0 lb/inch
This parameter indicates the weight of the empty belt. It is calculated by the DT-9 during
the tare portion of the calibration process (BS: Tare/Belt Speed).
This parameter should not normally be changed by the operator.
P10.11
Min: 0 P/B
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 120 -
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Parameters
This parameter indicates the total number of tachometer pulses in one complete belt revolution. It is calculated by the DT-9 during the tare portion of the calibration process (BS:
Tare/Belt Speed).
This parameter should not normally be changed by the operator.
10.2.2.11
The parameters in this group are used to control the operation of the Motor Speed Control (MSC).
P11.01
P-Component KP
Min: 0 mA/%
This parameter specifies the proportional gain of the speed control loop. Increasing this
value produces a faster response but my produce oscillation or unstable operation. Reducing this value increases stability but produces a slower response.
Note: The DT-9 uses a PI control loop (Proportional & Integral terms, no Derivative term).
The proportional term is specified by P11.01 P-Component KP and the Integral term is
specified by P11.02 I-Component TN.
P11.02
Min: 0 s
I-Component TN
Default: 1 s
Max: 60000 s
This parameter specifies the integral gain of the speed control loop. The value specified
here is the reciprocal of the actual gain value. Decreasing this parameter produces a faster
response but my produce oscillation or unstable operation and increasing it increases stability but produces a slower response.
Note: The DT-9 uses a PI control loop (Proportional & Integral terms, no Derivative term).
The proportional term is specified by P11.01 P-Component KP and the Integral term is
specified by P11.02 I-Component TN.
P11.03
Alternative:
AO
n/a
Default: AO V103.AO1
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 121 -
Parameters
This parameter specifies the analog output channel used to control the Motor Speed Control (MSC).
This parameter is normally set to AO 1 (terminal blocks X6-7 and X6-6) and is connected to
wires 142 through 144.
P11.04
Min: 0 mA
Lower Limit
Default: 4 mA
Max: 20 mA
This parameter determines the lower limit of the Motor Speed Control (MSC) demand signal. It should always be set to the same value as P11.06 Controller Magnitude Offset.
This parameter is normally set to 4.00 mA. If a zero based signal (0-20mA or 0-10V) is
used it must be set to 0.00 mA.
P11.05
Min: 0 mA
Upper Limit
Default: 20 mA
Max: 20 mA
This parameter determines the nominal 100% signal level for the analog input channel. It
should be set to 20.0 for a 0-20mA, 4-20mA and 0-10V input.
P11.06
Min: 0 mA
Default: 4 mA
Max: 20 mA
This parameter determines the nominal 0% signal level for the analog input channel. It
should always be set to the same value as P11.04 Lower Limit.
This parameter is normally set to 4.00 mA. If a zero based signal (0-20mA or 0-10V) is
used it must be set to 0.00 mA.
P11.07
Position at STOP
Alternative:
0
Lower Limit
This parameter specifies the value of the Motor Speed Control (MSC) demand signal (see
P11.03 Controller Magnitude Y) when the belt drive motor is not running.
This parameter should always be set to Lower Limit.
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 122 -
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Parameters
P11.08
KP speed controller
Min: 0 mA/%
This parameter specifies the speed control gain used during the volumetric startup period.
P11.09
VAP Active
Alternative:
NO
YES
Default: NO
When this parameter is set to YES the feedrate and total calculations are time shifted to
adjust for the delay between the time that the material is weighed and the time that it is
discharged.
This feature is useful when small batches are being delivered but is not used on Stock feeders. It should always be set to NO.
P11.10
Min: 0 % LB
Platform Dis.Length
Default: 0 % LB
Max: 50 % LB
This parameter specifies the distance between the center of the weigh platform and the
material discharge point in percentage of total belt length.
This parameter is only used when P11.09 VAP Active is set to YES. It should always be set
to 0.0% Lb.
P11.11
Min: 0 mA/Hz
Relation of control output to resulting frequency of the tachometer. This value is determined
by the adjustment programm Basic (Cal1). The value takes effect during the volumetic startup phase of the controller after power recovery only.
P11.12
Min: -1000 mA
Default: 0 mA
Max: 1000 mA
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 123 -
Parameters
P11.13
Min: 0 mA
Bypass
Default: 0 mA
Max: 20 mA
The constant for the setpoint bypass (also refer to the controller figure in the appendix). The
bypass instantaneously passes on a portion of the flow rate setpoint to the controller magnitude to the feed drive. This parameter contains the current at which the prefeeder just supplies the nominal flow rate (P02.05 Nominal Flow Rate).
Setting: operate the feeder volumetrically and set the bypass so that actual flow rate = setpoint. This value should be approximately 10 ... 15 mA. Otherwise the external flow rate
controller should be adjusted.
P11.14
Min: 0 s
Default: 0 s
Max: 6000 s
The time constant for a 1st-order filter in the setpoint branch. Does not function for the bypass.
To prevent overshoot, the setpoint is decoupled from the actual controller
through a reconstruction of the controlled member. The setpoint filters P11.14 and P11.15
delay the controller while the bypass comes to the controller magnitude output without a
delay.
The filter is switched off with P11.14 = 0.
Also refer to: the controller figure in the appendix
P11.15
Min: 0 s
Default: 0 s
Max: 6000 s
The time constant for a second filter in the setpoint branch. Does not function for the bypass.
To prevent overshoot, the setpoint is decoupled from the actual controller
through a reconstruction of the controlled member. The setpoint filters P11.14 Setpoint
Filter 1st Ord and P11.15 delay the controller while the bypass comes to the controller
magnitude output without a delay.
The filter is switched off with P11.15 = 0.
Also refer to: the controller figure in the appendix
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 124 -
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Parameters
P11.16
Adaptation 1
Alternative:
NO
V
1/Q
1/W
Default: NO
P11.17
Adaptation 2
Alternative:
NO
W
Default: NO
10.2.2.12
Parameters in this group supply the information required when material moisture compensation is used. W e do
not currently supply moisture measurement equipment and these parameters should always be disabled.
P12.01
Moisture Active
Alternative:
NO
YES
Default: NO
This parameter is used to activate the moisture compensation system. At present Stock
does not supply moisture measurement equipment and these parameters should always be
disabled.
This parameter should always be set to NO.
P12.02
Moisture Select
Alternative:
n/a
DI
FB
Default: n/a
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 125 -
Parameters
P12.03
Alternative:
n/a
AI
Default: n/a
Defines the input signal for the measuring signal of the error effects, e.g. the moisture content.
Also refer to:
P12.04 Nominal Moisture
P12.05 Moisture Offset
P12.06 Moisture Range
P12.04
Min: 0 %
Nominal Moisture
Default: 10 %
Max: 100 %
P12.05
Moisture Offset
Min: -200 mA
Max: 200 mA
Default: 4 mA
P12.06
Min: 0 mA
Moisture Range
Default: 20 mA
Max: 1000 mA
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 126 -
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Parameters
P12.07
Alternative:
n/a
DO
Default: n/a
P12.08
Min: 0 %
Moisture MAX
Default: 20 %
Max: 100 %
Threshold for monitoring the moisture as a portion of the moisture content of the overall
weight.
Also refer to: P12.09 DO: Moisture MAX, P12.10 Event: Moisture MAX
P12.09
Alternative:
n/a
DO
Default: n/a
Defines the output channel for the signal that indicates that the moisture content has
exceeded its threshold. The output is independent of the class of the related event.
Also refer to: P12.08 Moisture MAX, P12.10 Event: Moisture MAX
P12.10
Event Group: MF
Default: IG
Number: 05
Cause of event:
- The value of the moisture input signal is greater than the maximum signal set by P12.08
Moisture MAX.
P12.11
Alternative:
n/a
AO
Default: n/a
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 127 -
Parameters
Defines the output channel for the feed rate corrected for the disturbance value (moisture).
Also refer to: P12.12 AO: Flow Rate Offset, P12.13 AO: Flow Rate Range
P12.12
Min: -200 mA
Max: 200 mA
Default: 4 mA
P12.13
Min: 0 mA
Default: 20 mA
Max: 1000 mA
P12.14
Alternative:
NO
YES
Default: NO
10.2.2.13
The parameters in this group control the cleanout conveyor timer and Chain Motion Monitor (CMM).
P13.01
Alternative:
n/a
DO
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 128 -
Default: n/a
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Parameters
This parameter specifies the digital output used to energize the cleanout conveyor motor
starter when the cleanout timer feature is enabled.
Note: The cleanout timer output relay is only energized when the feeder is operating in
remote mode.
P13.02
CleanOut ON Time
Min: 0.01 h
Default: 1 h
Max: 1000 h
This parameter specifies the cleanout conveyor ON time when the cleanout timer feature is
enabled.
Note: The cleanout timer output relay is only energized when the feeder is operating in
remote mode.
P13.03
Min: 0 h
Default: 1 h
Max: 1001 h
This parameter specifies the cleanout conveyor OFF time when the cleanout timer feature
is enabled.
Note: The cleanout timer output relay is only energized when the feeder is operating in
remote mode.
P13.04
Alternative:
n/a
DI
Default: n/a
This parameter specifies the digital input used for the Chain Motion Monitor (CMM)
P13.05
Min: 1 s
Default: 20 s
Max: 1000 s
This parameter sets the maximum delay between Chain Motion Monitor (CMM) pulses before a CMM error (P13.06 Event: Chain Motion Monitor) is generated.
This parameter is normally set to 20 sec. To disable this function if a CMM is not installed
set P13.06 Event: Chain Motion Monitor to IG.
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 129 -
Parameters
P13.06
Event Group: WM
Default: IG
Number: 06
The parameter selects the error condition generated when the Chain Motion Monitor (CMM)
pulse delay is exceeded.
The parameter is normally set to A (Stop Feeder) if a CMM is installed and IG (Ignore) if
not.
Cause of event:
- The Chain Motion Monitor (CMM) pulse delay (P13.05) has been exceeded.
10.2.2.14
The parameters in this group select the control source for the analog output channels.
P14.01
AO: Setpoint
Alternative:
n/a
AO
Default: n/a
This parameter selects the analog output channel used for the indicated signal.
Setpoint: The Setpoint value is the feedrate that the feeder is currently attempting to meet.
The source of the setpoint signal is determined by P03.02 Feedrate Setpoint. The analog
output is scaled to P02.05 Nominal Flow Rate.
P14.02
Setpoint Offset
Min: -200 mA
Max: 200 mA
Default: 4 mA
This parameter selects the actual analog output when the control signal is zero.
P14.03
Min: 0 mA
Setpoint Range
Default: 20 mA
Max: 1000 mA
This parameter selects the actual analog output when the control signal is maximum.
P14.04
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 130 -
Default: AO V103.AO2
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Parameters
Alternative:
AO
n/a
This parameter selects the analog output channel used for the indicated signal.
Actual Flow Rate: The Actual Flow Rate value is the feedrate that the feeder is currently
delivering. This is the default signal source for Analog Output 2 (Set by P01.04 Analog
Channel A11). The analog output is scaled to P02.05 Nominal Flow Rate
P14.05
Min: -200 mA
Max: 200 mA
Default: 4 mA
This parameter selects the actual analog output when the control signal is zero.
P14.06
Min: 0 mA
Default: 20 mA
Max: 1000 mA
This parameter selects the actual analog output when the control signal is maximum.
P14.07
Alternative:
n/a
AO
Default: n/a
This parameter selects the analog output channel used for the indicated signal.
Belt Load: The Belt Load value is the current weight of material on the belt per unit length.
The analog output is scaled to the nominal belt load, which is calculated using P02.05 Nominal Flow Rate and P02.06 Nominal Speed.
P14.08
Min: -200 mA
Max: 200 mA
Default: 4 mA
This parameter selects the actual analog output when the control signal is zero.
P14.09
Min: 0 mA
Default: 20 mA
Max: 1000 mA
This parameter selects the actual analog output when the control signal is maximum.
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 131 -
Parameters
P14.10
AO: Speed
Alternative:
n/a
AO
Default: n/a
This parameter selects the analog output channel used for the indicated signal.
Speed: The Speed value is the current belt speed. The analog output is scaled to P02.06
Nominal Speed.
P14.11
Speed Offset
Min: -200 mA
Max: 200 mA
Default: 4 mA
This parameter selects the actual analog output when the control signal is zero.
P14.12
Min: 0 mA
Speed Range
Default: 20 mA
Max: 1000 mA
This parameter selects the actual analog output when the control signal is maximum.
P14.13
AO: Deviation
Alternative:
n/a
AO
Default: n/a
This parameter selects the analog output channel used for the indicated signal.
Deviation: The Setpoint value indicates the amount that the actual feedrate deviates from
the feedrate setpoint.
P14.14
Deviation Offset
Min: -200 mA
Max: 200 mA
Default: 4 mA
P14.15
Min: 0 mA
Deviation Range
Default: 20 mA
Max: 1000 mA
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 132 -
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Parameters
P14.16
Alternative:
n/a
AO
Default: n/a
This parameter is used when a second analog output proportional to feedrate is required. A
second analog output card is required and is normally installed in position A10. In this case
both parameter P01.03 Analog Channel A10 and P14.16 AO: Actual Flow Rate (2nd) must
be set to AO 3.
Actual Flow Rate: The Actual Flow Rate value is the feedrate that the feeder is currently
delivering. This is the default signal source for Analog Output 2 (Set by P01.04 Analog
Channel A11). The analog output is scaled to P02.05 Nominal Flow Rate.
P14.17
AO: Density
Alternative:
n/a
AO
Default: n/a
Definition of the output channel for the measured density of the bulk material.
For the adjustment of the signal see P14.18 Density Offset and P14.18 Density Offset.
P14.18
Density Offset
Min: -200 mA
Max: 200 mA
Default: 4 mA
P14.19
Min: 0 mA
Density Range
Default: 20 mA
Max: 1000 mA
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 133 -
Parameters
Output signal for measured density = rated density. Not to physically limit the output at the
rated density, P14.17 should be set below 20 mA.
See also:
P14.17 AO: Density
Service value Nominal Density
10.2.2.15
The parameters in this group are used to associate various controller functions with specific digital input channels and to associate events with those functions. Most of the functions specified in this group are hard wired on
the controller and cannot be changed.
P15.01
Alternative:
n/a
DI
Default: n/a
This parameter specifies the digital input used to remotely acknowledge error conditions.
This function is not normally used and this parameter should be set to n/a (not used).
P15.02
Alternative:
n/a
DI
Default: n/a
This parameter specifies the digital input used to indicate that the VMO is in local mode.
This function is not used and this parameter should always be set to n/a (not used).
P15.03
Event Group: SC
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 134 -
Default: IG
Number: 05
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Parameters
The parameter specifies the event that is generated when the input specified in P15.04 DI:
External Event 1 is active.
The function is not used and the parameter should be set to IG (Ignore).
Cause of event:
- External event 1 (see P15.04) is enabled, and external event 1 input (see P15.03 ) is active.
P15.04
Alternative:
n/a
DI
Default: n/a
This parameter specifies the digital input used to remotely generate External Event 1.
This function is not used and this parameter should be set to n/a (not used).
P15.05
Event Group: W E
P15.06
Number: 15
Event Group: W E
Default: IG
Default: IG
Number: 16
P15.07
Alternative:
n/a
DI
Default: n/a
This parameter specifies the digital input used to remotely reset totalizer 1. The totalizer is
reset on the rising edge of the signal.
This function is not used and this parameter should be set to n/a (not used).
P15.08
Default: n/a
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 135 -
Parameters
Alternative:
n/a
DI
This parameter specifies the digital input used to remotely reset totalizer 2. The totalizer is
reset on the rising edge of the signal.
This function is not used and this parameter should be set to n/a (not used).
P15.09
Alternative:
DI
n/a
This parameter specifies the digital input used for the discharge pluggage switch (LSFD). It
is internally programmed as a failsafe input. W hen the parameter is set to HIGH, open
contact (low signal) on the input will produce an event.
This parameter is normally set to DI 5 High (terminal block X2-4) and is connected to wire
109.
P15.10
Min: 0 s
Default: 2 s
Max: 50 s
This parameter specifies the delay between the time that a discharge pluggage is detected
and the time that the discharge pluggage event is generated. It is the same as Setup 16
(Discharge Pluggage Delay) on the 196NT.
P15.11
Event Group: WM
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 136 -
Default: A
Number: 07
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Parameters
The parameter specifies the event that is generated when a discharge pluggage is detected.
The parameter is normally set to A (Stop feeder). It can be set to IG (Ignore) to disable the
discharge pluggage event.
Cause of event:
- The discharge pluggage switch (LSFD) detected a build up of coal at the feeder discharge. This is a fail safe input. The event is generated when the LSFD signal is lost.
Action:
- Insure that discharge is clear.
- Check LSFD wiring.
P15.12
Alternative:
DI
n/a
This parameter specifies the digital input used for the Coal on belt switch (LSFB),
This parameter is normally set to DI 7 High (terminal block X3-6) and is connected to wire
108 if a coal on belt switch is installed on the feeder. It can be set to n/a (not use) to disable
the coal on belt input.
P15.13
Min: 0 s
Default: 1 s
Max: 50 s
This parameter specifies the delay between the time that a loss of material on the belt is
detected (coal on belt switch is inactive) and the time that the Loss of material event is generated. It is the same as Setup 39 (Loss of Flow Delay) on the 196NT.
Note: The loss of flow event can be disabled by setting P15.14 Event: Loss of Material to
IG (Ignore).
P15.14
Event Group: WM
Default: IG
Number: 08
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 137 -
Parameters
The parameter specifies the event that is generated when a loss of material is detected
(coal on belt switch is inactive).
The parameter is normally set to A (Stop feeder). It can be set to IG (Ignore) to disable the
Loss of material event.
Cause of event:
- The coal on belt switch (LSFB) has indicated a loss of material on the belt while running in
Remote.
P15.15
Event Group: WM
Default: A
Number: 12
The parameter specifies the event that is generated when the feeder attempts to run in
Local mode with material on the belt (coal on belt switch is active).
The parameter should always be set to A (Stop feeder).
Cause of event:
- Coal was detected by the coal on belt switch (LSFB) when the feeder was running in local
or calibrate mode.
P15.16
Alternative:
prop to Rate
Low. Lim. if empty
This parameter specifies the source for the feedback signal when a loss of material (coal on
belt switch is inactive) on the belt is detected. If it is set to Prop to Rate, the feedback signal
always follows the actual feedrate value; if it is set to Low Lim if Empty, the feedback signal
is set to zero when a loss of material is detected (coal on belt switch is inactive). It is similar
to Setup 24 (Belt Paddle Feedback Permissive) on the 196NT.
Note: This parameter should always be set to Low Lim. If Empty when the DT-9 is used on
a volumetric feeder.
P15.17
Alternative:
DI
n/a
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 138 -
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Parameters
This parameter specifies the digital input used to indicate that the motor speed control has
been energized.
This parameter is normally set to DI 4 High (terminal block X2-6) and is connected to wire
110.
P15.18
Event Group: WM
Default: A
Number: 09
The parameter specifies the type of event that is generated when the motor feedback signal
(P15.17) does not follow the motor start signal (P16.04 through P16.07).
The parameter should always be set to A (Stop Feeder)
Cause of event:
- The motor starter of VFD has failed to start the feeder when instructed to by the controller.
P15.19
Alternative:
DI
n/a
This parameter specifies the digital input used to indicate that the coal flow monitor has
detected a loss of flow.
This parameter is normally set to DI 10 High (terminal block X4-7) and is connected to
wire 116.
P15.20
Min: 0 lb
Default: 100 lb
Max: 10000000 lb
This parameter specifies the delay between the time that a loss of material flow is indicated
by the coal flow monitor (P15.19) and the time that the Coal Flow Error event is generated.
It is specified in units of weight so that a head seal can be maintained regardless of the
feedrate. It is similar to Setup 18 (Level/Temperature Sensor Delay) on the 196NT.
This parameter is normally set to 100 lbs (50 kg) to provide a quick response without nuisance trips.
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 139 -
Parameters
P15.21
Event Group: WM
Default: A
Number: 11
The parameter specifies the type of event that is generated when a loss of material flow is
detected.
The parameter should be set to A (Stop Feeder) when a coal flow monitor is installed and
IG (ignore) when one is not.
Cause of event:
- The (optional) coal flow monitor has indicated a loss of material in the downspout above
the feeder.
P15.23
Alternative:
n/a
DI
Default: n/a
This parameter specifies the digital input used to force the feeder into Remote mode.
This parameter is normally set to DI 1 High (terminal block X1-6) and is connected to wire
118.
Note: This input is only active when parameter P03.12 Mode Select Enable/Disable is set
to Keyboard, Remote & Local.
P15.24
Alternative:
n/a
DI
Default: n/a
This parameter specifies the digital input used to force the feeder into Off mode.
This function is not used and this parameter should be set to n/a (not used).
P15.25
Alternative:
n/a
DI
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 140 -
Default: n/a
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Parameters
This parameter specifies the digital input used to force the feeder into Local mode.
Attention: This input start the belt drive!
This parameter is normally set to DI 9 High (terminal block X3-2) and is connected to wire
119.
Note: This input is only active when parameter P03.12 Mode Select Enable/Disable is set
to Keyboard & Local or Keyboard, Remote & Local.
P15.26
Alternative:
n/a
DI
Default: n/a
This parameter specifies the digital input used to jog the feeder forward.
This function is not used and this parameter should be set to n/a (not used).
P15.27
Alternative:
n/a
DI
Default: n/a
This parameter specifies the digital input used to jog the feeder in reverse.
This function is not used and this parameter should be set to n/a (not used).
P15.28
Event Group: SC
Default: IG
Number: 06
The parameter specifies the event that is generated when the input specified in P15.29 DI:
External Event 2 is active.
The function is not used and the parameter should be set to IG (Ignore).
Cause of event:
- External event 2 (see P15.29) is enabled, and external event 2 input (see P15.28 ) is active.
P15.29
Default: n/a
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 141 -
Parameters
Alternative:
n/a
DI
This parameter specifies the digital input used to remotely generate External Event 2.
This function is not used and this parameter should be set to n/a (not used).
P15.30
Event Group: SC
Default: IG
Number: 11
The parameter specifies the event that is generated when the input specified in P15.31 DI:
External Event 3 is active.
The function is not used and the parameter should be set to IG (Ignore).
Cause of event:
- External event 3 (see P15.31) is enabled, and external event 3 input (see P15.30 ) is active.
P15.31
Alternative:
n/a
DI
Default: n/a
This parameter specifies the digital input used to remotely generate External Event 3.
This function is not used and this parameter should be set to n/a (not used).
P15.32
Event Group: SC
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 142 -
Default: IG
Number: 12
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Parameters
The parameter specifies the event that is generated when the input specified in P15.33 DI:
External Event 4 is active.
The function is not used and the parameter should be set to IG (Ignore).
Cause of event:
- External event 4 (see P15.33) is enabled, and external event 4 input (see P15.32 ) is active.
P15.33
Alternative:
n/a
DI
Default: n/a
This parameter specifies the digital input used to remotely generate External Event 4.
This function is not used and this parameter should be set to n/a (not used).
P15.34
Alternative:
n/a
DI
Default: n/a
This parameter defines the digital input to force the feed rate control into volumetric mode.
The beltspeed is not influenced by the beltload in volumetric control operation.
P15.35
Alternative:
n/a
DI
Default: n/a
Definition of the input signal that prevents modem switching (Remote <-> Off/Service) using
the VHM keyboard. The signal can be given by i.e. a key switch.
10.2.2.16
The parameters in this group are used to associate various controller functions with specific digital output channels. Most of the functions specified in this group are hard wired at assembly.
P16.01
Alternative:
DO
n/a
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 143 -
Parameters
This parameter specifies the digital output used to start the feeder.
This parameter is normally set to DO 11 High and is connected to wires 7 and 8.
P16.02
Alternative:
n/a
DO
Default: n/a
This parameter specifies the digital output used to indicate that the feeder is running.
This function is not used and this parameter should be set to n/a (Not used).
P16.03
Alternative:
n/a
DO
Default: n/a
This parameter specifies the digital output used to indicate that the feeder is running. This
output is a duplicate of P16.02 DO: Feeder Started.
This function is not used and this parameter should be set to n/a (not used).
P16.04
Alternative:
DO
n/a
This parameter specifies the digital output used to start the feeder running forward. This
output is similar to the K6 relay on the 196 NT.
This parameter must be set to DO 7 High and is connected to wires 177-179.
P16.05
Alternative:
n/a
DO
Default: n/a
This parameter specifies the second digital output used to start the feeder running forward.
This output is a duplicate of P16.04 DO: Feeder Run Forward.
This function is not used and this parameter should be set to n/a (not used).
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 144 -
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Parameters
P16.06
Alternative:
DO
n/a
This parameter specifies the digital output used to start the feeder in reverse. This output is
similar to the K2 relay on the 196 NT.
This parameter must be set to DO 2 High and is connected to wires 156-158.
P16.07
Alternative:
n/a
DO
Default: n/a
This parameter specifies the second digital output used to start the feeder in reverse. This
output is a duplicate of P16.06 DO: Feeder Run Reverse.
This parameter must be set to DO 3 High and is connected to wires 159-161.
P16.08
Alternative:
n/a
DO
Default: n/a
This parameter specifies the digital output used to start the pre-feeder.
This function is not used and this parameter should be set to n/a (not used).
P16.09
DO: ALARM
Alternative:
DO
n/a
This parameter specifies the digital output used to annunciate an alarm condition (Event
type A feeder Stopped). This output is similar to the K1 relay on the 196 NT.
This parameter must be set to DO 1 High and is connected to wires 150-152.
Note: Set this parameter to DO 1 Low to simulate the K1 failsafe function of the 196NT.
P16.10
Default: n/a
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 145 -
Parameters
Alternative:
n/a
DO
This parameter specifies the digital output used to annunciate an alarm condition (Event
type A feeder Stopped). This output is a duplicate of P16.09 DO: ALARM.
This function is not used and this parameter should be set to n/a (not used).
P16.11
DO: Deviation
Alternative:
n/a
DO
Default: n/a
This parameter specifies the digital output used to indicate that a deviation event is active.
This function is not used and this parameter should be set to n/a (not used).
P16.12
Alternative:
n/a
DO
Default: n/a
This parameter specifies the digital output used to indicate that a low flow rate event is
active.
This function is not used and this parameter should be set to n/a (not used).
P16.13
Alternative:
n/a
DO
Default: n/a
This parameter specifies the digital output used to indicate that a high flow rate event is
active.
This function is not used and this parameter should be set to n/a (not used).
P16.14
Alternative:
n/a
DO
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 146 -
Default: n/a
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Parameters
This parameter specifies the digital output used to indicate that a low belt load event is
active.
This function is not used and this parameter should be set to n/a (not used).
P16.15
Alternative:
n/a
DO
Default: n/a
This parameter specifies the digital output used to indicate that a high belt load event is
active.
This function is not used and this parameter should be set to n/a (not used).
P16.16
Alternative:
n/a
DO
Default: n/a
This parameter specifies the digital output used to indicate that a low belt speed event is
active.
This function is not used and this parameter should be set to n/a (not used).
P16.17
Alternative:
n/a
DO
Default: n/a
This parameter specifies the digital output used to indicate that a high belt speed event is
active.
This function is not used and this parameter should be set to n/a (not used).
P16.18
Alternative:
DO
n/a
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 147 -
Parameters
This parameter specifies the digital output used to indicate that the feeder is in volumetric
mode. This output is similar to the K4 relay on the 196 NT.
This parameter must be set to DO 5 High and is connected to wires 165-167.
P16.19
Alternative:
n/a
DO
Default: n/a
This parameter specifies the digital output used to indicate that the feeder is in volumetric
mode. This output is a duplicate of P16.18 DO: Volumetric Mode.
This function is not used and this parameter should be set to n/a (not used).
P16.20
Alternative:
n/a
DO
Default: n/a
This parameter specifies the digital output used to indicate that the feeder is in VMO Mode.
This function is not used and this parameter should be set to n/a (not used).
P16.21
DO: WARNING
Alternative:
DO
n/a
This parameter specifies the digital output used to annunciate a warning condition (Event
type W 1 or W2). This output is similar to the K7 relay on the 196 NT.
This parameter must be set to DO 8 High and is connected to wires 183-185.
Note: Set this parameter to DO 8 Low to simulate the K7 failsafe function of the 196NT.
P16.22
Alternative:
n/a
DO
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 148 -
Default: n/a
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Parameters
This parameter specifies the digital output used to annunciate a warning condition (Event
type W 1 or W2). This output is a duplicate of P16.21 DO: WARNING.
This function is not used and this parameter should be set to n/a (not used).
P16.23
DO: Feeding
Alternative:
DO
n/a
This parameter specifies the digital output used to indicate that the belt drive motor is running and there is material on the belt. This output is similar to the K5 relay on the 196 NT.
This parameter must be set to DO 6 High and is connected to wires 171-173.
P16.24
Alternative:
n/a
DO
Default: n/a
This parameter specifies the digital output used to indicate that the belt drive motor is running and there is material on the belt. This output is a duplicate of P16.23 DO: Feeding.
This function is not used and this parameter should be set to n/a (not used).
P16.25
Alternative:
DO
n/a
This parameter specifies the digital output used to indicate that the feeder is in remote mode. This output is similar to the Kx relay on the 196 NT.
This parameter must be set to DO 4 High and is connected to wires 162-164.
P16.26
Alternative:
n/a
DO
Default: n/a
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 149 -
Parameters
This parameter specifies the digital output used to indicate that the feeder is in remote mode. This output is a duplicate of P16.25 DO: Remote CTRL.
This function is not used and this parameter should be set to n/a (not used).
10.2.2.17
The parameters in this group are used to trim the analog output values. They can be set manually but they are
normally set using the Analog Trim Function.
P17.01
Min: 1 mA
Default: 4 mA
Max: 7 mA
P17.02
Min: 17 mA
Default: 20 mA
Max: 23 mA
P17.03
Min: 1 mA
Default: 4 mA
Max: 7 mA
P17.04
Min: 17 mA
Default: 20 mA
Max: 23 mA
P17.05
Min: 1 mA
Default: 4 mA
Max: 7 mA
P17.06
Min: 17 mA
Default: 20 mA
Max: 23 mA
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 150 -
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Parameters
P17.07
Min: 1 mA
Default: 4 mA
Max: 7 mA
P17.08
Min: 17 mA
Default: 20 mA
Max: 23 mA
P17.09
Min: 1 mA
Default: 4 mA
Max: 7 mA
P17.10
Min: 17 mA
Default: 20 mA
Max: 23 mA
P17.11
Min: 1 mA
Default: 4 mA
Max: 7 mA
P17.12
Min: 17 mA
Default: 20 mA
Max: 23 mA
P17.13
Min: 1 mA
Default: 4 mA
Max: 7 mA
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 151 -
Parameters
P17.14
Min: 17 mA
Default: 20 mA
Max: 23 mA
P17.15
Min: 1 mA
Default: 4 mA
Max: 7 mA
P17.16
Min: 17 mA
Default: 20 mA
Max: 23 mA
P17.17
Min: 1 mA
Default: 4 mA
Max: 7 mA
P17.18
Min: 17 mA
Default: 20 mA
Max: 23 mA
P17.19
Min: 1 mA
Default: 4 mA
Max: 7 mA
P17.20
Min: 17 mA
Default: 20 mA
Max: 23 mA
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 152 -
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Parameters
P17.21
Min: 1 mA
Default: 4 mA
Max: 7 mA
P17.22
Min: 17 mA
Default: 20 mA
Max: 23 mA
P17.23
Min: 0 mA
Default: 0 mA
Max: 23 mA
This parameter specifies the value written to the output when adjustment program AO Test
is called. This allows for simple test of the analog interface to the plant control. After termination of the adjustment program the output jumps back the normal process value.
P17.24
Min: 0 mA
Default: 0 mA
Max: 23 mA
This parameter specifies the value written to the output when adjustment program AO Test
is called. This allows for simple test of the analog interface to the plant control. After termination of the adjustment program the output jumps back the normal process value.
P17.25
Min: 0 mA
Default: 0 mA
Max: 23 mA
This parameter specifies the value written to the output when adjustment program AO Test
is called. This allows for simple test of the analog interface to the plant control. After termination of the adjustment program the output jumps back the normal process value.
P17.26
Min: 0 mA
Default: 0 mA
Max: 23 mA
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 153 -
Parameters
This parameter specifies the value written to the output when adjustment program AO Test
is called. This allows for simple test of the analog interface to the plant control. After termination of the adjustment program the output jumps back the normal process value.
P17.27
Min: 0 mA
Default: 0 mA
Max: 23 mA
This parameter specifies the value written to the output when adjustment program AO Test
is called. This allows for simple test of the analog interface to the plant control. After termination of the adjustment program the output jumps back the normal process value.
P17.28
Min: 0 mA
Default: 0 mA
Max: 23 mA
This parameter specifies the value written to the output when adjustment program AO Test
is called. This allows for simple test of the analog interface to the plant control. After termination of the adjustment program the output jumps back the normal process value.
10.2.2.18
The parameters in this group control the DT-9 belt slip sensor system.
P18.01
Alternative:
NO
YES
Default: NO
P18.02
Source Sensor 1
Alternative:
Speed
DI
Default: Speed
This parameter specifies the type of input used for the first of the two sensors used in slip
detection.
P18.03
DI: Sensor 1
Alternative:
n/a
DI
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 154 -
Default: n/a
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Parameters
This parameter specifies the digital input used for the first slip sensor. It is only active if
P18.02 Source Sensor 1 is set to DI.
P18.04
This parameter specifies the number of pulses that the first slip sensor generates in one
inch (or cm) of belt travel.
P18.05
DI: Sensor 2
Alternative:
n/a
DI
Default: n/a
This parameter specifies the digital input used for the second slip sensor.
P18.06
This parameter specifies the number of pulses that the second slip sensor generates in one
inch (cm) of belt travel.
P18.07
Min: 0 % LB
Slip Value 2
Default: 2 % LB
Max: 10 % LB
This parameter specifies the minimum difference between the two sensors (in percent of
total belt length, LB) required to generate a belt slip event.
P18.08
Event: Slip 2
Event Group: WM
Default: IG
Number: 05
The parameter specifies the type of event that is generated when belt slippage is detected.
Cause of event:
- The difference between the belt speed calculated using sensor 1 (P18.02) and sensor 2
(P18.05) has exceeded the limit specified by P18.07 Slip Value 2.
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 155 -
Parameters
P18.09
DO: Slip 2
Alternative:
n/a
DO
Default: n/a
This parameter specifies the digital output that is activated when a belt slippage event is
generated.
10.2.2.19
The parameters in this group allow an event to be generated to indicate that periodic maintenance is required.
P19.01
Min: 1 h
Maintenance Electric
Default: 3000 h
Max: 10000 h
This parameter specifies the time intervals between maintenance events based on the total
amount of time the DT-9 is powered.
P19.02
Event Group: SC
Default: IG
Number: 04
The parameter specifies the type of event that is generated when the time interval specified
in P19.01 Maintenance Electric has expired.
This parameter is normally set to IG to disable the maintenance event.
P19.03
Min: 1 h
Default: 3000 h
Max: 10000 h
This parameter specifies the time intervals between maintenance events based on the total
amount of time the belt drive motor is energized.
P19.04
Event Group: SC
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 156 -
Default: IG
Number: 03
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Parameters
The parameter specifies the type of event that is generated when the time interval specified
in P19.03 Maintenance Feeder Run has expired.
The parameter is normally set to IG to disable the maintenance event.
Cause of event:
- Total of scale run times exceeds "Scale ON-Time". After every time interval elapsed, a
message is output. This message simply informs you that service work is required.
10.2.2.20
The parameters in this group configure the recording of process data. The recorded data are available at the
operating panel and can be easily accessed via Ethernet on the controller homepage.
P20.01
Min: 0 min
Default: 0 min
Max: 59 min
This parameter specifies the time that the hourly total is saved to the total data logging
system. It is the same as Setup 37 (Hourly total time) on the 196NT.
This parameter is set according to customer preference.
P20.02
Min: 0 min
Default: 0 min
This parameter specifies the time that the daily total is saved to the total data logging system. It is the same as Setup 38 (Daily total time) on the 196NT.
This parameter is set according to customer preference.
P20.03
Min: 1 min
Default: 1 min
Logging cycle time for the Data Log Values selected by P20.04 ... P20.13.
P20.04
Default: 752
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 157 -
Parameters
Select the process value for recording. You can find the identification number of a value in
the 'data communication' manual.
Also refer to:
P20.03 Logger cycle time
These manuals:
DISOCONT Tersus: BV-H2448
INTECONT Tersus: BV-H2474
DISOCONT Tersus Software VCF2017x: BV-H2468
P20.05
Default: 755
P20.06
Default: 1872
P20.07
Default: 1874
P20.08
Default: 1876
P20.09
Default: 2316
P20.10
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 158 -
Default: 1880
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Parameters
P20.11
Default: 1894
P20.12
Default: 2230
P20.13
Default: 2232
10.2.2.21
The parameters in this group control serial communication between EasyServe and the DT-9.
Note: EasyServe is normally connected using Ethernet and these parameters are not used.
P21.01
Min: 1
Own Address
Default: 1
Max: 1
This parameter specifies the serial loop address of the DT-9. This address and baud rates
(see below) much match the address specified in EasyServe.
Note: The station address is designed for systems with Service bus. If Service bus is not
used, select address 1.
P21.02
Baud Rate
Alternative:
38400
Default: 38400
This parameter specifies the baud rate used for serial communication with EasyServe.
P21.03
Format Data
Default: 8-N-1
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 159 -
Parameters
Alternative:
8-N-1
This parameter specifies the communications protocol used for serial communication
between EasyServe and the DT-9.
10.2.2.22
The parameters in this group are used to control the various types of fieldbus communications that are supported by the DT-9. Contact us for a detailed description of Fieldbus communications.
Note: Fieldbus communications are disabled and hidden by default.
P22.01
Protocol Type
Alternative:
NO
Modbus-RTU
PROFIBUS DP
DeviceNet
Modbus-TCP
PROFINET IO
Ethernet/IP
Default: NO
Type of communication protocol. Some types of fieldbus need their respective fieldbus
card. Further details on card installation can be found in the system manual BV-H2406. The
manual 'DISOCONT Tersus Data Communication' (BV-H2468) contains further information
on the data structures.
NO: MODBUS/TCP can be used to read but write-accesses will not be processed.
MODBUS: Modbus RTU protocol; RS232-, RS422- or RS485 interface; fieldbus interface
card VSS 28020 must be installed.
P22.02
Min: 1 s
Timeout Host
Default: 5 s
Max: 600 s
P22.03
Event Group: SY
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 160 -
Default: A
Number: 08
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Parameters
Cyclical serial communication with the higher-order plant control system has been interrupted for longer than the timeout-period in P22.02.
To rectify: check cable connections.
P22.04
Modbus-Version
Alternative:
compatible Stock
STANDARD
P22.05
Word Sequence
Alternative:
I:std/L:std
I:swp/L:std
I:std/L:swp
I:swp/L:swp
Default: I:std/L:std
P22.06
Byte Sequence
Alternative:
High - Low
Low - High
P22.07
Configuration
Default: FIXED_8_16
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 161 -
Parameters
Alternative:
NO_PARA_ID_3_6
NO_PARA_ID_4_12
PARA_ID_6_15
FIXED_8_16
FIXED_8_8
FIXED_4_4
VARIABLE COMPATIBLE
FIXED COMPATIBLE
The configuration of the content of the data of the fieldbus telegrams. You can find a detailed description in the manuals for data communication:
DISOCONT Tersus: BV-H2448
INTECONT Tersus: BV-H2474
DISOCONT Tersus Software VCF2017x: BV-H2468
The contents of the data have to be set on the scale and opposite point in a way that is
compatible to one another!
P22.08
Min: 1
Address
Default: 1
Max: 254
P22.09
Min: 1
Resolution
Default: 4096
Max: 32767
The maximum resolution in analog format or integer format of the measured value transferred.
The resolution is related to the nominal value of the respective process value.
P22.10
Baud rate
Alternative:
9600
4800
2400
19200
38400
Default: 19200
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 162 -
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Parameters
P22.11
Data Format
Alternative:
8-O-1
8-E-1
8-N-1
Default: 8-O-1
P22.12
Physics
Alternative:
RS485-2-wire
RS485-4-wire
RS232
Default: RS232
P22.13
Min: 0
Address
Default: 16
Max: 126
P22.14
FLOAT-Format
Alternative:
IEEE
SIEMENS-KG
Default: IEEE
Information on the formats for all setpoints, measuring values and floating point parameters.
P22.15
Min: 0
Address
Default: 63
Max: 63
P22.16
Baud rate
Default: 125K
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 163 -
Parameters
Alternative:
125K
250K
500K
P22.17
Parameter
Alternative:
NO
YES
Default: NO
Select whether the user data package has a parameter block or not.
P22.18
Min: 2
Preset Count
Default: 2
Max: 4
The number of specified values that can be specified in a telegram by the higher-order
plant control system.
P22.19
Min: 0
READ_ID Count
Default: 6
Max: 12
The number of freely selectable measuring and status values (scales master) that are
queried in a telegram.
P22.20
Alternative:
NO
FIRST WRITE
REMOTE IP
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 164 -
Default: NO
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Parameters
Determines for network protocol Modbus-TCP which master system may intervene as a
controller:
NO: No restrictions
FIRST WRITE: The subscriber that transmits the first write access gets the control rights.
The other subscribers may read only.
REMOTE IP: Control commands from the subscriber with the IP address given in P22.21
Remote IP Address FB only will be carried out.
P22.21
Remote IP Address FB
Default: 192.168.240.250
P22.22
Event Group: SY
Default: W2
Number: 10
P22.23
Configuration
Alternative:
PARA_ID_6_15
FIXED_8_16
Default: PARA_ID_6_15
10.2.2.23
IP Address
Default: 192.168.240.1
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 165 -
Parameters
P23.02
Default: 255.255.255.0
Net Mask
P23.03
Default: 0.0.0.0
Gateway
This parameter specifies the network gate way used to connect the DT-9.
10.2.2.24
This parameter group is used to specify analog and digital output channels that are under Fieldbus control.
Contact us for a detailed description of Fieldbus communications.
Note: Fieldbus communications are disabled and hidden by default.
P24.01
DO: PLC 1
Alternative:
n/a
DO
Default: n/a
P24.02
DO: PLC 2
Alternative:
n/a
DO
Default: n/a
P24.03
DO: PLC 3
Alternative:
n/a
DO
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 166 -
Default: n/a
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Parameters
P24.04
DO: PLC 4
Alternative:
n/a
DO
Default: n/a
P24.05
DO: PLC 5
Alternative:
n/a
DO
Default: n/a
P24.06
DO: PLC 6
Alternative:
n/a
DO
Default: n/a
P24.07
DO: PLC 7
Alternative:
n/a
DO
Default: n/a
P24.08
DO: PLC 8
Alternative:
n/a
DO
Default: n/a
P24.09
AO: PLC 1
Alternative:
n/a
AO
Default: n/a
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 167 -
Parameters
Definition of the analog output channel controlled by PCS analog command word 1.
P24.10
AO: PLC 2
Alternative:
n/a
AO
Default: n/a
10.2.2.25
This parameter group is used to specify fixed data points that are used with Fieldbus communication. Contact us
for a detailed description of Fieldbus communications.
Note: Fieldbus communications are disabled and hidden by default.
P25.01
ID Preset Value 1
Default: 320
Selecting the first control command with ID 320 (decimal) in the Fieldbus telegram. It cannot be changed in this parameter.
The following values in the telegram can be configured as per the ID list in the 'data communication' manual:
DISOCONT Tersus: BV-H2448
INTECONT Tersus: BV-H2474
DISOCONT Tersus Software VCF2017x: BV-H2468
P25.02
ID Preset Value 2
Default: 352
P25.03
ID Preset Value 3
Default: 384
P25.04
ID Preset Value 4
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 168 -
Default: 592
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Parameters
P25.05
ID Preset Value 5
Default: 0
P25.06
ID Preset Value 6
Default: 0
P25.07
ID Preset Value 7
Default: 0
P25.08
ID Preset Value 8
Default: 0
P25.09
ID Read Value 1
Default: 752
Selecting the first value to be read from weighing electronics in the fieldbus telegram. The
number of the value (ID) can be found in the Data Communication manual:
DISOCONT Tersus: BV-H2448
INTECONT Tersus: BV-H2474
DISOCONT Tersus Software VCF2017x: BV-H2468
P25.10
ID Read Value 2
Default: 816
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 169 -
Parameters
P25.11
ID Read Value 3
Default: 1552
P25.12
ID Read Value 4
Default: 1872
P25.13
ID Read Value 5
Default: 1894
P25.14
ID Read Value 6
Default: 2230
P25.15
ID Read Value 7
Default: 2232
P25.16
ID Read Value 8
Default: 2234
P25.17
ID Read Value 9
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 170 -
Default: 0
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Parameters
P25.18
ID Read Value 10
Default: 0
P25.19
ID Read Value 11
Default: 0
P25.20
ID Read Value 12
Default: 0
P25.21
ID Read Value 13
Default: 0
P25.22
ID Read Value 14
Default: 0
P25.23
ID Read Value 15
Default: 0
P25.24
ID Read Value 16
Default: 0
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 171 -
Parameters
10.2.2.26
This parameter group is used to associate Function Block analog outputs with physical I/O points. Contact us for
a detailed description of Function Control Blocks.
Note: Function Control Block parameters are disabled and hidden by default.
P26.01
FCB_AO 01
Alternative:
n/a
AO
Default: n/a
Assigning the physical output signal for analog output 1 of the PLC.
P26.02
Offset FCB_AO 1
Min: -200 mA
Max: 200 mA
Default: 4 mA
P26.03
Range FCB_AO 1
Min: 0 mA
Default: 20 mA
Max: 1000 mA
P26.04
Min: 1
Reference FCB_AO 1
Default: 1000
Max: 1000000
P26.05
FCB_AO 02
Alternative:
n/a
AO
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 172 -
Default: n/a
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Parameters
P26.06
Offset FCB_AO 2
Min: -200 mA
Max: 200 mA
Default: 4 mA
Description see:
P26.01 FCB_AO 01
P26.02 Offset FCB_AO 1
P26.03 Range FCB_AO 1
P26.04 Reference FCB_AO 1
P26.07
Range FCB_AO 2
Min: 0 mA
Default: 20 mA
Max: 1000 mA
Description see:
P26.01 FCB_AO 01
P26.02 Offset FCB_AO 1
P26.03 Range FCB_AO 1
P26.04 Reference FCB_AO 1
P26.08
Min: 1
Reference FCB_AO 2
Default: 1000
Max: 1000000
Description see:
P26.01 FCB_AO 01
P26.02 Offset FCB_AO 1
P26.03 Range FCB_AO 1
P26.04 Reference FCB_AO 1
P26.09
FCB_AO 03
Alternative:
n/a
AO
Default: n/a
P26.10
Offset FCB_AO 3
Min: -200 mA
Max: 200 mA
Default: 4 mA
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 173 -
Parameters
Description see:
P26.01 FCB_AO 01
P26.02 Offset FCB_AO 1
P26.03 Range FCB_AO 1
P26.04 Reference FCB_AO 1
P26.11
Range FCB_AO 3
Min: 0 mA
Default: 20 mA
Max: 1000 mA
Description see:
P26.01 FCB_AO 01
P26.02 Offset FCB_AO 1
P26.03 Range FCB_AO 1
P26.04 Reference FCB_AO 1
P26.12
Min: 1
Reference FCB_AO 3
Default: 10000
Max: 1000000
Description see:
P26.01 FCB_AO 01
P26.02 Offset FCB_AO 1
P26.03 Range FCB_AO 1
P26.04 Reference FCB_AO 1
P26.13
FCB_AO 04
Alternative:
n/a
AO
Default: n/a
P26.14
Offset FCB_AO 4
Min: -200 mA
Max: 200 mA
Default: 4 mA
Description see:
P26.01 FCB_AO 01
P26.02 Offset FCB_AO 1
P26.03 Range FCB_AO 1
P26.04 Reference FCB_AO 1
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 174 -
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Parameters
P26.15
Range FCB_AO 4
Min: 0 mA
Default: 20 mA
Max: 1000 mA
Description see:
P26.01 FCB_AO 01
P26.02 Offset FCB_AO 1
P26.03 Range FCB_AO 1
P26.04 Reference FCB_AO 1
P26.16
Min: 1
Reference FCB_AO 4
Default: 1000
Max: 1000000
Description see:
P26.01 FCB_AO 01
P26.02 Offset FCB_AO 1
P26.03 Range FCB_AO 1
P26.04 Reference FCB_AO 1
P26.17
FCB_AO 05
Alternative:
n/a
AO
Default: n/a
P26.18
Offset FCB_AO 5
Min: -200 mA
Max: 200 mA
Default: 4 mA
Description see:
P26.01 FCB_AO 01
P26.02 Offset FCB_AO 1
P26.03 Range FCB_AO 1
P26.04 Reference FCB_AO 1
P26.19
Min: 0 mA
Range FCB_AO 5
Default: 20 mA
Max: 1000 mA
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 175 -
Parameters
Description see:
P26.01 FCB_AO 01
P26.02 Offset FCB_AO 1
P26.03 Range FCB_AO 1
P26.04 Reference FCB_AO 1
P26.20
Min: 1
Reference FCB_AO 5
Default: 1000
Max: 1000000
Description see:
P26.01 FCB_AO 01
P26.02 Offset FCB_AO 1
P26.03 Range FCB_AO 1
P26.04 Reference FCB_AO 1
P26.21
FCB Variant
Default: Empty
Name of the required function block link. This name is automatically transferred to the parameter when a new link is loaded. W hen the system is started after turning on the voltage,
it checks to see whether the name of the function block link loaded is the same as the
name entered in the parameter. Event P26.22 Event: FCB-Error is identified if the names
are different.
This check serves as a control if a replacement part is used.
Also refer to: P26.22 Event: FCB-Error
P26.22
Event: FCB-Error
Event Group: IL
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 176 -
Default: A
Number: 10
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Parameters
This event is identified if the function block link loaded does not correspond to the link
stored in the parameter.
Caution: It probably does not have the full functionality. Unreliable operating states
may arise.
Possible causes:
- it forgot to load the correct link after exchanging the VCU.
- the name in the parameter was changed manually.
Steps to be taken:
Load the function block link to the correct name given in P26.21 FCB Variant. No further
links can be loaded as long as this event is identified. If in this error state a link with a different name should be loaded, the new name must first be entered into P26.21.
10.2.2.27
This parameter group is used to associate Function Block digital outputs with physical I/O points. Contact us for
a detailed description of Function Control Blocks.
Note: Function Control Block parameters are disabled and hidden by default.
P27.01
FCB_DO 01
Alternative:
n/a
DO
Default: n/a
Allocation of the physical output channel to the binary output signal of the internal PLC.
P27.02
FCB_DO 02
Alternative:
n/a
DO
Default: n/a
Allocation of the physical output channel to the binary output signal of the internal PLC.
P27.03
FCB_DO 03
Alternative:
n/a
DO
Default: n/a
Allocation of the physical output channel to the binary output signal of the internal PLC.
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 177 -
Parameters
P27.04
FCB_DO 04
Alternative:
n/a
DO
Default: n/a
Allocation of the physical output channel to the binary output signal of the internal PLC.
P27.05
FCB_DO 05
Alternative:
n/a
DO
Default: n/a
Allocation of the physical output channel to the binary output signal of the internal PLC.
P27.06
FCB_DO 06
Alternative:
n/a
DO
Default: n/a
Allocation of the physical output channel to the binary output signal of the internal PLC.
P27.07
FCB_DO 07
Alternative:
n/a
DO
Default: n/a
Allocation of the physical output channel to the binary output signal of the internal PLC.
P27.08
FCB_DO 08
Alternative:
n/a
DO
Default: n/a
Allocation of the physical output channel to the binary output signal of the internal PLC.
P27.09
FCB_DO 09
Alternative:
n/a
DO
Default: n/a
Allocation of the physical output channel to the binary output signal of the internal PLC.
P27.10
FCB_DO 10
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 178 -
Default: n/a
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Parameters
Alternative:
n/a
DO
Allocation of the physical output channel to the binary output signal of the internal PLC.
P27.11
FCB_DO 11
Alternative:
n/a
DO
Default: n/a
Allocation of the physical output channel to the binary output signal of the internal PLC.
P27.12
FCB_DO 12
Alternative:
n/a
DO
Default: n/a
Allocation of the physical output channel to the binary output signal of the internal PLC.
P27.13
FCB_DO 13
Alternative:
n/a
DO
Default: n/a
Allocation of the physical output channel to the binary output signal of the internal PLC.
P27.14
FCB_DO 14
Alternative:
n/a
DO
Default: n/a
Allocation of the physical output channel to the binary output signal of the internal PLC.
P27.15
FCB_DO 15
Alternative:
n/a
DO
Default: n/a
Allocation of the physical output channel to the binary output signal of the internal PLC.
P27.16
FCB_DO 16
Alternative:
n/a
DO
Default: n/a
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 179 -
Parameters
Allocation of the physical output channel to the binary output signal of the internal PLC.
P27.17
FCB_DO 17
Alternative:
n/a
DO
Default: n/a
Allocation of the physical output channel to the binary output signal of the internal PLC.
P27.18
FCB_DO 18
Alternative:
n/a
DO
Default: n/a
Allocation of the physical output channel to the binary output signal of the internal PLC.
P27.19
FCB_DO 19
Alternative:
n/a
DO
Default: n/a
Allocation of the physical output channel to the binary output signal of the internal PLC.
P27.20
FCB_DO 20
Alternative:
n/a
DO
Default: n/a
Allocation of the physical output channel to the binary output signal of the internal PLC.
10.2.2.28
The parameters in this group define the process variables to be displayed on the 'Values' page of the operating
panel (HMI, OP) for a DISOCONT Tersus.
On an INTECONT Tersus these values can be called up with the '9' key.
EasyServe can be used for easy configuration or the settings can be made with the help of the allocation map in
the data description of the serial interface in the operating panel.
You can find the characteristic values (ID) belonging to the process variables in the manual on data communication:
DISOCONT Tersus: BV-H2448
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 180 -
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Parameters
HMI Value 01
Default: 1884
P28.02
HMI Value 02
Default: 1880
P28.03
HMI Value 03
Default: 2276
P28.04
HMI Value 04
Default: 2292
P28.05
HMI Value 05
Default: 2236
P28.06
HMI Value 06
Default: 2234
P28.07
HMI Value 07
Default: 2224
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 181 -
Parameters
P28.08
Default: 2226
HMI Value 08
P28.09
HMI Value 09
Default: 1904
P28.10
HMI Value 10
Default: 1960
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 182 -
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
STRICTLY OBSERVE
Always correct the cause of a fault before acknowledging it.
The feeder has the potential to cause injuries or damage if this is not done.
Code
Display / Effect
Alarm
All measuring and control operations are aborted. System goes to safe state.
This type of event is the same as a feeder trip on the 196NT.
Warning 1
W1
The event is annunciated and remains active until it has been acknowledged.
Measuring and control tasks are not affected. This type of event is similar to
some type of alarms on the 196NT.
Warning 2
W2
The event is annunciated and remains active until the cause has been corrected. It is not necessary to acknowledge this type of event. Measuring and
control tasks are not affected. This type of event is similar to some type of
alarms on the 196NT.
Ignore
IG
Event is not annunciated. Measuring and control tasks are not affected.
Events are classified in the following groups with the priority shown:
Event Group
Symbol
System message
SY
Sequence monitoring
SC
Electrical system
WE
Mechanical system
WM
Material flow
MF
Interlocking
IL
Controllers
CO
Calibration
CA
Maximum
HI
Minimum
LO
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 183 -
Note: In the following list, parameters related to the indicated event are shown in parentheses.
11.1
Events Details
(P06.04)
The parameter selects the error condition generated when the load cell signal is invalid. If P05.01 Volum on LC failure is set to YES, this condition will force the feeder
into volumetric mode, regardless of the value selected here.
The parameter should be set to IG (Ignore).
Cause of event:
- Load cell cable wrong.
- Measuring amplifier A/D converter is in saturated state.
- Supply voltage is below 19V.
- Error must be available for minimum 3s.
Action:
- Check cabling.
- If cabling is OK, load cell amplifier could be defective.
- Check for either possibility. If scale cannot be restarted after remedy of fault, turn
device off and restart.
CA02
(P06.03)
The parameter selects the error condition generated when the tachometer signal is
lost or is greater than 3600 Hz.
The parameter should be set to A (Stop Feeder).
Cause of event:
- Input frequency is zero or exceeds 3600 Hz.
Action:
- Insure that the motor is turning.
- Insure that parameter P04.06 Speed Measurement is set to the correct input.
- Check the tachometer wiring.
- Check the tachometer signal using a frequency counter or oscilloscope.
CA09
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 184 -
(P06.17)
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Event is detected in case the primary tachometer doesn't deliver pulses during normal operation.
(P06.13)
The parameter selects the error condition generated when the motor speed control
demand signal reaches its upper limit.
The parameter should be set to IG (Ignore).
Cause of event:
- Feed rate controller control magnitude has reached upper response threshold. After
some time, message HI-5 (Deviation) is additionally output.
1. Material flow missing or irregular.
2. External feed rate controller wrongly set.
Action:
- Check material discharge and control magnitude (service value Y). At nominal feed
rate, Y should be 10 to 14mA.
CO05
(P05.02)
The parameter is used to specify the type of error that is generated in the event of a
weighing system failure. This event is independent of volumetric mode.
This parameter should be set to IG (Ignore).
Cause of event:
- Indicates that the system is in volumetric mode due to failure in the weighing system.
Action to be taken:
- Check for load cell wiring errors or imbalanced load cell inputs.
(P06.08)
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 185 -
The parameter selects the error condition generated when the controller restarts after
a loss of power. If it is set to A, the feeder will not restart after power is lost during
normal remote mode operation.
This parameter should be set to IG (Ignore).
Cause of event:
- Power failure. Power supply failed or cut off. During power failure, no totalization
takes place. Scale does not start automatically, independent of event class.
WE08
(P06.15)
The parameter selects the error condition generated when the analog feedrate demand signal is more then 0.4 mA below the minimum value (P03.04 Setpoint Offset).
The parameter should be set to IG (Ignore).
Cause of event:
- The signal available across an analog input is smaller than the offset. A tolerance
space of 0.4 mA is built in for ensuring that events are not constantly set and deleted
with noisy input signals around the offset.
Action:
- Check analog input (Sig+ & Sig-) wiring.
WE15
(P15.05)
WE16
(P15.06)
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 186 -
(P03.11)
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
The parameter selects the method used to annunciate the error condition when the
Run Enable input is not active. Setting the parameter to IG does not disable the Run
Enable feature but it does prevent an error from being generated.
The parameter is normally set to W2 so that there is an indication on the display
when the feeder is disabled.
Cause of event:
- When a touch screen HMI is used, parameter P03.10 Source Run Enable must be
set to DI 8, which is connected to the stop switch mounted under the HMI. This
switch is used to stop the feeder in the event that the HMI is disabled or disconnected.
Action:
- Check the position of the Run Enable switch.
- Check the wiring to the Run Enable switch.
Note: The Run Enable switch is not normally used with the Stock 196NT display and
in this case P03.10 Source Run Enable must be set to n/a to allow motor operation.
IL10
Event: FCB-Error
(P26.22)
This event is identified if the function block link loaded does not correspond to the
link stored in the parameter.
Caution: It probably does not have the full functionality. Unreliable operating
states may arise.
Possible causes:
- it forgot to load the correct link after exchanging the VCU.
- the name in the parameter was changed manually.
Steps to be taken:
Load the function block link to the correct name given in P26.21 FCB Variant. No
further links can be loaded as long as this event is identified. If in this error state a
link with a different name should be loaded, the new name must first be entered into
P26.21.
(P12.10)
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 187 -
Cause of event:
- The value of the moisture input signal is greater than the maximum signal set by
P12.08 Moisture MAX.
MF13
Event: Temperature-MAX
(P09.14)
The event will be detected in case the actual temperature is above the threshold
(P09.13 Temperature MAX). The controller might fail to function.
Countermeasures:
- Check temperatur of environment
- Install cooler close to the controller
MF14
(P02.15)
The parameter selects the error condition generated when totalizer pulses for the
Total Coal Integrator (TCI) output are generated faster then the TCI output can operate. See parameter P02.14 Pulse Length Total for more information.
This parameter should be set to W2.
Action: Set P02.13 Totalizer Increment and/or P02.14 Pulse Length Total to a smaller value.
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 188 -
(P06.06)
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
The parameter selects the error condition generated when either of the load cell signals is greater than the maximum allowable value. If P05.01 Volum on LC failure is
set to YES, this condition will force the feeder into volumetric mode regardless of the
value selected here.
This parameter should be set to IG (Ignore).
Cause of event:
- Load cell load is higher than 110% of load cells rated capacities.
Full scale value:
125% with 2.85mV/V load cells
175% with 2mV/V load cells
Action:
- Check material infeed.
HI02
(P09.04)
The parameter determines the type of event that is generated when the feedrate
exceeds the value specified in P09.03 Limit: Actual Flow Rate MAX.
This parameter is normally set to IG (Ignore)
Cause of event:
- Flow rate exceeds set maximum value.
HI03
(P09.08)
The parameter determines the type of event that is generated when the feedrate
exceeds the value specified in P09.07 Limit: Load MAX.
The parameter is normally set to IG (Ignore)
Cause of event:
- Belt load exceeds set maximum value.
HI04
(P09.12)
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 189 -
The parameter determines the type of event that is generated when the feedrate
exceeds the value specified in P09.01 Limit: Actual Flow Rate MIN.
The parameter is normally set to IG (Ignore)
Cause of event:
- Belt speed exceeds set maximum value.
HI05
Event: Deviation
(P06.12)
The parameter specifies the event that is generated when the actual feedrate can
differ from the feedrate setpoint by an amount greater than P06.10 Threshold Deviation for a time greater than P06.09 Time Deviation.
The parameter is similar to the 196NT Feedrate Error and should be set to W 2.
Action:
- Check for loss or material on belt.
Event: Slip
(P07.08)
The parameter selects the error condition generated when the belt slip exceeds the
limit specified in parameter P07.07 Slip Value.
The parameter is normally set to IG.
WM03
(P07.16)
WM04
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 190 -
(P07.14)
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
WM05
Event: Slip 2
(P18.08)
The parameter specifies the type of event that is generated when belt slippage is
detected.
Cause of event:
- The difference between the belt speed calculated using sensor 1 (P18.02) and sensor 2 (P18.05) has exceeded the limit specified by P18.07 Slip Value 2.
WM06
(P13.06)
The parameter selects the error condition generated when the Chain Motion Monitor
(CMM) pulse delay is exceeded.
The parameter is normally set to A (Stop Feeder) if a CMM is installed and IG (Ignore) if not.
Cause of event:
- The Chain Motion Monitor (CMM) pulse delay (P13.05) has been exceeded.
WM07
(P15.11)
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 191 -
The parameter specifies the event that is generated when a discharge pluggage is
detected.
The parameter is normally set to A (Stop feeder). It can be set to IG (Ignore) to disable the discharge pluggage event.
Cause of event:
- The discharge pluggage switch (LSFD) detected a build up of coal at the feeder
discharge. This is a fail safe input. The event is generated when the LSFD signal is
lost.
Action:
- Insure that discharge is clear.
- Check LSFD wiring.
WM08
(P15.14)
The parameter specifies the event that is generated when a loss of material is detected (coal on belt switch is inactive).
The parameter is normally set to A (Stop feeder). It can be set to IG (Ignore) to disable the Loss of material event.
Cause of event:
- The coal on belt switch (LSFB) has indicated a loss of material on the belt while
running in Remote.
WM09
(P15.18)
The parameter specifies the type of event that is generated when the motor feedback
signal (P15.17) does not follow the motor start signal (P16.04 through P16.07).
The parameter should always be set to A (Stop Feeder)
Cause of event:
- The motor starter of VFD has failed to start the feeder when instructed to by the
controller.
WM10
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 192 -
(P07.03)
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
The parameter selects the error condition generated when the belt motion monitor
(BMM) pulse delay is exceeded.
The parameter is normally set to A (Stop Feeder) if a BMM is installed. Setting it to
IG (Ignore) will disable the BMM feature.
Cause of event:
- The Belt Motion Monitor (BMM) pulse delay (P07.02) has been exceeded.
WM11
(P15.21)
The parameter specifies the type of event that is generated when a loss of material
flow is detected.
The parameter should be set to A (Stop Feeder) when a coal flow monitor is installed
and IG (ignore) when one is not.
Cause of event:
- The (optional) coal flow monitor has indicated a loss of material in the downspout
above the feeder.
WM12
(P15.15)
The parameter specifies the event that is generated when the feeder attempts to run
in Local mode with material on the belt (coal on belt switch is active).
The parameter should always be set to A (Stop feeder).
Cause of event:
- Coal was detected by the coal on belt switch (LSFB) when the feeder was running
in local or calibrate mode.
(P06.05)
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 193 -
The parameter selects the error condition generated when either of the load cell signals is less than 3% of the full scale value. If P05.01 Volum on LC failure is set to
YES, this condition will force the feeder into volumetric mode regardless of the value
selected here.
The parameter should be set to IG (Ignore).
LO02
(P09.02)
The parameter determines the type of event that is generated when the feedrate is
less than the value specified in P09.01 Limit: Actual Flow Rate MIN.
The parameter is normally set to IG (Ignore)
LO03
(P09.06)
The parameter determines the type of event that is generated when the feedrate is
less than the value specified in P09.05 Limit: Load MIN. Set this value to W 2 to simulate the 196NT low density alarm.
The parameter is normally set to IG (Ignore)
Cause of event:
- Belt load smaller than set minimum value.
LO04
(P09.10)
The parameter determines the type of event that is generated when the feedrate is
less than the value specified in P09.09 Limit: Speed MIN.
The parameter is normally set to IG (Ignore)
Cause of event:
- Belt speed is smaller than set minimum value.
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 194 -
(P06.07)
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
The parameter selects the error condition generated when the feedrate demand signal is greater than the feedrate limit as determined by the operating mode. In gravimetric mode, the limit is the lesser of P02.05 Nominal Flow Rate or P03.05 Maximum
Feedrate. In volumetric mode, the limit is 3 times P02.05 Nominal Flow Rate.
The parameter should be set to IG (Ignore).
Depending on selected mode:
a) In gravimetric mode, setpoint is limited to nominal feed rate.
b) In volumetric mode, limitation starts from values exceeding 3 times the nominal
value.
c) Emergency setpoint is active.
SC02
Event: Stand-By
(P06.01)
The parameter selects the error condition generated when the belt drive motor is
stopped because the motor demand signal is less than the limit specified in P06.02
Stand-By Limit Value.
The parameter should be set to IG (Ignore).
Cause of event:
- Scale is in standby mode, i.e. setpoint is smaller than set standby limit (Parameter
P06.02 Stand-By Limit Value ). Material pre-feeder cuts off.
SC03
(P19.04)
The parameter specifies the type of event that is generated when the time interval
specified in P19.03 Maintenance Feeder Run has expired.
The parameter is normally set to IG to disable the maintenance event.
Cause of event:
- Total of scale run times exceeds "Scale ON-Time". After every time interval
elapsed, a message is output. This message simply informs you that service work is
required.
SC04
(P19.02)
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 195 -
The parameter specifies the type of event that is generated when the time interval
specified in P19.01 Maintenance Electric has expired.
This parameter is normally set to IG to disable the maintenance event.
SC05
(P15.03)
The parameter specifies the event that is generated when the input specified in
P15.04 DI: External Event 1 is active.
The function is not used and the parameter should be set to IG (Ignore).
Cause of event:
- External event 1 (see P15.04) is enabled, and external event 1 input (see P15.03 )
is active.
SC06
(P15.28)
The parameter specifies the event that is generated when the input specified in
P15.29 DI: External Event 2 is active.
The function is not used and the parameter should be set to IG (Ignore).
Cause of event:
- External event 2 (see P15.29) is enabled, and external event 2 input (see P15.28 )
is active.
SC11
(P15.30)
The parameter specifies the event that is generated when the input specified in
P15.31 DI: External Event 3 is active.
The function is not used and the parameter should be set to IG (Ignore).
Cause of event:
- External event 3 (see P15.31) is enabled, and external event 3 input (see P15.30 )
is active.
SC12
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 196 -
(P15.32)
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
The parameter specifies the event that is generated when the input specified in
P15.33 DI: External Event 4 is active.
The function is not used and the parameter should be set to IG (Ignore).
Cause of event:
- External event 4 (see P15.33) is enabled, and external event 4 input (see P15.32 )
is active.
Event: Memory
(P06.14)
The parameter selects the error condition generated when the controller detects an
error in the internal non-volatile memory. Reload the non-volatile memory by using
the "Load Default Parameters" function to correct this error. If the problem persists,
the controller must be replaced.
The parameter should be set to A (Stop feeder).
Note: The Load Default Parameters function will reset all of the controller's internal
parameters, including Calibration and Trim. After this operation is performed, all parameters must be reset, the feeder must be recalibrated and the analog I/O channels
must be re-trimmed.
SY07
(P01.01)
The parameter selects the error condition generated when communications between
the DT-9 and the touch screen HMI are lost for more then 10 seconds. The touch
screen HMI must be connected to the X96 Ethernet port. This connector is located
toward the center of the board, is marked in red and is keyed for a special cable.
The parameter should be set to W2 (Warning with automatic reset).
Actions:
- Check operation of touch screen display (see display section).
- Check cable connections.
- Is correct Ethernet connection used?
SY08
(P22.03)
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 197 -
Cyclical serial communication with the higher-order plant control system has been
interrupted for longer than the timeout-period in P22.02.
To rectify: check cable connections.
SY10
(P22.22)
SY12
(P01.02)
The parameter selects the error condition generated when communications between
the ARM9 main processor and the ARM7 auxiliary processor are lost.
The parameter must always be set to A (Stop feeder) because the controller can not
operate when communications are lost.
Action:
- Check cable connections between boards.
- Replace controller.
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 198 -
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Note: The default parameter must be set to n/a if the digital input is reallocated.
Input
Terminal
Number Block
Wire
Default
Number Parameter
Comments:
DI 1
X1-6
118
DI 2
X1-4
112
DI 3
X1-2
113
DI 4
X2-6
110
DI 5
X2-4
109
DI 6
X2-2
117
Keyboard lock
DI 7
X3-6
108
DI 8
X3-4
111
DI 9
X3-2
119
DI 10
X4-7
116
DI 11
X4-5
114
DI 12
X4-2
115
DI 13
X5-5
n/a
n/a
X5-6
DI 14
X5-3
X5-4
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 199 -
Input
Terminal
Number Block
Wire
Default
Number Parameter
DI 15
X5-1
145
X5-2
146
12.2
Comments:
Note: The default parameter must be set to n/a if the digital output is reallocated.
Each output is a single form C contact (NO, C, NC).
Output Terminal
Number Block
DO 1
Wire
Default
Number Parameter
Comments:
X10-3
DO 2
DO 3
DO 4
X11-3
X11-6
DO 5
DO 6
DO 7
DO 8
X14-3
n/a
Spare Contact
X14-6
DO 9
DO 10
X15-6
DO 11
X16-1
7, 8
X16-2
DO 12
X16-6
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 200 -
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Output Terminal
Number Block
Wire
Default
Number Parameter
Comments:
DO 13
X6-1
X6-2
12.3
I/O
Terminal
Number Block
Wire
Number
AI 1
X6-3
Default
Parameter
Comments:
X6-4
AO 1
X6-8
142-144
139-141
n/a
Not used
n/a
Not used
n/a
Not used
n/a
Not used
X6-9
AO 2
X6-7
X6-8
A 10
X12-1
X12-2
A 11
X12-3
X12-4
A 12
X12-5
X12-6
A 13
X12-7
X12-8
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 201 -
Trending Data
13 Trending Data
This item lists the most important data addresses available with the trending display.
Data
Address:
Data Value:
Unit Comments:
1872
Feedrate
lb/h
1874
Totalizer 1
lb
1876
Totalizer 2
lb
1878
Totalizer 3
lb
1880
Belt Load
lb/f
1884
Belt Speed
f/s
1894
Setpoint
lb/h
1904
Deviation
1906
Moisture
1908
Corrected Feedrate
lb/h
1910
Totalizer 1 corrected
lb
1912
Totalizer 2 corrected
lb
1914
Totalizer 3 corrected
lb
1920
Analog Output 1
mA
1938
Belt Slip
1942
Relative Feedrate
1944
1946
External Setpoint
lb/h
1950
Tachometer 1
Hz
1952
Utilization LC
1954
Loadcell VAP
mV/
V
1956
Loadcell BIC
mV/
V
1958
Loadcell
mv/
V
1960
Controller Magnitude
mA
1996
lb/f
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 203 -
Trending Data
Data
Address:
Data Value:
Unit Comments:
2008
Actual Tare
lb/f
2042
Relative Setpoint
2078
2082
2-Sensor Slip
2212
Analog Output 2
mA
2214
Analog Input 1
mA
2224
Loadcell 1
mV/
V
2226
Loadcell 2
mV/
V
2228
Utilization LC 2
2230
Gravimetric Total
lb
2232
Volumetric Total
lb
2234
Material Total
lb
2236
Rate
lb/h
2238
Analog Input 2
mA
2240
Analog Input 3
mA
2242
Analog Input 4
mA
2244
Analog Input 5
mA
2246
mA
2248
mA
2250
mA
2252
mA
2254
mA
2256
Analog Output 3
mA
2258
Analog Output 4
mA
2260
Analog Output 5
mA
2262
Analog Output 6
mA
2264
mA
2266
mA
2268
mA
2270
mA
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 204 -
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Trending Data
Data
Address:
Data Value:
Unit Comments:
2272
mA
2274
mA
2276
Speed
rpm
2278
Belt Speed
inch/
s
2280
lb/in
ch
2282
Actual Tare
lb/in
ch
2284
Belt Load
lb/in
ch
2286
Speed Setpoint
rpm
2288
FRI output
Hz
2290
Nominal Density
lb/ft
2292
Density
lb/ft
2294
lb
2296
lb
2298
lb
2300
lb/in
ch
2310
2312
Hz
2316
Belt Speed
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 205 -
Appendix
14 Appendix
14.1
The setpoint for use in the regulator (refer to Section CTRL) in the Remote operating mode is calculated according to the following scheme:
LIM Limit
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 207 -
Appendix
The controller magnitude is specified to the controller in the OFF/Maint operating mode by P02.16 in percent of
the range that is defined by P11.06 and P11.05.
14.2
Switch-on logic
FB Fieldbus
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 208
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Appendix
Belt operation is started in the OFF/Maint operating mode from the operator panel or EasyServe by pressing the
RUN <<, RUN >>, STOP, JOG << and JOG << buttons or with the set-up program. In addition, P15.26 and
P15.27 can be used to configure input signals for connecting buttons to have the belt run forwards and backwards.
The locking signal from the downstream process is ignored. ALARM switches the drive off. The R-FB report
(Feeder is Running) is not set.
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 209 -
Appendix
14.3
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 210
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Appendix
UBALI
P11.10
tp
--------4
P04.02 X P04.04
P04.01 X P04.03 X cos(P04.05)
P09.11
P10.03
HI04
L004
P1o.os-.
P08.06
P09.09
P10.10 ---- )
P08.05
ro +---()9.-+----1
P09.07
HI03
L003
P09.05
P12.xx
Q
P09.03
P08.02
HI02
L002
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 211 -
Appendix
P02.21 DC_Mode
f Tachometer 1
RAW1 Loadcell 1
RAW2 Loadcell 2
n Speed
P04.05 Angle
v Belt Speed
I Rate
P08.01 LC Filter
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 212 -
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Appendix
S1 Totalizer 1
S2 Totalizer 2
S3 Totalizer 3
TW Span (Cal2) set-up program
TC CW: Span Calibration set-up program (TC:
weight control)
TM Manual adjustment with bulk solids weighed
on an external scale
VAP Feeding with reference to the feeder's discharge point
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Appendix
14.4
P02.05 P02.05
I Rate
P11.01 P-Component KP
f Tachometer 1
P11.02 I-Component TN
xd Deviation
Y Controller Magnitude
Q Belt Load
v Belt Speed
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 214 -
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Appendix
LIM Limit
IDENT Identifying the system behavior to determine system parameters
VFD Drive feed rate controller (external)
vol-S Volumetric operating mode
grav Gravimetric operating mode
Speed
Qs Belt load measured in gravimetric operation in units of weight per length for use
in volumetric operation
Q0 Refer to explanation below
Normal Gravimetrically controlled normal operation
S-UP Volumetric operation over approximately
30 s after turning on the supply voltage
Stop Stopping the controller when the limit is
reached
The Q0 rated belt load in units of weight per length is calculated according to the following regulation:
If the load is measured (P04.07 and P04.08 unequal n/a):
Q0 = P02.05 / P02.06
If the load is not measured (P04.07 and P04.08 equal n/a):
Q0 = P03.15 / P04.10
General Diagram
The PI controller is of the model
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Appendix
The relationship between the controller parameters and the actuating variable is shown schematically in the following diagram.
Fig. 7: Effect of the controller parameters on the controller output with a discontinuous control deviation on t=0
Meaning
KP
P-portion of the feed rate controller related to the nominal feed rate as a % / %
or a dimensionless P-portion of the speed controller.
TN
Parameter value
Special case
KP = 0
TN = 0
KP=TN=0
Types of operation
Mode of operation
Specified condition
Characteristics
Gravimetric
P03.14 = Frate
Volumetric Synchronous
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 216 -
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Appendix
Mode of operation
Specified condition
Volumetric through
errors
Characteristics
P03.14 = Frate
Fixed speed
Speed controlled
P03.14 = Frate
Mode of operation
Specified condition
Characteristics
Standby
The upper limit of the controller magnitude can be reduced to prevent excess feeding of hazardous substances
at a low target feed rate.
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Appendix
.
MX
P%
Y-MAX
This figure shows an example of the correlation for three selected settings of the MX parameter.
14.5
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 218 -
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Appendix
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Appendix
The smallest measurable slip S_MIN is the larger of the values A and B:
A = 2 * 100 * vs /(P_U *S1C)
B = 2 * 100 * vs /(P_U *S2C)
Example
vs = 10000
P_U = 30000
S1C = S2C = 100
S_MIN = 0.667%
If P18.07 < S_MIN: S_MIN has an effect
Note
The impulses and pauses between impulses to S1 and S2 have to be at least 1.2 s long. If digital inputs are
used on the first VCU of a scale, the impulse and pause have to be at least 0.2 s long.
14.6
Prerequisite: A belt is used with an integrated mark (triangle). The parameters in the Belt Monitoring block
should be adjusted.
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 220 -
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Appendix
V Proximity sensor
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Appendix
The length (T) of the signal (-t1 or +t2) changes if the belt drifts to one side. Event: Belt Drift is first identified at
low drainage and Event: Belt Skew is identified at greater drainage depending upon the size of the triangle.
P07.12 can be used to finely adjust the position of the sensor in relation to the triangle according to the mechanical setting so that a Belt Drift service value is shown that is equal to zero if the belt is in the middle position.
Note
Monitoring needs two complete belt revolutions after starting feeding for synchronisation. Events are not identified during this period.
14.7
The following signals can be connected for monitoring the mechanism of the feeder and bulk solid flow.
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 222 -
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Appendix
Other monitoring signale can be activated for electrical and mechanical malfunctions with the Digital Inputs parameter block.
14.8
You can use the Moisture parameter group to activate a correction in the actual value used for regulating the feed
rate. The proportion of foreign matter (such as water) in the bulk solids fed is ascertained externally and
communicated to the weighing system. The system uses this as a basis for recalculating the weight ascertained
including foreign matter to the net value of the proportion relevant to the downstream step in the process by subtracting the quantity of foreign matter. The mass flow rate is gravimetrically controlled based upon the net value.
In other words, the quantity corresponding to the weight of the foreign matter is also fed. The integration of totalized amount of material of the gross or corrected net value can be selected as a signal source for the impulse
output.
14.9
DISOCONT Tersus has a frequency output (FRI, P02.17 DO: FRI Frequency) where the frequency is proportional to the current feed rate. The frequency output is already precisely adjusted by entering the ratio of output
frequency to the feed rate in P17.04. Sometimes it is necessary to adjust the receiving opposite point. This calls
for switching defined frequencies to the output.
They are set without bulk solids. Start off by setting P17.04. Then call up the Simulation Mode operating mode
with the operator panel or EasyServe (Simulation Mode [44]). It is advisable to store the current parameters.
The parameters for current error reports with the ALARM event class should now be changed so that they can
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Appendix
operate without an alarm. The P04.07 and P04.08 parameters should be set to n/a. P03.01 and P03.02 should
be set to OP.
Switch on the feeder. It runs at the target feed rate set on the operator panel or via EasyServe. Simulation simulates an actual feed rate that is equal to the target feed rate after running for a while. The setpoint is now set to
the lowest value (refer to P03.06). The first opposite point is adjusted. Now the maximum setpoint is set (P02.05
and P03.05). The second frequency parameter can be adjusted externally.
Then the parameters previously stored should be activated again.
In the example, a binary input signal, e.g. a DISOCONT Tersus input contact, is read in through the input block
'GP-Din 1' output to the AND gate 'And 1-4' through the delay 'Delay 1' and an inverter. The other inputs are
connected to the constant '1' and a frequency generator 'Cycle 1'. This provides the output with a cyclical signal
when the waiting period has elapsed after the input has been set. The output of the AND gate is connected to an
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 224 -
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Appendix
output of the DISOCONT Tersus standard control. The signal must be connected to a digital output via
P27.01 'FCB_DO 01' to enable physical output.
Note: The Schenck Process software DISOPLAN must be installed on the PC to allow working with function
blocks.
WARNING
Possible loss of functions after replacing the VCU.
Function blocks are not automatically stored with the parameters in
EasyServe. If a function block link is loaded it will be necessary to store it separately in EasyServe. If the VCU is replaced then both the parameters and the
function block links must be loaded separately in order to restore full functionality. Alternatively the additional tool DISOPLAN, that contains both the parameters and the function block links, can be used to make a complete backup.
However, this backup can then no longer be used with an updated version of
the scales program.
It is not necessary in a system with the 'Empty' link (see Cleaning the Screen and Information) to reload the link
after a VCU replacement as no functions are expanded using function blocks.
Loading the function software or loading factory settings or the locking set of the parameters does not have any
impact on the function blocks loaded. In other words, any link that is already loaded is maintained. Any loaded
link cannot be deleted; it can only be overwritten. If you want to make a link ineffective, it can be overwritten with
a new link that has to contain at least one block.
A loaded link does not have any effect on scale operation as long as the outputs for the link are not coupled to
the scale software with the corresponding P26.01 to P27.20 parameters.
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Appendix
No.
1
Type
Binary inputs
quantity
20
'GP-DIn'
2
Binary output
Parameters
Function
Process variable as per the descrip- Connection between the function block
tion of the fieldbus data interface
logic and the function of the standard
program
20
'GP-Dout'
Clock generator
Periodic time
Makes output signals available. Connect using the parameter in the 'FCB
digital outputs' block. All outputs are
available as status information in the
fieldbus interface.
Signal generator for a periodic signal
'Cycle'
Bin 0
Bin 1
Pulse generator
'Time'
6
AND
'And'
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 226 -
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Appendix
No.
Type
quantity
Parameters
Function
AND
10
'And 4'
7
OR
'Or'
OR
'Or 4'
Negation
'Not'
Delay
'Delay'
Tab. 9 : Blocks available for processing binary signals
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Appendix
No.
1
Type
Analog input
quantity Parameter
20
'GP-Ain'
Function
Analog output
20
Comparator
'Comparator'
'Limit'
10
Multiplicator
'Multiplicator'
6
Memory
'Memory'
Addition
'Add'
Subtraction
'Subtract'
Counter
Start value
20
Dividend
'Counter'
10
Switch
'Analog switch'
11
Multiplication
'Factor'
12
Constant
Divisor
5
10
Dividend
'Constant'
13
Offset
'Offset'
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 228 -
Divisor
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Appendix
Model
Relevant Standards
Ethernet
Ethernet/IP
http
Protocol layer for the VHM operating panel and for an alternative web browser
RS-485
MODBUS RTU
PROFIBUS-DP
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
EIA-485
(RS-485)
Appendix
Model
DeviceNet
Relevant Standards
Bluetooth
RS-232
Fig. 16: Alternative 'series connection' link between basic units and the on-site ethernet
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 230 -
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Appendix
Fig. 17: Alternative 'star connection' link between basic units and the on-site ethernet
The VCUs are connected to the switch by a category 5e network cable at the RJ45 socket on the VCU. The
maximum length of the cable is 100 m. Intermediary switches or routers or optic fiber converters can be used to
make longer connections.
The ethernet switch of the central unit only (= unit on which the scales software is installed) is available for external connection in systems in which several VCUs have been assigned to one scales. The ethernet ports of the
other VCU units (software VIO xxxxx) are not served.
14.11.1.1
Ethernet Addressing
14.11.1.1.1
MAC Addresses
The manufacturer of any device that can be connected to the ethernet assigns that device a MAC address unique
in the world and unalterable. It forms the basis of physical communication between two subscribers. Ad- dresses
in the IP protocol (IP address) were introduced to simplify the administration of small and of very large networks
(WWW). Routers and switches decode the IP address and transmit the message to the subscriber with the
corresponding MAC address. Subscribers in a subnetwork delimited by a router can be reached by means of a
broadcast command to all subscribers. This allows subscribers in subnetworks to be found.
14.11.1.1.2
IP Addressing
Every subscriber in a (sub)network must have a unique address that has been assigned once only. As opposed
to office networks, addresses in industrial control networks are assigned permanently as the subscribers in the
network seldom change.
The ethernet address setting consists of the components:
IP Address
Subnetwork Mask
Gateway Address
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Appendix
14.11.1.1.3
IP Address
Unique address of the subscriber in the subnetwork. The bits of the address labeled by the subnetwork mask
must be identical for all subnetwork subscribers. Subscriber addresses in the subnetwork must differ at those
parts in the address which have the value zero in the subnetwork mask.
14.11.1.1.4
Subnetwork Mask
This mask determines the addressable range of a subnetwork. All subscribers in a subnetwork must have addresses that coincide in those bits that have the value 1 in the subnetwork mask.
For example:
Subnetwork mask: 255.255.255.0
Corresponds in binary to: 11111111.11111111.11111111.00000000
In this example, all subscribers in the subnetwork must have addresses that coincide in the upper 24 bits. The
distinction is made in the lower 8 bits so that 255 subscriber addresses in this subnetwork can be addressed.
14.11.1.1.5
Gateway
Information addressed to subscribers with addresses outside of the range determined by the subnetwork mask
are reached through the gateway. As no subscribers outside of the subnetwork are addressed in self-contained
industrial control networks, the gateway address is usually left at the default setting 0.0.0.0.
14.11.1.1.6
The addresses of the subscribers in a network intended for process control tasks are generally permanent. Even
in the event that the equipment is not integrated into a network, we urgently advise giving adjacent equipment
different IP addresses in the same subnet. Otherwise, there might be problems in the PC network configuration if
the cable connection is jacked to the PC so that it will not be possible to establish communication (for instance,
via service tools such as EasyServe or DISOPLAN) until the PC has adapted its configuration to the modified
environment.
The keyboard is used to set the address in the DISOCONT Tersus VHM operating panel. Either a VHM operating panel or the PC-based service tool EasyServe is required in order to set the address of the central unit VCU.
Changing the address in a running system can cause complete loss of communication, also to other partners! To make sure, the address should only be set when the plant briefly allows an interruption in communication.
The address is set using the DISOCONT Tersus VHM operating panel as follows:
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 232 -
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Appendix
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
Connect the VHM
operating panel and
the central unit VCU
to the same network.
Continue with step 2.
The address of the central unit VCU is set with the PC-based service tool analogously to the method with the
operating panel VHM. It may be necessary to adapt the network configuration of the PC. This generally requires
administrator rights on the PC.
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Appendix
tioned may not be connected to each other in the DISOCONT Tersus. For this reason the VCU has three separate interfaces for the different communication tasks.
To avoid electrical reflections on the transmission cable, each of the cable ends - and these only - must be terminated with a resistance. The cabling of an RS-485 network should therefore be made in one link, though short
distribution feeders are permitted.
The total length of cable in a network is maximum 1000 m.
The bus termination resistances in the DISOCONT Tersus system are integrated into the VCU and VHM components and can be connected using a jumper if required.
The two data wires in the cable used are a twisted pair cable and are individually screened. Further lines, e.g. to
supply a peripheral instrument, can also be included in the cable.
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 234 -
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Appendix
Screen clamp
There are several slits beneath each cable lead-through. The cable clamps will press the cable screen against
the shielding plate if they are inserted into these slits. This will correctly earth the screening. M-shaped slits can
also be used as pull relief for cable binders.
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Appendix
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 236 -
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Appendix
The test connector is plugged into the load cell cable input on the DISOCONT Tersus.
Once plugged in, the raw measured value can be read off at the service values of the measuring electronics. It
must be: raw measured value 1.5 mV/V 3%.
Note: If other resistance values are used in the test connector, the raw measuring value can be calculated using
this formula: raw measuring value ~ 500 * R2 / R1 [mV/V].
The measuring amplifier is working properly if the raw measuring value lies within this range.
The measured load display in kg depends on the setting of the scales' characteristic data. A weight value of approximately 75 kg is shown if the parameter factory settings are used.
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Appendix
Fig. 24: Dimensions and position of the plugs VCU 20103 with mounting kit
I
4 x 6.8
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 238 -
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Appendix
-25 C ... 50 C
-40 C ... 85 C
Humidity
Protection class
Weight
2.3 kg
Approbation
DISOCONT Tersus has a shock-mounted real-time clock. If system is powered off, the clock continues running
for approximately one week provided that the system has been operating for at least 30 hours. The clock buffer
is maintenance-free.
DANGER
Life-threatening voltages
The device must be installed in a housing that obstructs access to live components if the electronics are powered by dangerously high voltages (U > 40 V) or
if there are dangerous voltages at the outputs. A tool must be required to open
this housing. Alternatively, the device can be installed in a room accessible only
to specialist personnel. If not installed in the housing, the live connections have
protection class IP20 only. Therefore, great care should be taken if the housing
is open. The supply voltage should be switched off before the housing is
opened.
AC Voltage Infeed
Rated voltage
115 VAC
230 VAC
0.8 A
0.55 A
15 ms
80 ms
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Appendix
16 A
36 A
Frequency range
47 63 Hz
85 265 VAC
3 kV
Terminal clamp
2.5 mm
24 VDC 10 %
Output current
0.3 A in total
2.5 mm
Overload protection
Connection
Weighing channels:
VME0120 at connector strip X51.3 W eighing channel LC1 with connection X91
VME0120 at connector strip X51.4 W eighing channel LC2 with connection X92
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 240 -
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Appendix
Number of inputs
Max. 2
Type
12 V
210 mA
corresponds to max. 6 load cells with 350 internal resistance
100 ms
Temperature drift
< 10 ppm / C
1.5 mm
Connection
6-conductor system; in the case of load cells with 4 conductors, the terminals Ref and U will require bridging in the interconnecting box.
Channel designation
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Appendix
The colors of the load cell cable conductor vary depending on the load cell model and manufacturer. The following table can be used as a reference. More details can be found on the load cell data sheet.
DISOCONT
Schenck
RT
2.8 mV/V
Schenck
PWS
2 mV/V
VBB
and
HBM Z6
2 mV/V
Schenck
SF4 / SB4
2 mV/V
Tedea
1250
STOCK SBeam
OUT 1
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
REF 1
Black
Blue
Grey
Black
Brown
IN 1
Red
Red
Red
Red
White
Green
28
IN 2
White
White
White
White
Red
White
27
REF 2
Blue
Orange
Green
Green
Blue
Black
81.1
OUT 2
Blue
Green
Blue
Green
Green
Red
Terminal
box
DKK
82
82.1
81
The load cell cable screen should have a large surface area, e.g. it should be attached with a clamp to the VCU
fitting panel (see chapter 'Basic Information on EMC-Compatible W iring'). The entire stretch of cable between
contact point of the screen to the VME0120 plug should be screened. The screen is removed just before the
plug.
Suitable terminal boxes are available for connecting together several load cells of one weighing point. The cable
should be laid separately from working cables. The wire pairs IN, REF and OUT are twisted in the cable and
must be screened pairwise. The cable itself will also require screening as a whole.
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 242 -
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Appendix
Digital inputs
The VCU 20103 has inputs for external switching contacts and inputs for directly connecting proximity sensors.
The logical denotation of the inputs is determined by parameters using the software. LEDs behind the plug indicate the state of the inputs.
14.14.6.1.1
12
Input voltage
18 ... 36 VDC
Internal resistance
> 3.5 k
Supply voltage
Potential separation
2.5 mm
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
X1:5
X1:6
Signal
X1:3
X1:4
Signal
X1:1
X1:2
Signal
X2:5
X2:6
Signal
X2:3
X2:4
Signal
X2:1
X2:2
Signal
X3:5
X3:6
Signal
X3:3
X3:4
Signal
X3:1
X3:2
Signal
DI1
DI2
DI3
DI4
DI5
DI6
DI7
DI8
DI9
Appendix
X4:6
X4:7
Signal
X4:4
X4:5
Signal
X4:1
X4:2
Signal
X4:3
Common
DI10
DI11
DI12
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 244 -
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Appendix
Take note of the technical data of the sensor when connecting it. The current limiting diode (CLD) must be dimensioned so that the voltage between Sig and Common is less than 2 V when the sensor is not switched on.
On the other hand, the current through the sensor should not exceed 50 mA. When switched on, the voltage
should be at least 18 V.
14.14.6.1.2
Frequency range if used as impulse input for measuring 0.03 Hz ... 3 kHz
speed
Monitoring
2.5 V
Supply voltage
Cable
Use screened cables to connect a sensor. Screen attached to the VCU 20100.
2.5 mm
Connections
X5:5
X5:6
0V
X5:3
X5:4
0V
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
DI13
DI14
Appendix
Fig. 30: Digital input: connecting a sensor or a contact at the sensor input
Fig. 31: Digital input: connecting an external signal voltage at the sensor input
14.14.6.1.3
The sensor for markers on the belt are connected to sockets CAL-1 and CAL-2 during adjustment.
Socket
0V
24 VDC
Signal input
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 246 -
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Appendix
14.14.6.1.4
15 V
Internal resistance
20 k
3 kHz
2.5 mm
14.14.6.2
Digital Outputs
14.14.6.2.1
Relay Outputs
The unit has 11 equal relay outputs and one relay output with special functions. The logical denotation of the
outputs is determined by parameters using the software. LEDs beside plug X10 show the state of the outputs.
DANGER
Life-threatening voltages
The device must be installed in a housing that obstructs access to live components if the electronics are powered by dangerously high voltages (U > 40 V) or
if there are dangerous voltages at the outputs. A tool must be required to open
this housing. Alternatively, the device can be installed in a room accessible only
to specialist personnel. If not installed in the housing, the live connections have
protection class IP20 only. Therefore, great care should be taken if the housing
is open. The supply voltage should be switched off before the housing is
opened.
Number of outputs
12
Description
Connections
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Logic output
Plug
Pin NO
contact
Pin root
contact
Pin NC
contact
Contact
type
DO1
X10:
Form C:
DO2
X10:
Changeover
contact
DO3
X11:
Appendix
DO4
X11:
DO5
X13:
DO6
X13:
DO7
X14:
DO8
X14:
DO9
X15:
DO10
X15:
DO11
X16:
Form A:
DO12
X16:
Closing
contact
X16
2.5 mm
Contact rating
DO12: 24 VDC
Service life
Note: DO12 is implemented twice and intended for the control of external electromechanical counters. Alternatively, the electronic output [249] DO13 can be used to control an external counter. The power for DO12 must
be taken from the integrated power supply of the VCU 20103. The figure shows the proper connections for
X16: 5 and 6. X16: 3 and 4 have to be connected in a similar manner.
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 248 -
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Appendix
14.14.6.2.2
Electronic Output
An electronic output is available for signals that switch often. This connection is usually used if an electronic
counter or the counter input of a controller programmable from memory for the integration of the required quantity of bulk material is to be attached.
Number of outputs
Type
Open collector
Description
DO13
Connections
X6: 1-2
2.5 mm
Contact rating
30 VDC
Max. voltage
Isolation against control low voltage
63 VDC
50 mA
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Appendix
14.14.7.1
Number of inputs
Connections
0V
X6: 5
0 20 mA
Ri = 100
X6: 3
0 10 V
Ri = 27 k
X6: 4
Resolution
16 Bit
2.5 mm
230 VAC
14.14.7.2
Current output
0(4) 20 mA; max. 11 V
Galvanic isolation
Resolution
14 Bit
2.5 mm
Connections
A01
A02
14.14.7.3
X6:8
+U
X6:9
0V
X6:6
+U
X6:7
0V
It can be backfitted with up to four further output channels (inputs or outputs) in sockets A10 - A13 beneath the
cover. Once the supply voltage has been shut off, the cover must be removed before they can be installed. The
optional assemblies are installed on the lower circuit board and locked in place with the plastic retainer. The
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 250 -
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Appendix
additional equipment is identified by attaching the stickers supplied to the cover at the corresponding intended
socket position.
The analog channel connections are always available at plug X12, but have no function if the optional cards are
not installed. The software must be informed that the optional cards have been installed using the parameter
2
settings in block 1. Maximum cross-section of the connecting wire: 2.5 mm .
Channel
Signal
A10
0V
Signal
0V
Signal
0V
Signal
0V
Signal
A11
A12
A13
Tab. 14 : Connections
14.14.7.3.1
Component type
Circuit board
VAI0120
Input range
0(4) 20 mA
Ri = 100
0 10 V
Ri = 35 k
Resolution
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
16 Bit
Appendix
Galvanic isolation
14.14.7.3.2
Component type
Current output
VAO 20100
Voltage output
VAO 20103
Circuit board
VAO0120
VAO0123
Range
0(4) 20 mA
0 10 V
max. 11 V
max. 50 mA
Galvanic isolation
Resolution
14 Bit
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 252 -
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Appendix
The VHM has a touchscreen for displaying and entering inputs. This allows work to be carried out in harsh and
dirty industrial environments. A lot of VHMs are only used for service jobs since the operation of a feeder often
does not require an operator panel because it is controlled by the plant's process control system. This is why
there is also a portable version available for mobile applications.
Contrast 600:1
Input
Humidity
Protection class
Weight
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
1 kg
Appendix
Approbation
24 VDC; 0.15 A
Power consumption:
3.5 W
19 ... 32 VDC
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 254 -
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Appendix
This 5 V supply can also be drawn from connection VHM:X2 (type A USB socket).
14.15.3.1
Ethernet
We recommend that you connect device using the ethernet connection for distances of less than 100 m.
The connection is made at socket X3 with a standard patch cable.
NOTE: Pins 4+5 and 7+8 can power the device as well as supply it with data signals. A special coded cable is
required for a direct connection to the VCU. Refer to the chapter 'Power Supply' for details.
14.15.3.2
Serial Interfaces:
A serial interface is used to make connections over longer distances (> 100 m).
The device has two serial interfaces, though in DISOCONT Tersus systems only the RS-485 interface is supported.
NOTE: The device can be powered using the unassigned wires in the data cable from the VCU.
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Appendix
This equipment is intended for being installed in the front of a control cubicle or in operating panel. This equipment has a seal. They are pushed from the front into the opening and compactly pressed with the retention
frame from behind to the sheet of the cutout. The contact surface has to be plane. The screws of the retention
frame should be tightened with a torque of 3 Nm so that the entire front frame is lying on the sheet of the cutout.
This ensures protection class IP 65 from the start. Excessive torques can cause damage to the frame.
The back of the equipment has protection class IP 20. The housing has to ensure the protection against foreign
matter and water that may be needed in the application with the built-in units that the equipment is built into.
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 256 -
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Appendix
14.15.4.1.1
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Appendix
+1.1
+1.1
mm x 138
mm
14.15.4.1.2
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 258 -
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Appendix
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Appendix
The power supply unit mounted on the rear increases the installation depth compared to the VHM 20100 by 70
mm. All other technical details and dimensions of the VHM 20101 are identical with those of the VHM 20100.
Integrated power supply:
Input 85 ... 264 VAC (nominal value: 110 ... 230 VAC)
Output: 24 VDC wired to the operating panel electronics
14.15.4.2
Portable Devices
14.15.4.2.1
Model
VHM 20110
Protection class
IP65
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 260 -
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Appendix
Power Supply
Communication connections
Ethernet
V079339.B02
Functions
Model
Ethernet cable incl. power supply for connection to the VCU as protection class IP 20
VSC 20100
Ethernet cable incl. power supply for connection to the VCU as protection class IP 65
Carrying strap
Holding frame for mounting locally the VHM 20110 at the scales
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Appendix
14.15.4.2.2
The holding frame for VHM 20100 is replaced on this device by a low cover plate that provides space for the
battery power supply. The device has protection class IP if all charging inputs are sealed 65.
The device is equipped with bluetooth adapter, batteries and a battery charger. To charge the batteries, open the
cover in a clean environment and plug in the loading cable. The device can also be run with the loading cable
plugged in permanently but will then have protection class IP 20 only. The on-off switch is located beside the
screw connection for the charging unit.
The device can be powered for at least 3 hours if using new, fully-loaded batteries.
Model
VHM 201xx
Protection class
IP65
Power Supply
Charger connection
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 262 -
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Appendix
Communication
Carrying strap
Spare battery pack (device must be opened for replacement)
14.15.5.1
The shortest display buildup time and change times are achieved with an Ethernet connection. The connection
can be permanent for normal operation or can be plugged as required for service access.
The connection is an RJ45 plug X3 on the operating panel. This plug can also supply power to the VHM via the
data cable (not Power over Ethernet).
The following example connections can be combined, though for each a data connection and the power supply
must be guaranteed.
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Appendix
The cables between the VCU and VHM have to maintain the Cat5e specification. It can either be connected with
a prefabricated cable with a coded jack for the Ethernet X96 socket of the VCU or with cut goods and a cased
coded jack for field mounting.
Fig. 45: Example connection network with alternatives for the power supply
14.15.5.2
An RS-485 cable connection is selected if the distance between the operating panel and the VCU is greater than
100 m and there is no network available. No more than one operating panel can be operated at the same data
bus.
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 264 -
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Appendix
Fig. 46: Example connection for long distance between operating panel and VCU
Fig. 47: Example connection operating panel with power supply from VCU
The communication cable must be terminated physically at both ends by a activatable bus termination. An incorrect or no bus termination can lead to interruptions in the data transfer.
VCU: W410
Position 1-2
Position 1-2
Position 2-3
Position 2-3
14.15.5.3
Caution: external influences can disturb the bluetooth connection. Safety considerations mean that the wireless
connection may not be used for normal operation. For this reason bluetooth access is intended for service work
only.
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Appendix
Use the operating panel VHM 201xx with built-in bluetooth adapter to establish a bluetooth connection. Plug the
VCU bluetooth adapter into the USB socket. In demanding circumstances the bluetooth adapter can be connected by cable and installed in a separate housing at a location more favorable for transmission. The cable length
may not exceed 10 m.
Bluetooth constructs a separate wireless TCP/IP network in a separate IP address range. The connection is
established in stages. The connection is selected by choosing the bluetooth communication partner. The subordinate communication layers are then connected automatically.
The range of the bluetooth transmission depends heavily on the physical ambient conditions. Ranges of around
30 m are typical if the partners are within sight of each other (with no glass barrier between them).
EasyServe can also communicate with a VCU via W LAN. This requires installing an external wireless W LAN
access point.
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 266 -
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Appendix
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Appendix
Type
Material no.
VSC20173
V079339.B01
V079339.B02
V079339.B03
VSC28000
V120820.B01
VSC28001
V120821.B01
0.13
VSC28003
V120823.B01
VSC28004
V120824.B01
0.2
VSC28005
V120825.B01
V048409.B02
Grey
V130402.B01
30
Red
V130402.B01
30
Yellow
V130402.B01
30
Grey
V061894.B01
Cut-to-size area
Grey
Length [m]
Color
Red
Green
V083761.B01
V083761.B02
V097862.B01
M12 plug
M12 plug, 8-pole
V087748.B01
0.1
Black
VSC20171
V090181.B01
2.5
Yellow
VSC20172
V090274.B01
Red
V087559.B01
Prefabricated assemblies are available for making it easier to connect VCU and VHM via RS485.
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 268 -
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Appendix
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Appendix
Configure the WLAN access point with the service program supplied with the equipment. Encoding should be
activated. The local regulations for WLAN networks should be complied with. The IP address of the adapter has to
be in the IP subnet of the VCU.
Mechanically install the WLAN access point and connect the power supply
Establish an Ethernet connection between the WLAN access point and network with standard cables.
The WLAN adapter installed in the opposite mobile point provides a wireless network. The IP address should be
set for this network. It has to be in the same IP subnet as that of the VCUs and it has to be unambiguous in the
subnet.
The connection to the WLAN access point should be established in the mobile equipment.
The VCU of EasyServe or a browser is now accessed with the well-known methods.
ALL0258
Protection class
IP 54
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 270 -
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Appendix
Power Supply
24VDC
Plug-in power supply unit and PoE.Injector in the scope of
supply
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Appendix
Screen clamp
There are several slits beneath each cable lead-through. The cable clamps will press the cable screen against
the shielding plate if they are inserted into these slits. This will correctly earth the screening. M-shaped slits can
also be used as pull relief for cable binders.
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 272 -
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Appendix
If the contact point of the signal wires is far from the contact point of the screen, the screen should be left all the
way up to the connecting point of the cable. Then the outer sheathing need only be removed from the cable at
the contact point of the screen. The screen can then be fit as described above.
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Appendix
schenck proct'ss
EG-Konformitatserklarung
Declaration of conformity
-s-
rE
;::-;-N;-6;;:1;-0101
-:-;---l-,200;;-1;--l-i;;;;;,;:.,;r';""OFi,i,oii ;; ;;s'rfi
N"OROEfliJ)o.QE;I\
SAF{TY RtCU.'Rl(1flSf:O.'? F.I.ECTRlCAt ED!JIPMFNTFDR MEASliRPMF!.'>n, 00.\fTRO/. AN ))(..1.BORATORV US. GENER/IL
REOu!foEr,f'NT'/i
EN 61140
2002
$Q-1Uf:Z: <3-EC-:iN ELE'I.TRISCUEN SCt""Lo\C. CE''e-NSAVE AW'ORDe UNOEN ru:n A'iLACii UN O 6HHU$Ml fEl.
AA'JTCTKmJ..GIJNT
.. ELECTRiCSHOCK CO.W J{)fVJ..SPf=CTSF<JI? IU$flll l.ATI0N AD E<JUt;;t.U:NT
EN 61000-6-2
2005
EN 61000-6-4
2007
EN 60079-0
2009
EN 60079-31
2009
DUSTRlESERE
IC E
Et.EC TF.C\'o(A$1\'ItTIC CO.\lFAnOttiTY(fMCJ, GfNF.RIC STANDARDSE_t.(fSStQNSTANDARDFOR I!\'IJUS7R!M... ENtR.CNLENTS
(ppa. Groll)
(leiter Ent\hi(:klung/ Head nevelopmenU
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 274 -
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Index
Index
.PAR Files ................................................................................................................................................................................ 50
2-Sensor Slip.......................................................................................................................................................................... 151
2-Sensor Slip active ............................................................................................................................................................... 151
2-sensor slip monitoring ......................................................................................................................................................... 216
About This Manual ..................................................................................................................................................................... 1
Access Rights Limitation FB................................................................................................................................................... 161
Access to Feeder Commands and Parameters........................................................................................................................ 49
Adaptation 1 ........................................................................................................................................................................... 122
Adaptation 2 ........................................................................................................................................................................... 122
Address .......................................................................................................................................................................... 159, 160
Afterflow Measurement Time ................................................................................................................................................... 97
AI Moisture Measurement ..................................................................................................................................................... 123
Analog calibration................................................................................................................................................................... 147
Analog Channel A10 ................................................................................................................................................................ 79
Analog Channel A11 ................................................................................................................................................................ 80
Analog Channel A12 ................................................................................................................................................................ 80
Analog Channel A13 ................................................................................................................................................................ 80
Analog Connections ............................................................................................................................................................... 248
Analog I/O Points ..................................................................................................................................................................... 25
Analog Input 1 Max ................................................................................................................................................................ 147
Analog Input 1 Min ................................................................................................................................................................. 147
Analog Input 2 Max ................................................................................................................................................................ 147
Analog Input 2 Min ................................................................................................................................................................. 147
Analog Input 3 Max ................................................................................................................................................................ 147
Analog Input 3 Min ................................................................................................................................................................. 147
Analog Input 4 Max ................................................................................................................................................................ 148
Analog Input 4 Min ................................................................................................................................................................. 148
Analog Input 5 Max ................................................................................................................................................................ 148
Analog Input 5 Min ................................................................................................................................................................. 148
Analog Input VAI 20100 ......................................................................................................................................................... 249
Analog Output 1 Max ............................................................................................................................................................. 148
Analog Output 1 Min .............................................................................................................................................................. 148
Analog Output 1 Test Value ................................................................................................................................................... 150
Analog Output 2 Max ............................................................................................................................................................. 149
Analog Output 2 Min .............................................................................................................................................................. 148
Analog Output 2 Test Value ................................................................................................................................................... 150
Analog Output 3 Max ............................................................................................................................................................. 149
Analog Output 3 Min .............................................................................................................................................................. 149
Analog Output 3 Test Value ................................................................................................................................................... 150
Analog Output 4 Max ............................................................................................................................................................. 149
Analog Output 4 Min .............................................................................................................................................................. 149
Analog Output 4 Test Value ................................................................................................................................................... 150
Analog Output 5 Max ............................................................................................................................................................. 149
Analog Output 5 Min .............................................................................................................................................................. 149
Analog Output 5 Test Value ................................................................................................................................................... 151
Analog Output 6 Max ............................................................................................................................................................. 150
Analog Output 6 Min .............................................................................................................................................................. 150
Analog Output 6 Test Value ................................................................................................................................................... 151
Analog Outputs ...................................................................................................................................................................... 127
Analog Outputs VAO 20100 / 20103 ...................................................................................................................................... 250
Analog Trim Function ............................................................................................................................................................... 25
Angle ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 95
AO Actual Flow Rate ............................................................................................................................................................. 127
AO Actual Flow Rate (2nd).................................................................................................................................................... 130
AO Belt Load ......................................................................................................................................................................... 128
AO Density ............................................................................................................................................................................ 130
AO Deviation ......................................................................................................................................................................... 129
AO Flow Rate corrected ........................................................................................................................................................ 124
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Index
AO Flow Rate Offset ............................................................................................................................................................. 125
AO Flow Rate Range ............................................................................................................................................................ 125
AO Motor Speed Control ....................................................................................................................................................... 118
AO PLC 1 .............................................................................................................................................................................. 164
AO PLC 2 .............................................................................................................................................................................. 165
AO Setpoint........................................................................................................................................................................... 127
AO Speed.............................................................................................................................................................................. 129
Appendix ................................................................................................................................................................................ 205
Auxiliary Voltage for External Subscribers ............................................................................................................................. 238
Basic (CAL 1) ........................................................................................................................................................................... 20
Basic Tare .............................................................................................................................................................................. 117
Basics of EMC-Compliant Cabling ................................................................................................................................. 233, 269
Baud rate........................................................................................................................................................................ 159, 160
Baud Rate .............................................................................................................................................................................. 156
Belt Circuit No. ....................................................................................................................................................................... 117
Belt Circuit Time ..................................................................................................................................................................... 116
Belt Drift ................................................................................................................................................................................. 108
Belt drift and slip identification via mark in the belt ................................................................................................................. 218
Belt Drift Monitoring.................................................................................................................................................................. 26
Belt Influence Compensation (BIC) .......................................................................................................................................... 28
Belt Load .................................................................................................................................................................................... 8
Belt Load Offset ..................................................................................................................................................................... 128
Belt Load Range .................................................................................................................................................................... 128
Belt Load, Nominal ................................................................................................................................................................... 25
Belt Monitoring ......................................................................................................................................................................... 26
Belt Monitoring ....................................................................................................................................................................... 105
Belt Motion Monitor Delay ...................................................................................................................................................... 106
Belt Paddle Feedback Permissive.......................................................................................................................................... 135
Belt Skew ............................................................................................................................................................................... 109
Belt slip identification.............................................................................................................................................................. 216
Belt Slippage Monitoring .......................................................................................................................................................... 28
Belt Slippage with Belt Marking ................................................................................................................................................ 28
Belt Speed.................................................................................................................................................................................. 9
BIC Active .............................................................................................................................................................................. 107
Built-In Console Panel Units................................................................................................................................................... 254
Bypass ................................................................................................................................................................................... 121
Byte Sequence....................................................................................................................................................................... 158
CA01 Event Error LC Input................................................................................................................................................... 182
CA02 Event Tachometer Input ............................................................................................................................................. 182
CA09 Event Primary Tacho Failure ...................................................................................................................................... 182
Calculating the setpoint .......................................................................................................................................................... 205
Calibrating the Feeder.............................................................................................................................................................. 42
Calibration ........................................................................................................................................................................ 52, 182
Calibration ................................................................................................................................................................................ 18
Calibration Data ..................................................................................................................................................................... 115
Calibration probe location................................................................................................................................................... 20, 21
Calibration Probe Span .......................................................................................................................................................... 115
Calibration Weight .................................................................................................................................................................. 117
Calibration Weight Test ............................................................................................................................................................ 55
CC_FC speed controller ......................................................................................................................................................... 120
Chain Motion Delay ................................................................................................................................................................ 126
Chain Test................................................................................................................................................................................ 55
Characteristic Value Sensor 1 ................................................................................................................................................ 152
Characteristic Value Sensor 2 ................................................................................................................................................ 152
Checking the Weight Measurement Instrumentation.............................................................................................................. 234
Cleanout control ..................................................................................................................................................................... 125
CleanOut OFF Time ............................................................................................................................................................... 126
CleanOut ON Time................................................................................................................................................................. 126
CO01 Event Controller Limited............................................................................................................................................. 183
CO05 Event Volum. caused by LC-error .............................................................................................................................. 183
Codepage................................................................................................................................................................................. 87
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 276 -
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Index
Commonly Changed Parameters ............................................................................................................................................. 15
Communication EasyServe .................................................................................................................................................... 156
Communication Fieldbus........................................................................................................................................................ 157
Configuration .................................................................................................................................................................. 158, 162
Configuration HMI Values ...................................................................................................................................................... 178
Connecting a PC with EasyServe to a Scales Controller (VCU) .............................................................................................. 33
Connecting and Commissioning the Operating Panel ............................................................................................................ 261
Connecting EasyServe........................................................................................................................................................... 264
Connecting the Sensors for Calibration Markers .................................................................................................................... 244
Connecting the Speed Sensor ............................................................................................................................................... 245
Connecting the VHM Operating Panel via Ethernet ............................................................................................................... 261
Connecting to Feeder............................................................................................................................................................... 48
Connection between a VHM Operating Panel and a Scales Controller (VCU)......................................................................... 31
Connection between a Web Browser and a VCU Scales Controller ........................................................................................ 34
Connection via Bluetooth ........................................................................................................................................... 32, 34, 263
Connection via Ethernet ........................................................................................................................................................... 33
Connection via Ethernet Cable................................................................................................................................................. 32
Connection via RS-232 ............................................................................................................................................................ 33
Connection via RS485.............................................................................................................................................................. 32
Connection via RS-485 .......................................................................................................................................................... 262
Connection via WLAN .............................................................................................................................................................. 34
Control Offset speed controller............................................................................................................................................... 120
Control Sources ....................................................................................................................................................................... 88
Controller................................................................................................................................................................................ 183
Controller Magnitude Offset ................................................................................................................................................... 119
Counter 1 Unit .......................................................................................................................................................................... 83
Counter 2 Unit .......................................................................................................................................................................... 84
Counter 3 Unit .......................................................................................................................................................................... 84
Daily Total Time ..................................................................................................................................................................... 154
Damaged / Defective Electrical Components ............................................................................................................................. 6
Data Format ........................................................................................................................................................................... 160
Data Interfaces ....................................................................................................................................................................... 253
Data Log Value 1 ................................................................................................................................................................... 154
Data Log Value 10 ................................................................................................................................................................. 156
Data Log Value 2 ................................................................................................................................................................... 155
Data Log Value 3 ................................................................................................................................................................... 155
Data Log Value 4 ................................................................................................................................................................... 155
Data Log Value 5 ................................................................................................................................................................... 155
Data Log Value 6 ................................................................................................................................................................... 155
Data Log Value 7 ................................................................................................................................................................... 155
Data Log Value 8 ................................................................................................................................................................... 156
Data Log Value 9 ................................................................................................................................................................... 156
Data Log Values....................................................................................................................................................................... 40
Data Logging .......................................................................................................................................................................... 154
DC_Mode ................................................................................................................................................................................. 87
Default Analog I/O .................................................................................................................................................................. 199
Default Digital Inputs .............................................................................................................................................................. 197
Default Digital Outputs ........................................................................................................................................................... 198
Default I/O Points ................................................................................................................................................................... 197
Definitions .................................................................................................................................................................................. 8
Density Offset......................................................................................................................................................................... 130
Density Range........................................................................................................................................................................ 130
Density Setpoint ....................................................................................................................................................................... 94
Deviation Offset...................................................................................................................................................................... 129
Deviation Range..................................................................................................................................................................... 129
DI Acknowledge Events ........................................................................................................................................................ 131
DI Belt Motion Monitor........................................................................................................................................................... 105
DI BIC freeze......................................................................................................................................................................... 107
DI Chain Motion Monitor........................................................................................................................................................ 126
DI Coal Flow Monitor............................................................................................................................................................. 136
DI Coal on belt switch............................................................................................................................................................ 134
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Index
DI Discharge Pluggage ......................................................................................................................................................... 133
DI External Event 1 ............................................................................................................................................................... 132
DI External Event 2 ............................................................................................................................................................... 138
DI External Event 3 ............................................................................................................................................................... 139
DI External Event 4 ............................................................................................................................................................... 140
DI Jog backward ................................................................................................................................................................... 138
DI Jog forward ....................................................................................................................................................................... 138
DI Local Mode ....................................................................................................................................................................... 131
DI Local Start ........................................................................................................................................................................ 137
DI Lower Setpoint.................................................................................................................................................................... 90
DI Mode Switch Lock............................................................................................................................................................. 140
DI Motor feedback ................................................................................................................................................................. 135
DI OFF/Maint CTRL .............................................................................................................................................................. 137
DI Raise Setpoint .................................................................................................................................................................... 90
DI Remote CTRL................................................................................................................................................................... 137
DI Reset Totalizer 1 .............................................................................................................................................................. 132
DI Reset Totalizer 2 .............................................................................................................................................................. 132
DI Sensor 1 ........................................................................................................................................................................... 151
DI Sensor 2 ........................................................................................................................................................................... 152
DI Source Belt Sensor........................................................................................................................................................... 106
DI Volumetric Mode............................................................................................................................................................... 140
Digital Connections ................................................................................................................................................................ 241
Digital inputs........................................................................................................................................................................... 241
Digital Inputs .......................................................................................................................................................................... 131
Digital Inputs 24 VDC for General Use................................................................................................................................... 241
Digital Inputs as per EN 60947-5-6 for Connecting Sensors .................................................................................................. 243
Digital Outputs........................................................................................................................................................................ 245
Digital Outputs........................................................................................................................................................................ 140
Dimensions and Position of the Plugs .................................................................................................................................... 236
Discharge Pluggage Delay..................................................................................................................................................... 133
Display Formats ....................................................................................................................................................................... 82
Display Functions ..................................................................................................................................................................... 38
DO Actual Flow Rate MAX .................................................................................................................................................... 143
DO Actual Flow Rate MIN ..................................................................................................................................................... 143
DO ALARM ........................................................................................................................................................................... 142
DO ALARM (2nd) .................................................................................................................................................................. 142
DO Belt Drift .......................................................................................................................................................................... 109
DO Belt Skew........................................................................................................................................................................ 109
DO Belt Slip........................................................................................................................................................................... 108
DO CleanOut Timer .............................................................................................................................................................. 125
DO Deviation......................................................................................................................................................................... 143
DO Dual Tacho active ........................................................................................................................................................... 105
DO Feeder Run Forward....................................................................................................................................................... 141
DO Feeder Run Forward (2nd) ............................................................................................................................................. 141
DO Feeder Run Reverse....................................................................................................................................................... 142
DO Feeder Run Reverse (2nd) ............................................................................................................................................. 142
DO Feeder running (2nd) ...................................................................................................................................................... 141
DO Feeder Started ................................................................................................................................................................ 141
DO Feeding ........................................................................................................................................................................... 146
DO Feeding (2nd) ................................................................................................................................................................. 146
DO FRI Frequency .................................................................................................................................................................. 87
DO Load MAX ....................................................................................................................................................................... 144
DO Load MIN ........................................................................................................................................................................ 143
DO Local Mode ..................................................................................................................................................................... 145
DO Moisture active................................................................................................................................................................ 124
DO Moisture MAX ................................................................................................................................................................. 124
DO PLC 1 .............................................................................................................................................................................. 163
DO PLC 2 .............................................................................................................................................................................. 163
DO PLC 3 .............................................................................................................................................................................. 163
DO PLC 4 .............................................................................................................................................................................. 164
DO PLC 5 .............................................................................................................................................................................. 164
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 278 -
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Index
DO PLC 6 .............................................................................................................................................................................. 164
DO PLC 7 .............................................................................................................................................................................. 164
DO PLC 8 .............................................................................................................................................................................. 164
DO Pulse Counter ................................................................................................................................................................... 84
DO Remote CTRL ................................................................................................................................................................. 146
DO Remote CTRL (2nd)........................................................................................................................................................ 146
DO Scale Start ...................................................................................................................................................................... 140
DO Slip 2............................................................................................................................................................................... 153
DO Speed MAX..................................................................................................................................................................... 144
DO Speed MIN ...................................................................................................................................................................... 144
DO Start Prefeeder ............................................................................................................................................................... 142
DO Volumetric Mode ............................................................................................................................................................. 144
DO Volumetric Mode (2nd).................................................................................................................................................... 145
DO WARNING ...................................................................................................................................................................... 145
DO WARNING (2nd) ............................................................................................................................................................. 145
DT-9 Parameter List ................................................................................................................................................................. 62
DT-9 Setup............................................................................................................................................................................... 13
EC Declaration of Conformity ................................................................................................................................................. 271
Effective Platform Length ......................................................................................................................................................... 94
Electrical System.................................................................................................................................................................... 183
Electronic Output.................................................................................................................................................................... 247
Ethernet.................................................................................................................................................................................. 253
Ethernet.................................................................................................................................................................................. 162
Ethernet Addressing............................................................................................................................................................... 229
Ethernet Hardware ................................................................................................................................................................. 228
Event Actual Flow Rate MAX ........................................................................................................................................ 112, 187
Event Actual Flow Rate MIN ......................................................................................................................................... 111, 192
Event Acyclic Communication ....................................................................................................................................... 162, 196
Event Analog Input < Offset .......................................................................................................................................... 104, 184
Event Belt Drift .............................................................................................................................................................. 109, 188
Event Belt Motion Monitor ............................................................................................................................................. 106, 190
Event Belt Skew ............................................................................................................................................................ 109, 188
Event Chain Motion Monitor .......................................................................................................................................... 127, 189
Event Coal Flow ............................................................................................................................................................ 137, 191
Event Coal on Belt ........................................................................................................................................................ 135, 191
Event Communication ARM7 .......................................................................................................................................... 79, 196
Event Communication HMI 1................................................................................................................................................... 78
Event Communication VHM serial......................................................................................................................................... 195
Event Controller Limited ................................................................................................................................................ 103, 183
Event Cyclic Communication......................................................................................................................................... 157, 195
Event Deviation ............................................................................................................................................................. 103, 188
Event Discharge Pluggage............................................................................................................................................ 133, 189
Event Error LC Input ....................................................................................................................................................... 99, 182
Event External Event 1.................................................................................................................................................. 131, 194
Event External Event 2.................................................................................................................................................. 138, 194
Event External Event 3.................................................................................................................................................. 139, 194
Event External Event 4.................................................................................................................................................. 139, 194
Event FCB-Error............................................................................................................................................................ 173, 185
Event LC Input < MIN.................................................................................................................................................... 100, 191
Event LC Input > MAX................................................................................................................................................... 100, 186
Event Load MAX ........................................................................................................................................................... 113, 187
Event Load MIN ............................................................................................................................................................ 112, 192
Event Loss of Material................................................................................................................................................... 134, 190
Event Maint. Electric...................................................................................................................................................... 153, 193
Event Maint.Feeder Run ............................................................................................................................................... 153, 193
Event Memory ............................................................................................................................................................... 104, 195
Event Moisture MAX...................................................................................................................................................... 124, 185
Event Motor Start .......................................................................................................................................................... 136, 190
Event NAMUR Error V103-DI13 .................................................................................................................................... 132, 184
Event NAMUR Error V103-DI14 .................................................................................................................................... 132, 184
Event Power Failure ...................................................................................................................................................... 101, 183
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Index
Event Primary Tacho Failure ......................................................................................................................................... 105, 182
Event Remote TCI too small ........................................................................................................................................... 86, 186
Event Run Disabled ........................................................................................................................................................ 91, 184
Event Setpoint Limited .................................................................................................................................................. 101, 192
Event Slip ...................................................................................................................................................................... 107, 188
Event Slip 2 ................................................................................................................................................................... 152, 189
Event Speed MAX ......................................................................................................................................................... 114, 187
Event Speed MIN .......................................................................................................................................................... 113, 192
Event Stand-By ............................................................................................................................................................... 98, 193
Event Tachometer Input .................................................................................................................................................. 99, 182
Event Temperature-MAX............................................................................................................................................... 114, 186
Event Volum. caused by LC-error ................................................................................................................................... 97, 183
Event (Error) Messages ......................................................................................................................................................... 181
Event Group: Calibration ........................................................................................................................................................ 182
Event Group: Controller.......................................................................................................................................................... 183
Event Group: Electrical System.............................................................................................................................................. 183
Event Group: Interlock............................................................................................................................................................ 184
Event Group: Material Flow.................................................................................................................................................... 185
Event Group: MAX ................................................................................................................................................................. 186
Event Group: Mechanic.......................................................................................................................................................... 188
Event Group: MIN .................................................................................................................................................................. 191
Event Group: Sequence Monitoring ....................................................................................................................................... 192
Event Group: System Message.............................................................................................................................................. 195
Event Groups ................................................................................................................................................................... 61, 181
Event Log Values ..................................................................................................................................................................... 40
Events ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 52
Events Details ........................................................................................................................................................................ 182
Exiting HMI Configuration......................................................................................................................................................... 38
Expert Mode ............................................................................................................................................................................. 51
Factor Deviation ..................................................................................................................................................................... 102
FCB analog outputs ............................................................................................................................................................... 169
FCB digital outputs ................................................................................................................................................................. 174
FCB Variant............................................................................................................................................................................ 173
FCB_AO 01 ............................................................................................................................................................................ 169
FCB_AO 02 ............................................................................................................................................................................ 169
FCB_AO 03 ............................................................................................................................................................................ 170
FCB_AO 04 ............................................................................................................................................................................ 171
FCB_AO 05 ............................................................................................................................................................................ 172
FCB_DO 01 ............................................................................................................................................................................ 174
FCB_DO 02 ............................................................................................................................................................................ 174
FCB_DO 03 ............................................................................................................................................................................ 174
FCB_DO 04 ............................................................................................................................................................................ 175
FCB_DO 05 ............................................................................................................................................................................ 175
FCB_DO 06 ............................................................................................................................................................................ 175
FCB_DO 07 ............................................................................................................................................................................ 175
FCB_DO 08 ............................................................................................................................................................................ 175
FCB_DO 09 ............................................................................................................................................................................ 175
FCB_DO 10 ............................................................................................................................................................................ 175
FCB_DO 11 ............................................................................................................................................................................ 176
FCB_DO 12 ............................................................................................................................................................................ 176
FCB_DO 13 ............................................................................................................................................................................ 176
FCB_DO 14 ............................................................................................................................................................................ 176
FCB_DO 15 ............................................................................................................................................................................ 176
FCB_DO 16 ............................................................................................................................................................................ 176
FCB_DO 17 ............................................................................................................................................................................ 177
FCB_DO 18 ............................................................................................................................................................................ 177
FCB_DO 19 ............................................................................................................................................................................ 177
FCB_DO 20 ............................................................................................................................................................................ 177
Feed rate controller (CTRL) ................................................................................................................................................... 212
Feedback Filter Override Threshold ....................................................................................................................................... 110
Feeder control .......................................................................................................................................................................... 97
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 280 -
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Index
Feeder Definition ...................................................................................................................................................................... 80
Feeder Monitoring .................................................................................................................................................................... 98
Feeder Start ............................................................................................................................................................................. 88
Feedrate Control ........................................................................................................................................................................ 9
Feedrate Setpoint..................................................................................................................................................................... 88
Fig. 1: Weigh Roller Adjustment ............................................................................................................................................... 19
Fig. 10: Belt drift and slip measurement ................................................................................................................................. 219
Fig. 11: The VCF monitoring mechanism ............................................................................................................................... 220
Fig. 12: A block diagram of moisture correction ..................................................................................................................... 221
Fig. 13: Example of a function block link ................................................................................................................................ 222
Fig. 14: Binary function blocks ............................................................................................................................................... 224
Fig. 15: Analog function blocks .............................................................................................................................................. 225
Fig. 16: Alternative 'series connection' link between basic units and the on-site ethernet...................................................... 228
Fig. 17: Alternative 'star connection' link between basic units and the on-site ethernet ......................................................... 229
Fig. 18: Possible RS-485 connections ................................................................................................................................... 232
Fig. 19: Bus termination for the transmission cable................................................................................................................ 232
Fig. 2: Principle of belt-drift monitoring ..................................................................................................................................... 26
Fig. 20: RS-485 bus wiring ..................................................................................................................................................... 233
Fig. 21: Fix cable with cable binders and clamps ................................................................................................................... 233
Fig. 22: Test Connector.......................................................................................................................................................... 235
Fig. 23: VCU 20103 in 3D representation with mounting kit ................................................................................................... 235
Fig. 24: Dimensions and position of the plugs VCU 20103 with mounting kit......................................................................... 236
Fig. 25: VME0120: Load cell connection, Pin 1 (X91 or X92)................................................................................................. 239
Fig. 26: VME0120: Load cell input X91 or X92....................................................................................................................... 240
Fig. 27: Digital input: switching contact connection ................................................................................................................ 242
Fig. 28: Digital input: external signal voltage connection........................................................................................................ 242
Fig. 29: Connecting a two-wire sensor ................................................................................................................................... 243
Fig. 3: Block diagram for calculating the setpoint ................................................................................................................... 205
Fig. 30: Digital input: connecting a sensor or a contact at the sensor input............................................................................ 244
Fig. 31: Digital input: connecting an external signal voltage at the sensor input .................................................................... 244
Fig. 32: Connection of an external totalizer at DO12.............................................................................................................. 247
Fig. 33: Electronic output VCU 20103 .................................................................................................................................... 247
Fig. 34: VAI 20100: 1 analog input ......................................................................................................................................... 249
Fig. 35: VAO 20100 or VAO 20103: 1 analog output ............................................................................................................. 250
Fig. 36: VHM 20100 Rear view with holding frame ................................................................................................................ 255
Fig. 37: VHM 20100 Front view with holding frame................................................................................................................ 255
Fig. 38: Dimensions VHM 20100............................................................................................................................................ 256
Fig. 39: VHM 20101 Rear view .............................................................................................................................................. 257
Fig. 4: Switch-on logic ............................................................................................................................................................ 206
Fig. 40: Dimensions VHM 20101............................................................................................................................................ 257
Fig. 41: VHM 20110 with ethernet cable connection .............................................................................................................. 258
Fig. 42: Holding frame VHM 20110 ........................................................................................................................................ 259
Fig. 43: VHM 201xx................................................................................................................................................................ 260
Fig. 44: Example connection VHM with power supply via RJ 45............................................................................................ 261
Fig. 45: Example connection network with alternatives for the power supply......................................................................... 262
Fig. 46: Example connection for long distance between operating panel and VCU ............................................................... 263
Fig. 47: Example connection operating panel with power supply from VCU .......................................................................... 263
Fig. 48: M12 system cable for field cabling ............................................................................................................................ 265
Fig. 49: System cable for control cubicle installation .............................................................................................................. 265
Fig. 5: Measuring the feed rate (MEASURE) ......................................................................................................................... 210
Fig. 50: Obsolete system cables (only used as spare parts) .................................................................................................. 265
Fig. 51: Alternatives for connecting VHM via RS485.............................................................................................................. 267
Fig. 52: WLAN access point ALL0258.................................................................................................................................... 269
Fig. 53: Fix cable with cable binders and clamps ................................................................................................................... 270
Fig. 6: Feed rate control (CTRL) ............................................................................................................................................ 212
Fig. 7: Effect of the controller parameters on the controller output with a discontinuous control deviation on t=0.................. 214
Fig. 8: Upper controller magnitude limit.................................................................................................................................. 216
Fig. 9: 2-sensor slip identification ........................................................................................................................................... 217
Filter Actual Flow Rate .......................................................................................................................................................... 110
Filter Actual Flow Rate analog .............................................................................................................................................. 110
Filter Belt Load ...................................................................................................................................................................... 111
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Index
Filter Belt Speed.................................................................................................................................................................... 111
Filter Deviation ...................................................................................................................................................................... 111
Filters ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 110
Five Safety Rules of Electrical Engineering................................................................................................................................ 6
Fixed mode configuration ....................................................................................................................................................... 165
FLOAT-Format ....................................................................................................................................................................... 160
Flow Rate Offset .................................................................................................................................................................... 128
Flow Rate Range ................................................................................................................................................................... 128
Flow Rate Units ........................................................................................................................................................................ 83
Format Data ........................................................................................................................................................................... 156
Function Blocks for Analog Signals ........................................................................................................................................ 225
Function Blocks for Binary Signals ......................................................................................................................................... 223
Gateway ................................................................................................................................................................................. 163
Gateway ................................................................................................................................................................................. 230
General Information ................................................................................................................................................................. 57
General Technical Data.................................................................................................................................................. 237, 251
Gravimetric ............................................................................................................................................................................... 10
Handling the Function Blocks ................................................................................................................................................. 223
Hardware Modules ................................................................................................................................................................... 78
HI01 Event LC Input > MAX ................................................................................................................................................. 186
HI02 Event Actual Flow Rate MAX....................................................................................................................................... 187
HI03 Event Load MAX.......................................................................................................................................................... 187
HI04 Event Speed MAX ....................................................................................................................................................... 187
HI05 Event Deviation............................................................................................................................................................ 188
HMI Value 01 ......................................................................................................................................................................... 178
HMI Value 02 ......................................................................................................................................................................... 178
HMI Value 03 ......................................................................................................................................................................... 178
HMI Value 04 ......................................................................................................................................................................... 178
HMI Value 05 ......................................................................................................................................................................... 178
HMI Value 06 ......................................................................................................................................................................... 178
HMI Value 07 ......................................................................................................................................................................... 178
HMI Value 08 ......................................................................................................................................................................... 179
HMI Value 09 ......................................................................................................................................................................... 179
HMI Value 10 ......................................................................................................................................................................... 179
Hourly Total Time ................................................................................................................................................................... 154
Housing Models ..................................................................................................................................................................... 254
I-Component TN..................................................................................................................................................................... 118
ID Preset Value 1 ................................................................................................................................................................... 165
ID Preset Value 2 ................................................................................................................................................................... 165
ID Preset Value 3 ................................................................................................................................................................... 165
ID Preset Value 4 ................................................................................................................................................................... 165
ID Preset Value 5 ................................................................................................................................................................... 166
ID Preset Value 6 ................................................................................................................................................................... 166
ID Preset Value 7 ................................................................................................................................................................... 166
ID Preset Value 8 ................................................................................................................................................................... 166
ID Read Value 1 ..................................................................................................................................................................... 166
ID Read Value 10 ................................................................................................................................................................... 168
ID Read Value 11 ................................................................................................................................................................... 168
ID Read Value 12 ................................................................................................................................................................... 168
ID Read Value 13 ................................................................................................................................................................... 168
ID Read Value 14 ................................................................................................................................................................... 168
ID Read Value 15 ................................................................................................................................................................... 168
ID Read Value 16 ................................................................................................................................................................... 168
ID Read Value 2 ..................................................................................................................................................................... 166
ID Read Value 3 ..................................................................................................................................................................... 167
ID Read Value 4 ..................................................................................................................................................................... 167
ID Read Value 5 ..................................................................................................................................................................... 167
ID Read Value 6 ..................................................................................................................................................................... 167
ID Read Value 7 ..................................................................................................................................................................... 167
ID Read Value 8 ..................................................................................................................................................................... 167
ID Read Value 9 ..................................................................................................................................................................... 167
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 282 -
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Index
IL01 Event Run Disabled...................................................................................................................................................... 184
IL10 Event FCB-Error........................................................................................................................................................... 185
Initial Configuration .................................................................................................................................................................. 37
Installation ................................................................................................................................................................................ 47
Integrated Analog Input .......................................................................................................................................................... 248
Integrated Analog Outputs ..................................................................................................................................................... 248
Interlock.................................................................................................................................................................................. 184
IP Address...................................................................................................................................................................... 162, 230
IP Addressing ......................................................................................................................................................................... 229
KP speed controller ................................................................................................................................................................ 120
Language ................................................................................................................................................................................. 80
LB: Pulses per Belt................................................................................................................................................................... 24
LC Characteristic Value............................................................................................................................................................ 94
LC Filter.................................................................................................................................................................................. 110
LC Rated Capacity ................................................................................................................................................................... 94
Level/Temperatur Sensor Delay............................................................................................................................................. 136
Lever Ratio............................................................................................................................................................................... 95
Limit Actual Flow Rate MAX.................................................................................................................................................. 112
Limit Actual Flow Rate MIN ................................................................................................................................................... 111
Limit Load MAX ..................................................................................................................................................................... 113
Limit Load MIN ...................................................................................................................................................................... 112
Limit Speed MAX .................................................................................................................................................................. 114
Limit Speed MIN.................................................................................................................................................................... 113
Limit Values............................................................................................................................................................................ 111
LO01 Event LC Input < MIN ................................................................................................................................................. 191
LO02 Event Actual Flow Rate MIN....................................................................................................................................... 192
LO03 Event Load MIN.......................................................................................................................................................... 192
LO04 Event Speed MIN ....................................................................................................................................................... 192
Load Cell Input VME0120 ...................................................................................................................................................... 238
Load cross section ................................................................................................................................................................... 96
Loading Custom Default Parameters ....................................................................................................................................... 50
Loading Factory Default Parameters........................................................................................................................................ 51
Logger cycle time ................................................................................................................................................................... 154
Loss of Flow Trip Delay.......................................................................................................................................................... 134
Lower Limit............................................................................................................................................................................. 119
MAC Addresses ..................................................................................................................................................................... 229
Maintenance Electric .............................................................................................................................................................. 153
Maintenance Feeder Run....................................................................................................................................................... 153
Maintenance interval .............................................................................................................................................................. 153
Maintenance Speed ................................................................................................................................................................. 86
Material Flow.......................................................................................................................................................................... 185
Material Test ............................................................................................................................................................................ 56
MAX ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 186
Maximum Feedrate .................................................................................................................................................................. 89
Measuring Principle.................................................................................................................................................................... 8
Measuring the feed rate (MEASURE) .................................................................................................................................... 208
Mechanic................................................................................................................................................................................ 188
MF05 Event Moisture MAX .................................................................................................................................................. 185
MF13 Event Temperature-MAX ........................................................................................................................................... 186
MF14 Event Remote TCI too small ...................................................................................................................................... 186
MIN......................................................................................................................................................................................... 191
Minimum Feedrate ................................................................................................................................................................... 90
Minimum System Requirements .............................................................................................................................................. 47
Modbus-Version ..................................................................................................................................................................... 158
Mode Select Enable/Disable .................................................................................................................................................... 92
Moist correction (MOIST) ....................................................................................................................................................... 221
Moisture ................................................................................................................................................................................. 122
Moisture Active....................................................................................................................................................................... 122
Moisture MAX......................................................................................................................................................................... 124
Moisture Offset....................................................................................................................................................................... 123
Moisture Range ...................................................................................................................................................................... 123
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Index
Moisture Select ...................................................................................................................................................................... 122
Monitoring Standstill after Startup ............................................................................................................................................ 28
Monitoring the mechanism ..................................................................................................................................................... 220
Motion monitoring (BMM) ....................................................................................................................................................... 216
Net Mask ................................................................................................................................................................................ 163
Nominal Belt Load .................................................................................................................................................................... 25
Nominal Flow Rate ................................................................................................................................................................... 81
Nominal Moisture ................................................................................................................................................................... 123
Nominal Speed......................................................................................................................................................................... 82
Offset FCB_AO 1 ................................................................................................................................................................... 169
Offset FCB_AO 2 ................................................................................................................................................................... 170
Offset FCB_AO 3 ................................................................................................................................................................... 170
Offset FCB_AO 4 ................................................................................................................................................................... 171
Offset FCB_AO 5 ................................................................................................................................................................... 172
Operating and Control Access ................................................................................................................................................. 31
Operating Modes OFF/Maintenance ..................................................................................................................................... 10
Operating Modes - Remote ...................................................................................................................................................... 10
Operating the Feeder ............................................................................................................................................................... 52
Operating the HMI in 'Off/Maintenance' Mode.......................................................................................................................... 39
Operating the HMI in 'Remote' Mode ....................................................................................................................................... 39
Operation Using EasyServe ..................................................................................................................................................... 47
Operation Using the 196NT Display ......................................................................................................................................... 45
Operation Using the Touch Screen HMI................................................................................................................................... 37
Optional Analog Channels...................................................................................................................................................... 248
Options..................................................................................................................................................................................... 54
Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 7
Own Address.......................................................................................................................................................................... 156
P01 - Hardware Modules.......................................................................................................................................................... 78
P01.01 - Event Communication HMI 1 .................................................................................................................................... 78
P01.02 - Event Communication ARM7.................................................................................................................................... 79
P01.03 - Analog Channel A10.................................................................................................................................................. 79
P01.04 - Analog Channel A11.................................................................................................................................................. 80
P01.05 - Analog Channel A12.................................................................................................................................................. 80
P01.06 - Analog Channel A13.................................................................................................................................................. 80
P02 - Feeder Definition ............................................................................................................................................................ 80
P02.01 - Language................................................................................................................................................................... 80
P02.02 - Units .......................................................................................................................................................................... 81
P02.03 - Scale Name ............................................................................................................................................................... 81
P02.04 - Password ................................................................................................................................................................... 81
P02.05 - Nominal Flow Rate .................................................................................................................................................... 81
P02.06 - Nominal Speed .......................................................................................................................................................... 82
P02.07 - Display Formats......................................................................................................................................................... 82
P02.08 - Flow Rate Units ......................................................................................................................................................... 83
P02.09 - Counter 1 Unit............................................................................................................................................................ 83
P02.10 - Counter 2 Unit............................................................................................................................................................ 84
P02.11 - Counter 3 Unit............................................................................................................................................................ 84
P02.12 - DO Pulse Counter..................................................................................................................................................... 84
P02.13 - Totalizer Increment .................................................................................................................................................... 85
P02.14 - Pulse Length Total..................................................................................................................................................... 85
P02.15 - Event Remote TCI too small ..................................................................................................................................... 86
P02.16 - Maintenance Speed................................................................................................................................................... 86
P02.17 - DO FRI Frequency.................................................................................................................................................... 87
P02.18 - Remote FRI Frequency ............................................................................................................................................. 87
P02.20 - Codepage .................................................................................................................................................................. 87
P02.21 - DC_Mode................................................................................................................................................................... 87
P03 - Control Sources .............................................................................................................................................................. 88
P03.01 - Feeder Start............................................................................................................................................................... 88
P03.02 - Feedrate Setpoint ...................................................................................................................................................... 88
P03.03 - Setpoint Range .......................................................................................................................................................... 89
P03.04 - Setpoint Offset ........................................................................................................................................................... 89
P03.05 - Maximum Feedrate.................................................................................................................................................... 89
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 284 -
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Index
P03.06 - Minimum Feedrate..................................................................................................................................................... 90
P03.07 - DI Raise Setpoint...................................................................................................................................................... 90
P03.08 - DI Lower Setpoint ..................................................................................................................................................... 90
P03.09 - Raise/Lower Response Time..................................................................................................................................... 91
P03.10 - Source Run Enable.................................................................................................................................................... 91
P03.11 - Event Run Disabled .................................................................................................................................................. 91
P03.12 - Mode Select Enable/Disable...................................................................................................................................... 92
P03.13 - Speed Setpoint .......................................................................................................................................................... 93
P03.14 - Run Mode Select ....................................................................................................................................................... 93
P03.15 - Density Setpoint......................................................................................................................................................... 94
P04 - Rated Data ..................................................................................................................................................................... 94
P04.01 - LC Characteristic Value ............................................................................................................................................. 94
P04.02 - LC Rated Capacity..................................................................................................................................................... 94
P04.03 - Effective Platform Length........................................................................................................................................... 94
P04.04 - Lever Ratio ................................................................................................................................................................ 95
P04.05 - Angle ......................................................................................................................................................................... 95
P04.06 - Speed Measurement ................................................................................................................................................. 95
P04.07 - Source Load Cell ....................................................................................................................................................... 96
P04.08 - Source Load Cell 2 .................................................................................................................................................... 96
P04.09 - Tachometer Pulses per Rev ..................................................................................................................................... 96
P04.10 - Load cross section..................................................................................................................................................... 96
P05 - Feeder control ................................................................................................................................................................ 97
P05.01 - Volum on LC failure ................................................................................................................................................... 97
P05.02 - Event Volum. caused by LC-error............................................................................................................................. 97
P05.03 - Afterflow Measurement Time ..................................................................................................................................... 97
P05.04 - Zero Drop-Out Active ................................................................................................................................................. 98
P05.05 - Zero Drop-Out Limit ................................................................................................................................................... 98
P06 - Feeder Monitoring........................................................................................................................................................... 98
P06.01 - Event Stand-By......................................................................................................................................................... 98
P06.02 - Stand-By Limit Value ................................................................................................................................................. 99
P06.03 - Event Tachometer Input ........................................................................................................................................... 99
P06.04 - Event Error LC Input ................................................................................................................................................. 99
P06.05 - Event LC Input < MIN ............................................................................................................................................. 100
P06.06 - Event LC Input > MAX ............................................................................................................................................ 100
P06.07 - Event Setpoint Limited ............................................................................................................................................ 101
P06.08 - Event Power Failure ............................................................................................................................................... 101
P06.09 - Time Deviation......................................................................................................................................................... 102
P06.10 - Threshold Deviation................................................................................................................................................. 102
P06.11 - Factor Deviation....................................................................................................................................................... 102
P06.12 - Event Deviation....................................................................................................................................................... 103
P06.13 - Event Controller Limited ......................................................................................................................................... 103
P06.14 - Event Memory......................................................................................................................................................... 104
P06.15 - Event Analog Input < Offset.................................................................................................................................... 104
P06.16 - DO Dual Tacho active............................................................................................................................................. 105
P06.17 - Event Primary Tacho Failure .................................................................................................................................. 105
P07 - Belt Monitoring.............................................................................................................................................................. 105
P07.01 - DI Belt Motion Monitor ............................................................................................................................................ 105
P07.02 - Belt Motion Monitor Delay........................................................................................................................................ 106
P07.03 - Event Belt Motion Monitor....................................................................................................................................... 106
P07.04 - DI Source Belt Sensor ............................................................................................................................................ 106
P07.05 - BIC Active ................................................................................................................................................................ 107
P07.06 - DI BIC freeze .......................................................................................................................................................... 107
P07.07 - Slip Value ................................................................................................................................................................ 107
P07.08 - Event Slip ............................................................................................................................................................... 107
P07.09 - DO Belt Slip ............................................................................................................................................................ 108
P07.10 - Sensor Length ......................................................................................................................................................... 108
P07.11 - Sensor Width ........................................................................................................................................................... 108
P07.12 - Sensor Offset........................................................................................................................................................... 108
P07.13 - Belt Drift ................................................................................................................................................................... 108
P07.14 - Event Belt Drift........................................................................................................................................................ 109
P07.15 - Belt Skew................................................................................................................................................................. 109
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Index
P07.16 - Event Belt Skew...................................................................................................................................................... 109
P07.17 - DO Belt Drift............................................................................................................................................................ 109
P07.18 - DO Belt Skew ......................................................................................................................................................... 109
P08 - Filters ............................................................................................................................................................................ 110
P08.01 - LC Filter ................................................................................................................................................................... 110
P08.02 - Filter Actual Flow Rate............................................................................................................................................ 110
P08.03 - Filter Actual Flow Rate analog ................................................................................................................................ 110
P08.04 - Feedback Filter Override Threshold ........................................................................................................................ 110
P08.05 - Filter Belt Load........................................................................................................................................................ 111
P08.06 - Filter Belt Speed ..................................................................................................................................................... 111
P08.07 - Filter Deviation........................................................................................................................................................ 111
P09 - Limit Values .................................................................................................................................................................. 111
P09.01 - Limit Actual Flow Rate MIN .................................................................................................................................... 111
P09.02 - Event Actual Flow Rate MIN ................................................................................................................................... 111
P09.03 - Limit Actual Flow Rate MAX ................................................................................................................................... 112
P09.04 - Event Actual Flow Rate MAX.................................................................................................................................. 112
P09.05 - Limit Load MIN........................................................................................................................................................ 112
P09.06 - Event Load MIN ...................................................................................................................................................... 112
P09.07 - Limit Load MAX ...................................................................................................................................................... 113
P09.08 - Event Load MAX..................................................................................................................................................... 113
P09.09 - Limit Speed MIN ..................................................................................................................................................... 113
P09.10 - Event Speed MIN.................................................................................................................................................... 113
P09.11 - Limit Speed MAX .................................................................................................................................................... 114
P09.12 - Event Speed MAX .................................................................................................................................................. 114
P09.13 - Temperature MAX ................................................................................................................................................... 114
P09.14 - Event Temperature-MAX ........................................................................................................................................ 114
P10 - Calibration Data ............................................................................................................................................................ 115
P10.01 - Calibration Probe Span............................................................................................................................................ 115
P10.02 - Pulses per length ..................................................................................................................................................... 115
P10.03 - Range Correction TW .............................................................................................................................................. 115
P10.04 - Range Correction TC............................................................................................................................................... 116
P10.05 - Range Correction TM .............................................................................................................................................. 116
P10.06 - Belt Circuit Time ...................................................................................................................................................... 116
P10.07 - Simulation Travel (Belt Rev.) ................................................................................................................................... 117
P10.08 - Calibration Weight ................................................................................................................................................... 117
P10.09 - Test Chain Weight ................................................................................................................................................... 117
P10.10 - Basic Tare ............................................................................................................................................................... 117
P10.11 - Belt Circuit No.......................................................................................................................................................... 117
P11 - Rate controller .............................................................................................................................................................. 118
P11.01 - P-Component KP..................................................................................................................................................... 118
P11.02 - I-Component TN ...................................................................................................................................................... 118
P11.03 - AO Motor Speed Control ........................................................................................................................................ 118
P11.04 - Lower Limit .............................................................................................................................................................. 119
P11.05 - Upper Limit .............................................................................................................................................................. 119
P11.06 - Controller Magnitude Offset ..................................................................................................................................... 119
P11.07 - Position at STOP ..................................................................................................................................................... 119
P11.08 - KP speed controller ................................................................................................................................................. 120
P11.09 - VAP Active............................................................................................................................................................... 120
P11.10 - Platform Dis.Length ................................................................................................................................................. 120
P11.11 - CC_FC speed controller .......................................................................................................................................... 120
P11.12 - Control Offset speed controller ................................................................................................................................ 120
P11.13 - Bypass ..................................................................................................................................................................... 121
P11.14 - Setpoint Filter 1st Ord .............................................................................................................................................. 121
P11.15 - Setpoint Filter 2nd Ord............................................................................................................................................. 121
P11.16 - Adaptation 1 ............................................................................................................................................................ 122
P11.17 - Adaptation 2 ............................................................................................................................................................ 122
P12 - Moisture ........................................................................................................................................................................ 122
P12.01 - Moisture Active ........................................................................................................................................................ 122
P12.02 - Moisture Select ........................................................................................................................................................ 122
P12.03 - AI Moisture Measurement....................................................................................................................................... 123
P12.04 - Nominal Moisture..................................................................................................................................................... 123
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 286 -
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Index
P12.05 - Moisture Offset ........................................................................................................................................................ 123
P12.06 - Moisture Range ....................................................................................................................................................... 123
P12.07 - DO Moisture active ................................................................................................................................................. 124
P12.08 - Moisture MAX .......................................................................................................................................................... 124
P12.09 - DO Moisture MAX................................................................................................................................................... 124
P12.10 - Event Moisture MAX ............................................................................................................................................... 124
P12.11 - AO Flow Rate corrected ......................................................................................................................................... 124
P12.12 - AO Flow Rate Offset............................................................................................................................................... 125
P12.13 - AO Flow Rate Range .............................................................................................................................................. 125
P12.14 - Pulse Counter corrected .......................................................................................................................................... 125
P13 - Cleanout control............................................................................................................................................................ 125
P13.01 - DO CleanOut Timer ................................................................................................................................................ 125
P13.02 - CleanOut ON Time .................................................................................................................................................. 126
P13.03 - CleanOut OFF Time ................................................................................................................................................ 126
P13.04 - DI Chain Motion Monitor ......................................................................................................................................... 126
P13.05 - Chain Motion Delay ................................................................................................................................................. 126
P13.06 - Event Chain Motion Monitor ................................................................................................................................... 127
P14 - Analog Outputs ............................................................................................................................................................. 127
P14.01 - AO Setpoint ............................................................................................................................................................ 127
P14.02 - Setpoint Offset ......................................................................................................................................................... 127
P14.03 - Setpoint Range ........................................................................................................................................................ 127
P14.04 - AO Actual Flow Rate .............................................................................................................................................. 127
P14.05 - Flow Rate Offset ...................................................................................................................................................... 128
P14.06 - Flow Rate Range ..................................................................................................................................................... 128
P14.07 - AO Belt Load .......................................................................................................................................................... 128
P14.08 - Belt Load Offset ....................................................................................................................................................... 128
P14.09 - Belt Load Range ...................................................................................................................................................... 128
P14.10 - AO Speed ............................................................................................................................................................... 129
P14.11 - Speed Offset............................................................................................................................................................ 129
P14.12 - Speed Range........................................................................................................................................................... 129
P14.13 - AO Deviation........................................................................................................................................................... 129
P14.14 - Deviation Offset ....................................................................................................................................................... 129
P14.15 - Deviation Range ...................................................................................................................................................... 129
P14.16 - AO Actual Flow Rate (2nd) ..................................................................................................................................... 130
P14.17 - AO Density ............................................................................................................................................................. 130
P14.18 - Density Offset .......................................................................................................................................................... 130
P14.19 - Density Range ......................................................................................................................................................... 130
P15 - Digital Inputs ................................................................................................................................................................. 131
P15.01 - DI Acknowledge Events .......................................................................................................................................... 131
P15.02 - DI Local Mode......................................................................................................................................................... 131
P15.03 - Event External Event 1 ........................................................................................................................................... 131
P15.04 - DI External Event 1 ................................................................................................................................................. 132
P15.05 - Event NAMUR Error V103-DI13 ............................................................................................................................. 132
P15.06 - Event NAMUR Error V103-DI14 ............................................................................................................................. 132
P15.07 - DI Reset Totalizer 1 ................................................................................................................................................ 132
P15.08 - DI Reset Totalizer 2 ................................................................................................................................................ 132
P15.09 - DI Discharge Pluggage ........................................................................................................................................... 133
P15.10 - Discharge Pluggage Delay ...................................................................................................................................... 133
P15.11 - Event Discharge Pluggage ..................................................................................................................................... 133
P15.12 - DI Coal on belt switch ............................................................................................................................................. 134
P15.13 - Loss of Flow Trip Delay ........................................................................................................................................... 134
P15.14 - Event Loss of Material ............................................................................................................................................ 134
P15.15 - Event Coal on Belt .................................................................................................................................................. 135
P15.16 - Belt Paddle Feedback Permissive ........................................................................................................................... 135
P15.17 - DI Motor feedback .................................................................................................................................................. 135
P15.18 - Event Motor Start.................................................................................................................................................... 136
P15.19 - DI Coal Flow Monitor .............................................................................................................................................. 136
P15.20 - Level/Temperatur Sensor Delay .............................................................................................................................. 136
P15.21 - Event Coal Flow...................................................................................................................................................... 137
P15.23 - DI Remote CTRL .................................................................................................................................................... 137
P15.24 - DI OFF/Maint CTRL ................................................................................................................................................ 137
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Index
P15.25 - DI Local Start .......................................................................................................................................................... 137
P15.26 - DI Jog forward ........................................................................................................................................................ 138
P15.27 - DI Jog backward ..................................................................................................................................................... 138
P15.28 - Event External Event 2 ........................................................................................................................................... 138
P15.29 - DI External Event 2 ................................................................................................................................................. 138
P15.30 - Event External Event 3 ........................................................................................................................................... 139
P15.31 - DI External Event 3 ................................................................................................................................................. 139
P15.32 - Event External Event 4 ........................................................................................................................................... 139
P15.33 - DI External Event 4 ................................................................................................................................................. 140
P15.34 - DI Volumetric Mode ................................................................................................................................................ 140
P15.35 - DI Mode Switch Lock .............................................................................................................................................. 140
P16 - Digital Outputs .............................................................................................................................................................. 140
P16.01 - DO Scale Start........................................................................................................................................................ 140
P16.02 - DO Feeder Started ................................................................................................................................................. 141
P16.03 - DO Feeder running (2nd)........................................................................................................................................ 141
P16.04 - DO Feeder Run Forward ........................................................................................................................................ 141
P16.05 - DO Feeder Run Forward (2nd) ............................................................................................................................... 141
P16.06 - DO Feeder Run Reverse ........................................................................................................................................ 142
P16.07 - DO Feeder Run Reverse (2nd)............................................................................................................................... 142
P16.08 - DO Start Prefeeder ................................................................................................................................................. 142
P16.09 - DO ALARM ............................................................................................................................................................. 142
P16.10 - DO ALARM (2nd).................................................................................................................................................... 142
P16.11 - DO Deviation .......................................................................................................................................................... 143
P16.12 - DO Actual Flow Rate MIN....................................................................................................................................... 143
P16.13 - DO Actual Flow Rate MAX ..................................................................................................................................... 143
P16.14 - DO Load MIN.......................................................................................................................................................... 143
P16.15 - DO Load MAX......................................................................................................................................................... 144
P16.16 - DO Speed MIN ....................................................................................................................................................... 144
P16.17 - DO Speed MAX ...................................................................................................................................................... 144
P16.18 - DO Volumetric Mode .............................................................................................................................................. 144
P16.19 - DO Volumetric Mode (2nd) ..................................................................................................................................... 145
P16.20 - DO Local Mode....................................................................................................................................................... 145
P16.21 - DO WARNING ........................................................................................................................................................ 145
P16.22 - DO WARNING (2nd)............................................................................................................................................... 145
P16.23 - DO Feeding ............................................................................................................................................................ 146
P16.24 - DO Feeding (2nd) ................................................................................................................................................... 146
P16.25 - DO Remote CTRL .................................................................................................................................................. 146
P16.26 - DO Remote CTRL (2nd) ......................................................................................................................................... 146
P17 - Analog calibration ......................................................................................................................................................... 147
P17.01 - Analog Input 1 Min................................................................................................................................................... 147
P17.02 - Analog Input 1 Max.................................................................................................................................................. 147
P17.03 - Analog Input 2 Min................................................................................................................................................... 147
P17.04 - Analog Input 2 Max.................................................................................................................................................. 147
P17.05 - Analog Input 3 Min................................................................................................................................................... 147
P17.06 - Analog Input 3 Max.................................................................................................................................................. 147
P17.07 - Analog Input 4 Min................................................................................................................................................... 148
P17.08 - Analog Input 4 Max.................................................................................................................................................. 148
P17.09 - Analog Input 5 Min................................................................................................................................................... 148
P17.10 - Analog Input 5 Max.................................................................................................................................................. 148
P17.11 - Analog Output 1 Min ................................................................................................................................................ 148
P17.12 - Analog Output 1 Max ............................................................................................................................................... 148
P17.13 - Analog Output 2 Min ................................................................................................................................................ 148
P17.14 - Analog Output 2 Max ............................................................................................................................................... 149
P17.15 - Analog Output 3 Min ................................................................................................................................................ 149
P17.16 - Analog Output 3 Max ............................................................................................................................................... 149
P17.17 - Analog Output 4 Min ................................................................................................................................................ 149
P17.18 - Analog Output 4 Max ............................................................................................................................................... 149
P17.19 - Analog Output 5 Min ................................................................................................................................................ 149
P17.20 - Analog Output 5 Max ............................................................................................................................................... 149
P17.21 - Analog Output 6 Min ................................................................................................................................................ 150
P17.22 - Analog Output 6 Max ............................................................................................................................................... 150
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 288 -
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Index
P17.23 - Analog Output 1 Test Value..................................................................................................................................... 150
P17.24 - Analog Output 2 Test Value..................................................................................................................................... 150
P17.25 - Analog Output 3 Test Value..................................................................................................................................... 150
P17.26 - Analog Output 4 Test Value..................................................................................................................................... 150
P17.27 - Analog Output 5 Test Value..................................................................................................................................... 151
P17.28 - Analog Output 6 Test Value..................................................................................................................................... 151
P18 - 2-Sensor Slip ................................................................................................................................................................ 151
P18.01 - 2-Sensor Slip active................................................................................................................................................. 151
P18.02 - Source Sensor 1 ...................................................................................................................................................... 151
P18.03 - DI Sensor 1............................................................................................................................................................. 151
P18.04 - Characteristic Value Sensor 1 ................................................................................................................................. 152
P18.05 - DI Sensor 2............................................................................................................................................................. 152
P18.06 - Characteristic Value Sensor 2 ................................................................................................................................. 152
P18.07 - Slip Value 2 ............................................................................................................................................................. 152
P18.08 - Event Slip 2............................................................................................................................................................. 152
P18.09 - DO Slip 2 ................................................................................................................................................................ 153
P19 - Maintenance interval..................................................................................................................................................... 153
P19.01 - Maintenance Electric ............................................................................................................................................... 153
P19.02 - Event Maint. Electric ............................................................................................................................................... 153
P19.03 - Maintenance Feeder Run ........................................................................................................................................ 153
P19.04 - Event Maint.Feeder Run ......................................................................................................................................... 153
P20 - Data Logging ................................................................................................................................................................ 154
P20.01 - Hourly Total Time .................................................................................................................................................... 154
P20.02 - Daily Total Time....................................................................................................................................................... 154
P20.03 - Logger cycle time..................................................................................................................................................... 154
P20.04 - Data Log Value 1 ..................................................................................................................................................... 154
P20.05 - Data Log Value 2 ..................................................................................................................................................... 155
P20.06 - Data Log Value 3 ..................................................................................................................................................... 155
P20.07 - Data Log Value 4 ..................................................................................................................................................... 155
P20.08 - Data Log Value 5 ..................................................................................................................................................... 155
P20.09 - Data Log Value 6 ..................................................................................................................................................... 155
P20.10 - Data Log Value 7 ..................................................................................................................................................... 155
P20.11 - Data Log Value 8 ..................................................................................................................................................... 156
P20.12 - Data Log Value 9 ..................................................................................................................................................... 156
P20.13 - Data Log Value 10 ................................................................................................................................................... 156
P21 - Communication EasyServe .......................................................................................................................................... 156
P21.01 - Own Address ........................................................................................................................................................... 156
P21.02 - Baud Rate................................................................................................................................................................ 156
P21.03 - Format Data............................................................................................................................................................. 156
P22 - Communication Fieldbus .............................................................................................................................................. 157
P22.01 - Protocol Type........................................................................................................................................................... 157
P22.02 - Timeout Host ........................................................................................................................................................... 157
P22.03 - Event Cyclic Communication .................................................................................................................................. 157
P22.04 - Modbus-Version....................................................................................................................................................... 158
P22.05 - Word Sequence ....................................................................................................................................................... 158
P22.06 - Byte Sequence ........................................................................................................................................................ 158
P22.07 - Configuration ........................................................................................................................................................... 158
P22.08 - Address ................................................................................................................................................................... 159
P22.09 - Resolution................................................................................................................................................................ 159
P22.10 - Baud rate ................................................................................................................................................................. 159
P22.11 - Data Format............................................................................................................................................................. 160
P22.12 - Physics .................................................................................................................................................................... 160
P22.13 - Address ................................................................................................................................................................... 160
P22.14 - FLOAT-Format......................................................................................................................................................... 160
P22.15 - Address ................................................................................................................................................................... 160
P22.16 - Baud rate ................................................................................................................................................................. 160
P22.17 - Parameter ................................................................................................................................................................ 161
P22.18 - Preset Count............................................................................................................................................................ 161
P22.19 - READ_ID Count....................................................................................................................................................... 161
P22.20 - Access Rights Limitation FB .................................................................................................................................... 161
P22.21 - Remote IP Address FB ............................................................................................................................................ 162
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Index
P22.22 - Event Acyclic Communication................................................................................................................................. 162
P22.23 - Configuration ........................................................................................................................................................... 162
P23 - Ethernet ........................................................................................................................................................................ 162
P23.01 - IP Address ............................................................................................................................................................... 162
P23.02 - Net Mask ................................................................................................................................................................. 163
P23.03 - Gateway .................................................................................................................................................................. 163
P24 - PLC Outputs ................................................................................................................................................................. 163
P24.01 - DO PLC 1 ............................................................................................................................................................... 163
P24.02 - DO PLC 2 ............................................................................................................................................................... 163
P24.03 - DO PLC 3 ............................................................................................................................................................... 163
P24.04 - DO PLC 4 ............................................................................................................................................................... 164
P24.05 - DO PLC 5 ............................................................................................................................................................... 164
P24.06 - DO PLC 6 ............................................................................................................................................................... 164
P24.07 - DO PLC 7 ............................................................................................................................................................... 164
P24.08 - DO PLC 8 ............................................................................................................................................................... 164
P24.09 - AO PLC 1 ............................................................................................................................................................... 164
P24.10 - AO PLC 2 ............................................................................................................................................................... 165
P25 - Fixed mode configuration ............................................................................................................................................. 165
P25.01 - ID Preset Value 1..................................................................................................................................................... 165
P25.02 - ID Preset Value 2..................................................................................................................................................... 165
P25.03 - ID Preset Value 3..................................................................................................................................................... 165
P25.04 - ID Preset Value 4..................................................................................................................................................... 165
P25.05 - ID Preset Value 5..................................................................................................................................................... 166
P25.06 - ID Preset Value 6..................................................................................................................................................... 166
P25.07 - ID Preset Value 7..................................................................................................................................................... 166
P25.08 - ID Preset Value 8..................................................................................................................................................... 166
P25.09 - ID Read Value 1 ...................................................................................................................................................... 166
P25.10 - ID Read Value 2 ...................................................................................................................................................... 166
P25.11 - ID Read Value 3 ...................................................................................................................................................... 167
P25.12 - ID Read Value 4 ...................................................................................................................................................... 167
P25.13 - ID Read Value 5 ...................................................................................................................................................... 167
P25.14 - ID Read Value 6 ...................................................................................................................................................... 167
P25.15 - ID Read Value 7 ...................................................................................................................................................... 167
P25.16 - ID Read Value 8 ...................................................................................................................................................... 167
P25.17 - ID Read Value 9 ...................................................................................................................................................... 167
P25.18 - ID Read Value 10 .................................................................................................................................................... 168
P25.19 - ID Read Value 11 .................................................................................................................................................... 168
P25.20 - ID Read Value 12 .................................................................................................................................................... 168
P25.21 - ID Read Value 13 .................................................................................................................................................... 168
P25.22 - ID Read Value 14 .................................................................................................................................................... 168
P25.23 - ID Read Value 15 .................................................................................................................................................... 168
P25.24 - ID Read Value 16 .................................................................................................................................................... 168
P26 - FCB analog outputs ...................................................................................................................................................... 169
P26.01 - FCB_AO 01 ............................................................................................................................................................. 169
P26.02 - Offset FCB_AO 1 ..................................................................................................................................................... 169
P26.03 - Range FCB_AO 1 .................................................................................................................................................... 169
P26.04 - Reference FCB_AO 1 .............................................................................................................................................. 169
P26.05 - FCB_AO 02 ............................................................................................................................................................. 169
P26.06 - Offset FCB_AO 2 ..................................................................................................................................................... 170
P26.07 - Range FCB_AO 2 .................................................................................................................................................... 170
P26.08 - Reference FCB_AO 2 .............................................................................................................................................. 170
P26.09 - FCB_AO 03 ............................................................................................................................................................. 170
P26.10 - Offset FCB_AO 3 ..................................................................................................................................................... 170
P26.11 - Range FCB_AO 3 .................................................................................................................................................... 171
P26.12 - Reference FCB_AO 3 .............................................................................................................................................. 171
P26.13 - FCB_AO 04 ............................................................................................................................................................. 171
P26.14 - Offset FCB_AO 4 ..................................................................................................................................................... 171
P26.15 - Range FCB_AO 4 .................................................................................................................................................... 172
P26.16 - Reference FCB_AO 4 .............................................................................................................................................. 172
P26.17 - FCB_AO 05 ............................................................................................................................................................. 172
P26.18 - Offset FCB_AO 5 ..................................................................................................................................................... 172
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 290 -
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Index
P26.19 - Range FCB_AO 5 .................................................................................................................................................... 172
P26.20 - Reference FCB_AO 5 .............................................................................................................................................. 173
P26.21 - FCB Variant ............................................................................................................................................................. 173
P26.22 - Event FCB-Error ..................................................................................................................................................... 173
P27 - FCB digital outputs ....................................................................................................................................................... 174
P27.01 - FCB_DO 01 ............................................................................................................................................................. 174
P27.02 - FCB_DO 02 ............................................................................................................................................................. 174
P27.03 - FCB_DO 03 ............................................................................................................................................................. 174
P27.04 - FCB_DO 04 ............................................................................................................................................................. 175
P27.05 - FCB_DO 05 ............................................................................................................................................................. 175
P27.06 - FCB_DO 06 ............................................................................................................................................................. 175
P27.07 - FCB_DO 07 ............................................................................................................................................................. 175
P27.08 - FCB_DO 08 ............................................................................................................................................................. 175
P27.09 - FCB_DO 09 ............................................................................................................................................................. 175
P27.10 - FCB_DO 10 ............................................................................................................................................................. 175
P27.11 - FCB_DO 11 ............................................................................................................................................................. 176
P27.12 - FCB_DO 12 ............................................................................................................................................................. 176
P27.13 - FCB_DO 13 ............................................................................................................................................................. 176
P27.14 - FCB_DO 14 ............................................................................................................................................................. 176
P27.15 - FCB_DO 15 ............................................................................................................................................................. 176
P27.16 - FCB_DO 16 ............................................................................................................................................................. 176
P27.17 - FCB_DO 17 ............................................................................................................................................................. 177
P27.18 - FCB_DO 18 ............................................................................................................................................................. 177
P27.19 - FCB_DO 19 ............................................................................................................................................................. 177
P27.20 - FCB_DO 20 ............................................................................................................................................................. 177
P28 - Configuration HMI Values ............................................................................................................................................. 178
P28.01 - HMI Value 01 ........................................................................................................................................................... 178
P28.02 - HMI Value 02 ........................................................................................................................................................... 178
P28.03 - HMI Value 03 ........................................................................................................................................................... 178
P28.04 - HMI Value 04 ........................................................................................................................................................... 178
P28.05 - HMI Value 05 ........................................................................................................................................................... 178
P28.06 - HMI Value 06 ........................................................................................................................................................... 178
P28.07 - HMI Value 07 ........................................................................................................................................................... 178
P28.08 - HMI Value 08 ........................................................................................................................................................... 179
P28.09 - HMI Value 09 ........................................................................................................................................................... 179
P28.10 - HMI Value 10 ........................................................................................................................................................... 179
Parameter .............................................................................................................................................................................. 161
Parameter Block 01 - Hardware Modules................................................................................................................................. 78
Parameter Block 02 - Feeder Definition ................................................................................................................................... 80
Parameter Block 03 - Control Sources ..................................................................................................................................... 88
Parameter Block 04 - Rated Data ............................................................................................................................................ 94
Parameter Block 05 - Feeder control ....................................................................................................................................... 97
Parameter Block 06 - Feeder Monitoring.................................................................................................................................. 98
Parameter Block 07 - Belt Monitoring..................................................................................................................................... 105
Parameter Block 08 - Filters................................................................................................................................................... 110
Parameter Block 09 - Limit Values ......................................................................................................................................... 111
Parameter Block 10 - Calibration Data ................................................................................................................................... 115
Parameter Block 11 - Rate controller ..................................................................................................................................... 118
Parameter Block 12 - Moisture ............................................................................................................................................... 122
Parameter Block 13 - Cleanout control .................................................................................................................................. 125
Parameter Block 14 - Analog Outputs .................................................................................................................................... 127
Parameter Block 15 - Digital Inputs ........................................................................................................................................ 131
Parameter Block 16 - Digital Outputs ..................................................................................................................................... 140
Parameter Block 17 - Analog calibration ................................................................................................................................ 147
Parameter Block 18 - 2-Sensor Slip ....................................................................................................................................... 151
Parameter Block 19 - Maintenance interval............................................................................................................................ 153
Parameter Block 20 - Data Logging ....................................................................................................................................... 154
Parameter Block 21 - Communication EasyServe ................................................................................................................. 156
Parameter Block 22 - Communication Fieldbus ..................................................................................................................... 157
Parameter Block 23 - Ethernet ............................................................................................................................................... 162
Parameter Block 24 - PLC Outputs ........................................................................................................................................ 163
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Index
Parameter Block 25 - Fixed mode configuration .................................................................................................................... 165
Parameter Block 26 - FCB analog outputs ............................................................................................................................. 169
Parameter Block 27 - FCB digital outputs .............................................................................................................................. 174
Parameter Block 28 - Configuration HMI Values .................................................................................................................... 177
Parameter Details .................................................................................................................................................................... 78
Parameter Log Values.............................................................................................................................................................. 40
Parameter Overview ................................................................................................................................................................ 62
Parameter Set .......................................................................................................................................................................... 49
Parameter Setup ...................................................................................................................................................................... 40
Parameters............................................................................................................................................................................... 57
Password ................................................................................................................................................................................. 81
P-Component KP ................................................................................................................................................................... 118
Performing Calibrations............................................................................................................................................................ 18
Physics................................................................................................................................................................................... 160
Platform Dis.Length................................................................................................................................................................ 120
PLC Functionality (Optional) .................................................................................................................................................. 222
PLC Outputs........................................................................................................................................................................... 163
Portable Devices .................................................................................................................................................................... 258
Position at STOP.................................................................................................................................................................... 119
Power Supply ................................................................................................................................................................. 237, 252
Prefabricated system cables .................................................................................................................................................. 264
Preset Count .......................................................................................................................................................................... 161
Print Parameters ...................................................................................................................................................................... 51
Probe Error......................................................................................................................................................................... 20, 22
Program EasyServe VPC 20150 .............................................................................................................................................. 47
Protocol Type ......................................................................................................................................................................... 157
Pulse Counter corrected......................................................................................................................................................... 125
Pulse Length Total ................................................................................................................................................................... 85
Pulses per length ................................................................................................................................................................... 115
Raise/Lower Response Time ................................................................................................................................................... 91
Range Correction TC ............................................................................................................................................................. 116
Range Correction TM ............................................................................................................................................................. 116
Range Correction TW............................................................................................................................................................. 115
Range FCB_AO 1 .................................................................................................................................................................. 169
Range FCB_AO 2 .................................................................................................................................................................. 170
Range FCB_AO 3 .................................................................................................................................................................. 171
Range FCB_AO 4 .................................................................................................................................................................. 172
Range FCB_AO 5 .................................................................................................................................................................. 172
Rate controller........................................................................................................................................................................ 118
Rated Data ............................................................................................................................................................................... 94
Read/change Parameters ........................................................................................................................................................ 50
READ_ID Count ..................................................................................................................................................................... 161
Reference FCB_AO 1............................................................................................................................................................. 169
Reference FCB_AO 2............................................................................................................................................................. 170
Reference FCB_AO 3............................................................................................................................................................. 171
Reference FCB_AO 4............................................................................................................................................................. 172
Reference FCB_AO 5............................................................................................................................................................. 173
Relay Outputs ........................................................................................................................................................................ 245
Remote FRI Frequency ............................................................................................................................................................ 87
Remote IP Address FB........................................................................................................................................................... 162
Resolution .............................................................................................................................................................................. 159
Restoring the Factory Default Settings..................................................................................................................................... 42
Retro-reflective Tape Clips................................................................................................................................................. 20, 22
RS-485 Hardware .................................................................................................................................................................. 231
Run Mode Select...................................................................................................................................................................... 93
Safety notes ............................................................................................................................................................................... 3
SC01 Event Setpoint Limited ............................................................................................................................................... 192
SC02 Event Stand-By .......................................................................................................................................................... 193
SC03 Event Maint.Feeder Run ............................................................................................................................................ 193
SC04 Event Maint. Electric................................................................................................................................................... 193
SC05 Event External Event 1 ............................................................................................................................................... 194
BV-H6411GB, 1221
- 292 -
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Index
SC06 Event External Event 2 ............................................................................................................................................... 194
SC11 Event External Event 3 ............................................................................................................................................... 194
SC12 Event External Event 4 ............................................................................................................................................... 194
Scale Name.............................................................................................................................................................................. 81
Scale Operation Screens ......................................................................................................................................................... 52
Screened Cables............................................................................................................................................................ 234, 270
Sensor Length ........................................................................................................................................................................ 108
Sensor Offset ......................................................................................................................................................................... 108
Sensor Width.......................................................................................................................................................................... 108
Sequence Monitoring ............................................................................................................................................................. 192
Serial Interfaces: .................................................................................................................................................................... 253
Serial Networks ...................................................................................................................................................................... 227
Service Values ......................................................................................................................................................................... 52
Setpoint Filter 1st Ord ............................................................................................................................................................ 121
Setpoint Filter 2nd Ord ........................................................................................................................................................... 121
Setpoint Offset ................................................................................................................................................................. 89, 127
Setpoint Range ................................................................................................................................................................ 89, 127
Setting the Current Time and Date........................................................................................................................................... 43
Setting the IP Address in DISOCONT Tersus Systems ......................................................................................................... 230
Setting Time ............................................................................................................................................................................. 54
Setup Notes ............................................................................................................................................................................. 13
Setup Parameters .................................................................................................................................................................... 15
Signal Words .............................................................................................................................................................................. 4
Signal Words for Application Notes ............................................................................................................................................ 5
Signal Words for Safety Warnings ............................................................................................................................................. 4
Simulation Mode ...................................................................................................................................................................... 42
Simulation Travel (Belt Rev.).................................................................................................................................................. 117
Slip Value ............................................................................................................................................................................... 107
Slip Value 2 ............................................................................................................................................................................ 152
Source Load Cell...................................................................................................................................................................... 96
Source Load Cell 2................................................................................................................................................................... 96
Source Run Enable .................................................................................................................................................................. 91
Source Sensor 1 .................................................................................................................................................................... 151
Span (CAL 2) ........................................................................................................................................................................... 21
Speed Measurement ................................................................................................................................................................ 95
Speed Offset .......................................................................................................................................................................... 129
Speed Range ......................................................................................................................................................................... 129
Speed Setpoint......................................................................................................................................................................... 93
Stand-By Limit Value................................................................................................................................................................ 99
Start Program and Connect to Feeder ..................................................................................................................................... 47
Startup and Functional Check .................................................................................................................................................. 14
Subnetwork Mask................................................................................................................................................................... 230
Switch-on logic ....................................................................................................................................................................... 206
SY01 Event Memory ............................................................................................................................................................ 195
SY07 Event Communication VHM serial .............................................................................................................................. 195
SY08 Event Cyclic Communication ...................................................................................................................................... 195
SY10 Event Acyclic Communication .................................................................................................................................... 196
SY12 Event Communication ARM7 ..................................................................................................................................... 196
System Message.................................................................................................................................................................... 195
TA: Tare ................................................................................................................................................................................... 24
Tab.1: Parameter for BIC and for belt motion monitoring ......................................................................................................... 27
Tab.10: DISOCONT Load Cell Connection, Wire Colors ....................................................................................................... 240
Tab.11: Pin assignment for belt marker sensors .................................................................................................................... 244
Tab.12: Technical data for the inductive transmitter input ...................................................................................................... 245
Tab.13: Technical data of the analog input ............................................................................................................................ 248
Tab.14: Connections .............................................................................................................................................................. 249
Tab.15: Details of the system cables ..................................................................................................................................... 266
Tab.16: WLAN access configuration ...................................................................................................................................... 268
Tab.2: Sequence for adjustment and commissioning............................................................................................................... 27
Tab.3: Setting and adjusting the two-sensor belt slippage monitoring ..................................................................................... 29
Tab.4: Operating access .......................................................................................................................................................... 31
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
DISOCONT Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual Schenck Process Group
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Section Index
Title/Description
Drawing No.
S11152
S11158
S11164
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Title/Description
Drawing No.
D43566
A29466
November 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Section Index
Sl.No
Title/Description
DrawingNo
ConnectionDiagramRPC
S11153
CabinetAssemblyDrawingRPC
S11154
PanelAssemblyDrawingRPC
S11157
ConnectionDiagramFIC
S11159
CabinetAssemblyDrawingFIC
S11160
PanelAssemblyDrawingFIC
S11162
Section Index
Description
6.1
MOTOR
FE14364
6.2
6.3
SPEED SENSOR
FE11705
6.4
V003033.B06
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Integral Horsepower
AC Induction Motors
ODP, WPI, WPII Enclosure
TEFC Enclosure
Explosion Proof
2/07
MN400
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Section 1
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1
1-1
Limited Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1
Safety Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2
Receiving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4
Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4
Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4
Section 2
Installation & Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1
Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1
2-2
Power Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2
Conduit Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2
AC Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2
2-4
Coupled Start Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-4
2-4
Section 3
Maintenance & Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1
General Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1
3-1
Type of Grease . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1
Relubrication Intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1
Relubrication Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4
Troubleshooting Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5
MN400
Table of Contents i
Table of Contents
Section 1
General Information
ii Table of Contents
MN400
Table of Contents
Section 1
General Information
Overview
This manual contains general procedures that apply to Baldor Motor products. Be sure to read and
understand the Safety Notice statements in this manual. For your protection, do not install, operate or
attempt to perform maintenance procedures until you understand the Warning and Caution statements. A
Warning statement indicates a possible unsafe condition that can cause harm to personnel. A Caution
statement indicates a condition that can cause damage to equipment.
Important:
This instruction manual is not intended to include a comprehensive listing of all details for all
procedures required for installation, operation and maintenance. This manual describes general
guidelines that apply to most of the motor products shipped by Baldor. If you have a question
about a procedure or are uncertain about any detail, Do Not Proceed. Please contact your Baldor
distributor for more information or clarification.
Before you install, operate or perform maintenance, become familiar with the following:
S
NEMA Publication MG-2, Safety Standard for Construction and guide
for Selection, Installation and Use of Electric Motors and Generators.
S
The National Electrical Code
S
Local codes and Practices
Limited Warranty
1. Most Baldor products are warranted for 18 months from the date of shipment to Baldors customer from Baldors
district warehouse or, if applicable, from Baldors factory. Baldor StandardE standard efficient motors are
warranted for 24 months. StandardE is limited to three phase, general purpose, 1200 HP ratings that fall under
the Energy Policy Act (EPAct). Baldor SuperE premium efficient motors are warranted for 36 months. Baldor
IEEE841 motors are warranted for 60 months. All warranty claims must be submitted to a Baldor Service Center
prior to the expiration of the warranty period.
2. Baldor will, at its option repair or replace a motor which fails due to defects in material or workmanship during the
warranty period if:
a. the purchaser presents the defective motor at or ships it prepaid to, the Baldor plant in Fort Smith, Arkansas
or one of the Baldor Authorized Service Centers and
b. the purchaser gives written notification concerning the motor and the claimed defect including the date
purchased, the task performed by the Baldor motor and the problem encountered.
3. Baldor will not pay the cost of removal of any electric motor from any equipment, the cost of delivery to Fort Smith,
Arkansas or a Baldor Authorized Service Center, or the cost of any incidental or consequential damages resulting
from the claimed defects. (Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential
damages, so the above exclusion may not apply to you.) Any implied warranty given by laws shall be limited to
the duration of the warranty period hereunder. (Some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied
warranty lasts, so the above limitation may not apply to you.)
4. Baldor Authorized Service Centers, when convinced to their satisfaction that a Baldor motor developed defects in
material or workmanship within the warranty period, are authorized to proceed with the required repairs to fulfill
Baldors warranty when the cost of such repairs to be paid by Baldor does not exceed Baldors warranty repair
allowance. Baldor will not pay overtime premium repair charges without prior written authorization.
5. The cost of warranty repairs made by centers other than Baldor Authorized Service Centers WILL NOT be paid
unless first authorized in writing by Baldor.
6. Claims by a purchaser that a motor is defective even when a failure results within one hour after being placed into
service are not always justified. Therefore, Baldor Authorized Service Centers must determine from the condition
of the motor as delivered to the center whether or not the motor is defective. If in the opinion of a Baldor
Authorized Service Center, a motor did not fail as a result of defects in material or workmanship, the center is to
proceed with repairs only if the purchaser agrees to pay for such repairs. If the decision is in dispute, the
purchaser should still pay for the repairs and submit the paid invoice and the Authorized Service Centers signed
service report to Baldor for further consideration.
7. This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights which vary from state to state.
MN400
Table of Contents
Safety Notice:
This equipment contains high voltage! Electrical shock can cause serious or fatal injury.
Only qualified personnel should attempt installation, operation and maintenance of
electrical equipment.
Be sure that you are completely familiar with NEMA publication MG-2, safety standards
for construction and guide for selection, installation and use of electric motors and
generators, the National Electrical Code and local codes and practices. Unsafe
installation or use can cause conditions that lead to serious or fatal injury. Only qualified
personnel should attempt the installation, operation and maintenance of this equipment.
WARNING:
WARNING:
WARNING:
WARNING:
WARNING:
WARNING:
WARNING:
WARNING:
Use proper care and procedures that are safe during handling,
lifting, installing, operating and maintaining operations.
Improper methods may cause muscle strain or other harm.
WARNING:
WARNING:
WARNING:
Table of Contents
Section 1
General Information
Safety Notice Continued
WARNING:
WARNING:
Caution:
Caution:
Caution:
Do not lift the motor and its driven load by the motor lifting
hardware. The motor lifting hardware is adequate for lifting only the
motor. Disconnect the load from the motor shaft before moving the
motor.
Caution:
If eye bolts are used for lifting a motor, be sure they are securely
tightened. The lifting direction should not exceed a 20 angle from
the shank of the eye bolt or lifting lug. Excessive lifting angles can
cause damage.
Caution:
Caution:
If you have any questions or are uncertain about any statement or procedure, or if you
require additional information please contact your Baldor distributor or an Authorized
Baldor Service Center.
MN400
Table of Contents
Section 1
General Information
Receiving
Storage
Unpacking
Handling
Each Baldor Electric Motor is thoroughly tested at the factory and carefully packaged for
shipment. When you receive your motor, there are several things you should do
immediately.
1.
Observe the condition of the shipping container and report any damage
immediately to the commercial carrier that delivered your motor.
2.
Verify that the part number of the motor you received is the same as the part
number listed on your purchase order.
If the motor is not put into service immediately, the motor must be stored in a clean, dry
and warm location. Several precautionary steps must be performed to avoid motor
damage during storage.
1.
Use a Megger periodically to ensure that the integrity of the winding insulation
has been maintained. Record the Megger readings. Immediately investigate
any significant drop in insulation resistance.
2.
Do not lubricate bearings during storage. Motor bearings are packed with
grease at the factory. Excessive grease can damage insulation quality.
3.
Rotate motor shaft at least 10 turns every two months during storage (more
frequently if possible). This will prevent bearing damage due to storage.
4.
If the storage location is damp or humid, the motor windings must be protected
from moisture. This can be done by applying power to the motors space
heater (if available) while the motor is in storage.
Each Baldor motor is packaged for ease of handling and to prevent entry of
contaminants.
1.
To avoid condensation inside the motor, do not unpack until the motor has
reached room temperature. (Room temperature is the temperature of the room
in which it will be installed). The packing provides insulation from temperature
changes during transportation.
2.
When the motor has reached room temperature, remove all protective wrapping
material from the motor.
The motor should be lifted using the lifting lugs or eye bolts provided.
1.
Use the lugs or eye bolts provided to lift the motor. Never attempt to lift the
motor and additional equipment connected to the motor by this method. The
lugs or eye bolts provided are designed to lift only the motor. Never lift the
motor by the motor shaft or the hood of a WPII motor.
2.
When lifting a WPII (Weather Proof Type 2) motor, do not lift the motor by
inserting lifting lugs into holes on top of the cooling hood. These lugs are to be
used for hood removal only. A spreader bar should be used to lift the motor by
the cast lifting lugs located on the motor frame.
3.
If the motor must be mounted to a plate with the driven equipment such as
pump, compressor etc., it may not be possible to lift the motor alone. For this
case, the assembly should be lifted by a sling around the mounting base. The
entire assembly can be lifted as an assembly for installation. Do not lift using
the motor lugs or eye bolts provided.
If the load is unbalanced (as with couplings or additional attachments)
additional slings or other means must be used to prevent tipping. In any event,
the load must be secure before lifting.
MN400
Table of Contents
Section 2
Installation & Operation
Overview
Installation should conform to the National Electrical Code as well as local codes and
practices. When other devices are coupled to the motor shaft, be sure to install protective
devices to prevent future accidents. Some protective devices include, coupling, belt
guard, chain guard, shaft covers etc. These protect against accidental contact with
moving parts. Machinery that is accessible to personnel should provide further protection
in the form of guard rails, screening, warning signs etc.
Location
It is important that motors be installed in locations that are compatible with motor
enclosure and ambient conditions. Improper selection of the motor enclosure and
ambient conditions can lead to reduced operating life of the motor.
Proper ventilation for the motor must be provided. Obstructed airflow can lead to
reduction of motor life.
1.
Open DripProof/WPI motors are intended for use indoors where atmosphere is
relatively clean, dry, well ventilated and noncorrosive.
2.
Totally Enclosed and WPII motors may be installed where dirt, moisture or dust are
present and in outdoor locations.
Severe Duty, IEEE 841 and Washdown Duty enclosed motors are designed for
installations with high corrosion or excessive moisture conditions. These motors should
not be placed into an environment where there is the presence of flammable or
combustible vapors, dust or any combustible material, unless specifically designed for
this type of service.
Mounting
Alignment
Accurate alignment of the motor with the driven equipment is extremely important.
1.
Direct Coupling
For direct drive, use flexible couplings if possible. Consult the drive or equipment
manufacturer for more information. Mechanical vibration and roughness during
operation may indicate poor alignment. Use dial indicators to check alignment. The
space between coupling hubs should be maintained as recommended by the
coupling manufacturer.
2.
End-Play Adjustment
The axial position of the motor frame with respect to its load is also extremely
important. The motor bearings are not designed for excessive external axial thrust
loads. Improper adjustment will cause failure.
3.
Pulley Ratio
The pulley ratio should not exceed 8:1.
4.
Belt Drive
Align sheaves carefully to minimize belt wear and axial bearing loads (see End-Play
Adjustment). Belt tension should be sufficient to prevent belt slippage at rated speed
and load. However, belt slippage may occur during starting.
Caution:
5.
MN400
Table of Contents
Section 1
General Information
Doweling & Bolting
Power Connection
After proper alignment is verified, dowel pins should be inserted through the motor feet
into the foundation. This will maintain the correct motor position should motor removal be
required. (Baldor motors are designed for doweling.)
1.
Drill dowel holes in diagonally opposite motor feet in the locations provided.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Motor and control wiring, overload protection, disconnects, accessories and grounding
should conform to the National Electrical Code and local codes and practices.
Conduit Box
For ease of making connections, an oversize conduit box is provided. The box can be
rotated 360 in 90 increments. Auxiliary conduit boxes are provided on some motors for
accessories such as space heaters, RTDs etc.
AC Power
Connect the motor leads as shown on the connection diagram located on the name plate
or inside the cover on the conduit box. Be sure the following guidelines are met:
1.
AC power is within 10% of rated voltage with rated frequency. (See motor name
plate for ratings).
OR
2.
3.
Performance within these voltage and frequency variations are shown in Figure 2-2.
MN400
Table of Contents
Section 1
General Information
+20
+15
Full -Load
Current
+10
+5
Full -Load
Current
Power
Factor
0
5
Efficiency
Efficiency
10
15
20
Power
Factor
Maximum
Torque
15
10
+5
+10
+15
MN400
Table of Contents
Section 1
General Information
First Time Start Up
Be sure that all power to motor and accessories is off. Be sure the motor shaft is
disconnected from the load and will not cause mechanical rotation of the motor shaft.
1.
Make sure that the mechanical installation is secure. All bolts and nuts are tightened
etc.
2.
If motor has been in storage or idle for some time, check winding insulation integrity
with a Megger.
3.
4.
Be sure all shipping materials and braces (if used) are removed from motor shaft.
5.
6.
Replace all panels and covers that were removed during installation.
7.
Momentarily apply power and check the direction of rotation of the motor shaft.
8.
If motor rotation is wrong, be sure power is off and change the motor lead
connections. Verify rotation direction before you continue.
9.
Start the motor and ensure operation is smooth without excessive vibration or noise.
If so, run the motor for 1 hour with no load connected.
10. After 1 hour of operation, disconnect power and connect the load to the motor shaft.
Verify all coupling guards and protective devices are installed. Ensure motor is
properly ventilated.
Coupled Start Up
This procedure assumes a coupled start up. Also, that the first time start up procedure
was successful.
1.
Check the coupling and ensure that all guards and protective devices are installed.
2.
3.
The first coupled start up should be with no load. Apply power and verify that the
load is not transmitting excessive vibration back to the motor though the coupling or
the foundation. Vibration should be at an acceptable level.
4.
Run for approximately 1 hour with the driven equipment in an unloaded condition.
The equipment can now be loaded and operated within specified limits. Do not exceed
the name plate ratings for amperes for steady continuous loads.
Jogging and Repeated Starts Repeated starts and/or jogs of induction motors generally reduce the life of the motor
MN400
Table of Contents
Section 3
Maintenance & Troubleshooting
WARNING:
General Inspection
Inspect the motor at regular intervals, approximately every 500 hours of operation or
every 3 months, whichever occurs first. Keep the motor clean and the ventilation
openings clear. The following steps should be performed at each inspection:
WARNING:
Type of Grease
1.
Check that the motor is clean. Check that the interior and exterior of the motor
is free of dirt, oil, grease, water, etc. Oily vapor, paper pulp, textile lint, etc. can
accumulate and block motor ventilation. If the motor is not properly ventilated,
overheating can occur and cause early motor failure.
2.
3.
Bearing grease will lose its lubricating ability over time, not suddenly. The lubricating
ability of a grease (over time) depends primarily on the type of grease, the size of the
bearing, the speed at which the bearing operates and the severity of the operating
conditions. Good results can be obtained if the following recommendations are used in
your maintenance program.
A high grade ball or roller bearing grease should be used. Recommended grease for
standard service conditions is Polyrex EM (Exxon Mobil).
Equivalent and compatible greases include:
Texaco Polystar, Rykon Premium #2, Pennzoil Pen 2 Lube and Chevron SRI.
Relubrication Intervals
10000
**
6000
2700 Hrs.
**
**
**
1200
18000 Hrs.
15000 Hrs.
12000 Hrs.
7400 Hrs.
900
22000 Hrs.
18000 Hrs.
15000 Hrs.
10500 Hrs.
**
For motors operating at speeds greater than 3600 RPM, contact Baldor for relubrication recommendations.
MN400
Table of Contents
Low Temperature
Ambient Temperature
Maximum
40 C
50 C
>50 C* or
Class H Insulation
<29 C **
Atmospheric
Contamination
Clean, Little Corrosion
Moderate dirt, Corrosion
Severe dirt, Abrasive dust, Corrosion, Heavy
Shock or Vibration
Special high temperature grease is recommended (Dow Corning DC44). Note that Dow Corning DC44 grease does
not mix with other grease types. Thoroughly clean bearing & cavity before adding grease.
**
Multiplier
1.0
0.5
0.1
1.0
Some motor designs use different bearings on each motor end. This is normally indicated on the motor nameplate.
In this case, the larger bearing is installed on the motor Drive endplate. For best relubrication results, only use the
appropriate amount of grease for each bearing size (not the same for both).
Bearing Description
(These are the Large bearings (Shaft End) in each frame size)
Volume of grease
Weight of Grease to
to be added
Bearing
add *
in3
teaspoon
oz (Grams)
6203
0.08 (2.4)
0.15
0.5
6205
0.15 (3.9)
0.2
0.8
6206
0.19 (5.0)
0.3
1.0
6307
0.30 (8.4)
0.6
2.0
6309
0.47 (12.5)
0.7
2.5
6311
0.61 (17)
1.2
3.9
6312
0.76 (20.1)
1.2
4.0
6313
0.81 (23)
1.5
5.2
6316
1.25 (33)
2.0
6.6
6319
2.12 (60)
4.1
13.4
6328
4.70 (130)
9.2
30.0
NU328
4.70 (130)
9.2
30.0
NU319
2.12 (60)
4.1
13.4
6207
6210
6213
0.22 (6.1)
0.32 (9.0)
0.49 (14.0)
0.44
0.64
0.99
1.4
2.1
3.3
MN400
Table of Contents
Caution: To avoid damage to motor bearings, grease must be kept free of dirt.
For an extremely dirty environment, contact your Baldor distributor or
an authorized Baldor Service Center for additional information.
Relubrication Procedure Be sure that the grease you are adding to the motor is compatible with the grease
already in the motor. Consult your Baldor distributor or an authorized service center if a
grease other than the recommended type is to be used.
Caution: Do not overlubricate motor as this may cause premature bearing
failure.
With Grease Outlet Plug
1.
With the motor stopped, clean all grease fittings with a clean cloth.
2.
Caution:
3.
4.
5.
2.
3.
2.
3.
Table 3-4 shows that 1.2 in3 or 3.9 teaspoon of grease is to be added.
Note: Smaller bearings in size category may require reduced amounts of grease.
MN400
Table of Contents
Section 1
General Information
Table 3-5 Troubleshooting Chart
Symptom
Motor will not start
Excessive humming
g
Motor Over Heating
Possible Causes
Usually caused by line trouble, such
as, single phasing at the starter.
High Voltage.
Eccentric air gap.
Overload. Compare actual amps
(measured) with nameplate rating.
Single Phasing.
Improper ventilation.
Unbalanced voltage.
Rotor rubbing
g on stator.
Over voltage or under voltage.
Open stator winding.
Grounded winding.
Improper connections.
Bearing
g Over Heating
g
Misalignment.
Excessive belt tension.
Excessive end thrust.
Excessive grease in bearing.
Insufficient grease in bearing.
Dirt in bearing.
Vibration
Misalignment.
Rubbing between rotating parts and
stationary parts.
Rotor out of balance.
Resonance.
Noise
Growling or whining
Possible Solutions
Check source of power. Check overloads, fuses,
controls, etc.
Check input line connections.
Have motor serviced at local Baldor service center.
Locate and remove source of excessive friction in
motor or load.
Reduce load or replace with motor of greater capacity.
Check current at all phases (should be approximately
equal) to isolate and correct the problem.
Check external cooling fan to be sure air is moving
properly across cooling fins.
Excessive dirt build-up on motor. Clean motor.
Check voltage at all phases (should be approximately
equal) to isolate and correct the problem.
Check air gap clearance and bearings.
Tighten Thru Bolts.
Check input voltage at each phase to motor.
Check stator resistance at all three phases for
balance.
Perform dielectric test and repair as required.
Inspect all electrical connections for proper
termination, clearance, mechanical strength and
electrical continuity. Refer to motor lead connection
diagram.
Check and align motor and driven equipment.
Reduce belt tension to proper point for load.
Reduce the end thrust from driven machine.
Remove grease until cavity is approximately 3/4 filled.
Add grease until cavity is approximately 3/4 filled.
Clean bearing cavity and bearing. Repack with correct
grease until cavity is approximately 3/4 filled.
Check and align motor and driven equipment.
Isolate and eliminate cause of rubbing.
Have rotor balance checked are repaired at your
Baldor Service Center.
Tune system or contact your Baldor Service Center
for assistance.
Remove rotor and foreign material. Reinstall rotor.
Check insulation integrity. Clean ventilation openings.
Replace bearing. Clean all grease from cavity and
new bearing. Repack with correct grease until cavity
is approximately 3/4 filled.
MN400
Table of Contents
Alarm
Trip
Alarm
3 Rated Load
155
165
175
Rated Load
160
165
180
to 1.15 S.F.
Note: S Winding RTDs are factory production installed, not from ModExpress.
S When Class H temperatures are used, consider bearing temperatures and relubrication requirements.
Trip
185
185
Trip
95
110
Greases that may be substituted that are compatible with Polyrex EM (but considered as
standard lubricants) include the following:
Texaco Polystar
Rykon Premium #2
Chevron SRI #2
Mobilith SHC100
Pennzoil Pennzlube EM2
Chevron Black Pearl
Darmex 707
Darmex 711
PetroCanada Peerless LLG
MN400
Table of Contents
MN400
Table of Contents
Baldor District Offices Baldor District Offices Baldor District Offices
Table of Contents
Printed in USA
2/07
Table of Contents
Stock P/N FE11790 / Madison P/N ARTS-01-A-0-0-B00-060-0.875
MADISON
ELECTRIC PRODUCTS
A THERMOTION LLC COMPANY
C-F
ace Ring Tac
hometer
s
C-Face
achometer
hometers
Features
Table of Contents
MADISON
ELECTRIC PRODUCTS
A THERMOTION LLC COMPANY
C-F
ace Ring Tac
hometer
s
C-Face
achometer
hometers
include
Applications inc
lude
Rate meters analog or digital
Speed switches
Direction sensing
Closed loop feedback
Intrinsically safe barriers
On-the-floor monitoring
Application notes
One of the biggest complaints heard on the floor of
plants and factories is the failure rate of nonindustrialized optical encoders. By applying variable
reluctance and Hall effect technology, Madison
Electric pickups are not affected by dust, oil, grease,
dirt, etcas happens with some optical sensors. The
sensors in the Madison Electric ring tachometer can
handle shock and vibrations that hinder most highresolution encoders. Built tough to last in harsh
industrial environments, the Madison Electric ring
tachometer withstands shock, dirt, and vibrations that
stop most high-resolution encoders.
To satisfy single-shafted motors without the standard
NEMA C-Face, Madison Electric has worked with
companies and their engineers to design and
produce customized ring tachometers to accommodate almost any motor manufactured.
Table of Contents
MADISON
ELECTRIC PRODUCTS
A THERMOTION LLC COMPANY
C-F
ace Ring Tac
hometer
s
C-Face
achometer
hometers
Listed in the chart below are the common NEMA motor frames and corresponding Madison Electric Products
frame code designation. A shaded Madison Code # indicates a non-stocking special order item.
Madison Code
Frame Siz
e
Size
Pilot
Pilot Depth
Bolt Cir
cle
Circ
OD
Shaft
00
48C
3.000
0.125
3.750
5.625
0.500
01
56C
143TC
145TC
182C
184C
4.500
0.125
5.875
6.500
0.625
0.875
0.875
0.875
0.875
02
182TC
184TC
213C
215C
213TC
215TC
254TC
246TC
254TC
256TC
8.500
0.250
7.250
9.000
1.125
1.125
1.125
1.125
1.375
1.375
1.375
1.375
1.625
1.625
03
284UC
286UC
284TC
286TC
10.500
0.250
9.000
11.250
1.625
1.625
1.875
1.875
04
324UC
326UC
324TC
326TC
12.500
0.250
11.000
13.375
1.875
1.875
2.125
2.125
Table of Contents
MADISON
ELECTRIC PRODUCTS
A THERMOTION LLC COMPANY
C-F
ace Ring Tac
hometer
s
C-Face
achometer
hometers
Listed in the chart below are the common IEC (metric) frames and corresponding Madison Electric Products
frame code designation. A shaded Madison Code # indicates a non-stocking special order item.
B5 Flange
B14 Face
IEC
Frame
Madison
Code
Pilot
Pilot
Depth
Bolt
cle
Circ
Cir
OD
Madison
Code
Pilot
Pilot
Depth
Bolt
cle
Circ
Cir
OD
63
29
95
3.740
3
0.118
115
4.528
140
5.512
27
60
2.362
2.5
0.098
75
2.953
90
3.54
71
30
110
4.331
3.5
0.138
130
5.118
160
6.299
28
70
2.765
2.5
0.098
85
3.347
105
4.13
80
31
130
5.118
3.5
0.138
165
6.496
200
7.874
80
3.150
3
0.118
100
3.937
120
4.724
90
31
130
5.118
3.5
0.138
165
6.496
200
7.874
29
95
3.740
3
0.118
115
4.530
140
5.512
100
32
180
7.087
4
0.160
215
8.465
250
9.842
30
110
4.331
3.5
0.138
130
5.118
160
6.299
112
32
180
7.087
4
0.160
215
8.465
250
9.842
30
110
4.331
3.5
0.138
130
5.118
160
6.299
132
33
230
9.055
4
0.160
265
10.433
300
11.811
31
130
5.118
3.5
0.138
165
6.496
200
7.874
160
34
250
9.842
5
0.200
300
11.811
350
13.78
32
180
7.087
4
0.160
215
8.465
250
9.842
(mm
in.)
Table of Contents
MADISON
ELECTRIC PRODUCTS
A THERMOTION LLC COMPANY
Play
ARTS-01/02
Plug n Pla
y Model AR
TS-01/02
achometer
Face-Mounted
Nema C F
ace-Mounted Motor Ring Tac
hometer Kits
Description
Models ARTS-01/02 Ring Tachometers are easily installed on footmounted motors with C face mount end bells, or between a motor
and gear case flange. The one piece cast aluminum ARTS Ring Tach
and junction box is precision machined with a factory pre-set sensor
gap. With our unique design, the sensor drops in at a constant
predetermined gap, and is ready for immediate installation.
Wiring connections to the sensor are made through the gasketed junction
box lid, and provide right or left conduit entry. A thread plug is provided
with the kit for sealing the unused conduit entry.
Combining a Madison Electric Ring Tachometer with our Model A300
Analog Rate Indication Meter or our Model ADT-800 Digital Rate Meter
completes your speed sensing and rate indication system.
Table of Contents
MADISON
ELECTRIC PRODUCTS
A THERMOTION LLC COMPANY
.373
.370
20 GA.
MADISON
1500-2510
6.00"
2.50"
.096
P-P VOLTAGE
50
40
30
20
10
0
0.000
0.005
0.010
0.015
0.020
AIRGAP
70
P-P VOLTAGE
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
0.000
0.005
0.010
AIRGAP
0.015
0.020
Table of Contents
MADISON
ELECTRIC PRODUCTS
A THERMOTION LLC COMPANY
.373
.370
SHIELD WIRE
PVC JACKET
WHITE
BLACK
RED
MADISON
1500-2610
2.50"
6.00"
Shaft Dia.
(Gear Bore)
Ring No.
Gear p/n
(Ref)
56C
5/8"
ARTS-01
4000-0902
7/8"
ARTS-01
4000-0903
1-1/8"
ARTS-02
4000-0908
ALL WIRE
ENDS TINNED
20 GA.
Sensor
Motor Frame Size
1-3/8"
1-5/8"
ARTS-02
ARTS-02
4000-0909
4000-0910
Magnetic
Pick-up
Hall Effect
Speed
Sensor
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Table of Contents
MADISON
ELECTRIC PRODUCTS
A THERMOTION LLC COMPANY
Hubless gears are well suited for mounting in limited spaces or when a
motor application has a short stub shaft. Split gears are convenient when
a shaft end is not available to mount a hubless gear.
Hub
less Type Gear
Hubless
Gear Type
No.
Stock Bore
Diametral
of
+0.003
Pitch
Teeth
-0.000
10T
10T
10T
30T
30T
30T
30T
30T
60T
60T
60T
60T
60T
60T
60T
60T
60T
60T
Hubless type
60T
gear applicable
60T
for Plug-n-Play
60T
60T
60T
60T
60T
120T
120T
120T
120T
120T
120T
120T
120T
120T
120T
120T
240T
240T
8DP
8DP
5DP
5DP
5DP
16DP
16DP
16DP
16DP
16DP
16DP
16DP
16DP
16DP
10DP
10DP
10DP
10DP
10DP
10DP
10DP
10DP
31DP
31DP
31DP
31DP
21DP
21DP
21DP
21DP
21DP
21DP
21DP
41DP
41DP
0.625
0.875
1.125
0.625
0.875
1.125
1.375
1.625
0.375
0.500
0.625
0.750
0.875
14mm
19mm
24mm
28mm
1.125
1.375
1.625
1.875
2.000
38mm
2.250
2.437
0.625
0.750
0.875
1.000
28mm
1.125
1.250
1.375
1.500
1.625
3.000
0.625
1.125
O.D.
+0.000
-0.005
3.750
3.750
5.750
3.875
3.875
5.880
5.880
5.880
3.875
3.875
3.875
3.875
3.875
3.875
3.875
3.875
3.875
5.880
5.880
5.880
5.880
5.880
5.880
5.880
5.880
3.875
3.875
3.875
3.875
5.880
5.880
5.880
5.880
5.880
5.880
5.880
5.880
5.880
Hub
Dia. "D"
0.010
Proj. "P"
0.020
Face "F"
0.020
0.500
0.500
0.500
0.500
0.500
0.500
0.500
0.500
0.500
0.500
0.500
0.500
0.500
0.500
0.500
0.500
0.500
0.500
0.500
0.500
0.500
0.500
0.500
0.500
0.500
0.500
0.500
0.500
0.500
0.500
0.500
0.500
0.500
0.500
0.500
0.500
0.500
0.500
Recommended
Torque for
Set Screws
55 in. lbs.
55 in. lbs.
55 in. lbs.
55 in. lbs.
55 in. lbs.
55 in. lbs.
55 in. lbs.
55 in. lbs.
55 in. lbs.
55 in. lbs.
55 in. lbs.
55 in. lbs.
55 in. lbs.
55 in. lbs.
55 in. lbs.
55 in. lbs.
55 in. lbs.
55 in. lbs.
55 in. lbs.
55 in. lbs.
55 in. lbs.
55 in. lbs.
55 in. lbs.
55 in. lbs.
55 in. lbs.
55 in. lbs.
55 in. lbs.
55 in. lbs.
55 in. lbs.
55 in. lbs.
55 in. lbs.
55 in. lbs.
55 in. lbs.
55 in. lbs.
55 in. lbs.
55 in. lbs.
55 in. lbs.
55 in. lbs.
Recommended
Maximum Gear
Speeds
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
Part
Number
4000-0110
4000-0112
4000-0115
4000-0702
4000-0703
4000-0710
4000-0712
4000-0714
4000-0900
4000-0901
4000-0902
4000-0920
4000-0903
4000-0904
4000-0905
4000-0906
4000-0907
4000-0908
4000-0909
4000-0910
4000-0911
4000-0912
4000-0913
4000-0914
4000-0916
4000-1010
4000-1011
4000-1012
4000-1013
4000-1019
4000-1020
4000-1021
4000-1022
4000-1024
4000-1025
4000-1026
4000-1035
4000-1040
Table of Contents
MADISON
Gear Type
No.
Stock Bore
Diametral
of
+0.003
Pitch
Teeth
-0.000
30T
60T
60T
60T
60T
60T
60T
120T
120T
120T
Hub type gear
120T
not applicable
120T
for Plug-n-Play
120T
200T
200T
200T
200T
200T
200T
200T
200T
200T
8DP
23DP
23DP
23DP
11DP
11DP
11DP
42DP
36DP
36DP
24DP
24DP
24DP
42DP
42DP
42DP
42DP
42DP
42DP
48DP
48DP
42DP
ELECTRIC PRODUCTS
1.125
0.500
0.625
0.875
1.125
1.375
1.625
0.500
0.625
0.875
1.125
1.375
1.625
0.625
0.875
1.125
1.250
1.375
1.625
14mm
25mm
30mm
O.D.
+0.000
-0.005
3.988
2.570
2.570
2.570
5.360
5.360
5.360
2.895
3.377
3.377
5.098
5.098
5.098
4.810
4.810
4.810
4.810
4.810
4.810
4.210
4.210
4.810
Hub
Dia. "D"
0.010
2.500
1.250
1.250
1.500
2.000
2.000
2.500
1.380
2.000
2.000
3.000
3.000
3.000
3.000
3.000
3.000
3.000
3.000
3.000
2.000
2.000
2.060
Proj. "P"
0.020
0.300
0.300
0.300
0.300
0.300
0.300
0.300
0.300
0.300
0.300
0.300
0.300
0.300
0.300
0.300
0.300
0.300
0.300
0.300
0.300
0.300
0.300
Face "F"
0.020
0.312
0.170
0.170
0.170
0.200
0.200
0.200
0.250
0.250
0.250
0.250
0.250
0.250
0.250
0.250
0.250
0.250
0.250
0.250
0.250
0.250
0.250
Recommended
Torque for
Set Screws
55 in.
55 in.
55 in.
55 in.
55 in.
55 in.
55 in.
55 in.
55 in.
55 in.
55 in.
55 in.
55 in.
55 in.
55 in.
55 in.
55 in.
55 in.
55 in.
55 in.
55 in.
55 in.
lbs.
lbs.
lbs.
lbs.
lbs.
lbs.
lbs.
lbs.
lbs.
lbs.
lbs.
lbs.
lbs.
lbs.
lbs.
lbs.
lbs.
lbs.
lbs.
lbs.
lbs.
lbs.
Recommended
Maximum Gear
Speeds
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
5000 RPM
Part
Number
4000-3400
4000-1100
4000-0970
4000-0975
4000-1600
4000-1610
4000-1620
4000-2001
4000-2000
4000-2010
4000-2200
4000-2210
4000-2220
4000-4300
4000-4310
4000-4320
4000-4360
4000-4377
4000-4380
4000-4500
4000-4515
4000-4370
Definitions
Pitch The distance between similar, equally spaced tooth surfaces, in
a given direction and along a given curve or line. The single word pitch
without qualification has been used to designate circular pitch, axial
pitch, and diametral pitch, but such confusing usage should be avoided.
Pressure Angle The angle between a tooth profile and a radial line at
its pitch point. This has no significant effect on performance of the gear
for exciting magnetic pickups. Pickups can be used with any pressure
angle.
Formulas
Diametral Pitch =
Outside Diameter =
Number of Teeth
Pitch Diameter
Number of teeth + 2
Diametral Pitch
RPM x OD x
60
RPM x Number of gear teeth
60
Table of Contents
MADISON
ELECTRIC PRODUCTS
A THERMOTION LLC COMPANY
C-Face
NEMA C-F
ace & IEC Metric Motor Frame Mounted
Ordering
Information
achometer
Ring Tac
hometer Or
dering Inf
ormation
To order fill in the following part numbers:
ART
Channels
SQDP-
Single
Quad
Dual
Parallel
Frame Size
00 01 02 03 04 30 31 32 33 34 -
3.0 NEMA
4.5 NEMA
8.5 NEMA
10.5 NEMA
12.5 NEMA
Metric 71D
Metric 80D/90D
Metric 100D/112D
Metric 132D
Metric 160D
Pick-Up
A - Analog
Z - Hall Effect
Y - Hall Effect
w/o resistor
L - Hall Effect w/
Line Driver
Differential Terminal
Driver
Block
1 - Yes
1 - Yes
0 - No
0 - No
99 - Special Frame
(consult factory)
Lid Code
M00 - Madison
B00 - Blank
Cxx - Custom
Gear
PPR
010
030
060
120
200
240
Shaft
Size
0.500
0.625
0.875
1.125
1.375
1.625
1.875
14mm
19mm
24mm
28mm
30mm
38mm
42mm
ARTS-01-Z-1-1-B00-060-0.625
When ordering, fill in the above chart to determine your part number. Motor frame sizes can be found in the charts in this
section. If you are unable to find your motor frame or require an OEM custom lid, please contact the Madison Electric
Sales Department (800-424-5757).
Table of Contents
MC1000 Series
Table of Contents
NOTE!
The manual covers software version M108314 and above.
See paramter 63 for the software version of the drive you are working with.
If you are working with an earlier software releaas, you will not have all of
the functionality described in this manual, but the functionlity of the drive is
fully documented in this manual.
If you are working with M108313 or ealier, parameters 69 and 70 are
described in this manual as parameters 98 and 99.
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
6.0
6.1
6.2
7.0
7.1
7.2
8.0
8.1
8.2
9.0
10.0
11.0
12.0
13.0
GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
PRODUCTS COVERED IN THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
PRODUCT CHANGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
WARRANTY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
RECEIVING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
CUSTOMER MODIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
MC1000 SPECIFICATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
MC1000 MODEL DESIGNATION CODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
MC1000 DIMENSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
MC1000 RATINGS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
THEORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
DESCRIPTION OF AC MOTOR OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
DRIVE FUNCTION DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
INSTALLATION AFTER A LONG PERIOD OF STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
EXPLOSION PROOF APPLICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
INPUT AC REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
INPUT AC POWER REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
INPUT FUSING AND DISCONNECT REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
VOLTAGE SELECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POWER WIRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MC1000 POWER WIRING DIAGRAM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INITIAL POWER UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KEYPAD CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21
21
22
23
24
14.0
15.0
15.1
15.2
15.3
15.4
16.0
CONTROL WIRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
MC1000 CONTROL WIRING DIAGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
MC1000 TERMINAL STRIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
TWO-WIRE START/STOP CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
THREE-WIRE START/STOP CONTROL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
SPEED POT AND PRESET SPEED CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
17.0
18.0
19.0
19.1
19.2
19.3
19.4
19.5
19.6
20.0
21.0
PARAMETER MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
MC1000 PID SET POINT CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
FEEDBACK DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
THE SYSTEM - DIRECT AND REVERSE ACTING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
PID CONTROL - DIRECT AND REVERSE ACTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
SET POINT REFERENCE SOURCES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
TUNING THE PID CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
MC1000 DISPLAY IN PID MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
TROUBLESHOOTING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
USER SETTING RECORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
1.0
1.1
GENERAL
PRODUCTS COVERED IN THIS MANUAL
This manual covers the AC Tech MC1000 Series Variable Frequency Drive.
1.2
PRODUCT CHANGES
1.3
WARRANTY
1.4
RECEIVING
Inspect all cartons for damage which may have occurred during shipping. Carefully
unpack equipment and inspect thoroughly for damage or shortage. Report
any damage to carrier and/or shortages to supplier. All major components and
connections should be examined for damage and tightness, with special attention
given to PC boards, plugs, knobs and switches.
1.5
CUSTOMER MODIFICATION
Table of Contents
2.0
MC1000 SPECIFICATIONS
Storage Temperature
-20 to 70 C
-10 to 55 C
-10 to 50 C
-10 to 40 C
-10 to 40 C
Ambient Humidity
Altitude
+10%, -15%
48 to 62 Hz
Output Frequency
Carrier Frequency
Frequency Stability
+0.00006% / C
Service Factor
1.00
Efciency
> 0.96
Control Voltage
15 VDC
Analog Outputs
0 - 10 VDC, or 2 - 10 VDC
Proportional to speed and load
Digital Outputs
Table of Contents
3.0
The model number of an MC1000 Series drive gives a full description of the basic
drive unit (see example below).
EXAMPLE: M1450BP
(MC1000, 480 Vac, 5 HP, Type 1 Enclosure, with a Remote Keypad Assembly)
M1
50
Series:
M1
Input Voltage:
1 = 240/120 Vac (For 110, 115, 120, 230 and 240 Vac; 50 or 60 Hz)
2 = 240/200 Vac (For 208, 230, and 240 Vac; 50 or 60 Hz)
4 = 480/400 Vac (For 380, 415, 440, 460 and 480 Vac; 50 or 60 Hz)
5 = 590/480 Vac (For 440, 460, 480, 575 and 600 Vac; 50 or 60 Hz)
Rating:
03 = HP (0.18 kW)
75 = 7 HP (5.5 kW)
05 = HP (0.37 kW)
10 = 1 HP (0.75 kW)
15 = 1 HP (1.1 kW)
1000
20 = 2 HP (1.5 kW)
30 = 3 HP (2.2 kW)
50 / 51 = 5 HP (3.7 kW)
400 = 40 HP (30vkW)
Input Phase:
S = Single phase input only.
No character indicates three phase input only
Enclosure Type:
B = NEMA 1 - General Purpose, vented
C = NEMA 4 - Water-tight and Dust-tight
D = NEMA 12 - Oil-tight and Dust-tight
E = NEMA 4X - Water-tight, Dust-tight, and Corrosion Resistant (Stainless Steel)
Standard Options:
H = Additional Form C Relay circuit board
J = Dynamic Braking circuit board
K = Dynamic Braking & Additional Form C Relay board (not available on all HP sizes - consult factory)
No character when this type of option is not specied
Interface Options:
P = Remote keypad assembly
No character when this type of option is not specied
Table of Contents
4.0
MC1000 DIMENSIONS
4.1
Conduit Holes:
S Dia.
0.88" Dia.
U
V
1.00"
S Dia.
IF W = 10.26"
T = 0.28"
U = 0.44"
V = 0.24"
P
R
T
Dia. Slot
IF W < 7.86"
T = 0.20"
U = 0.34"
V = 0.19"
HP
(kW)
INPUT
VOLTAGE
0.25
(0.18)
0.5
(0.37)
1
(0.75)
1.5
(1.1)
4.70
3.33
2.35
1.60
1.37
5.50
0.88
6.12
3.63
3.77
1.80
1.37
5.50
0.88
M1205SB 7.50
4.70
3.63
2.35
1.90
1.37
5.50
0.88
M1205B
7.50
4.70
3.63
2.35
1.90
1.37
5.50
0.88
6.12
4.22
3.77
2.40
1.37
5.50
0.88
M1210SB 7.50
4.70
4.33
2.35
2.60
1.37
5.50
0.88
M1210B
4.70
4.33
2.35
2.60
1.37
5.50
0.88
240
240/200
240
240 / 200
7.50
480 / 400
M1410B
7.50
4.70
3.63
2.35
1.90
1.37
5.50
0.88
590
M1510B
7.50
4.70
3.63
2.35
1.90
1.37
5.50
0.88
240/120
M1115SB 7.50
6.12
4.22
3.77
2.40
1.37
5.50
0.88
240
M1215SB 7.50
6.12
4.22
3.77
2.40
1.37
5.50
0.88
M1215B
7.50
4.70
4.33
2.35
2.60
1.37
5.50
0.88
M1220SB 7.50
6.12
5.12
3.77
3.30
1.37
5.50
0.88
M1220B
6.12
5.12
3.77
3.30
1.37
5.50
0.88
240/200
240
2
(1.5)
MODEL
240 / 200
7.50
480/400
M1420B
7.50
6.12
4.22
3.77
2.40
1.37
5.50
0.88
590
M1520B
7.50
6.12
4.22
3.77
2.40
1.37
5.50
0.88
Table of Contents
TYPE 1 DIMENSIONS (continued)
HP
(kW)
INPUT
VOLTAGE
3
(2.2)
240 / 200
M1230SB 7.50
6.12
5.12
3.77
3.30
1.37
5.50
0.88
M1230B
7.50
6.12
5.12
3.77
3.30
1.37
5.50
0.88
480 / 400
M1430B
7.50
6.12
5.12
3.77
3.30
1.37
5.50
0.88
590
M1530B
7.50
6.12
5.12
3.77
3.30
1.37
5.50
0.88
240 / 200
M1250B
7.88
7.86
5.94
5.13
3.95
1.50
5.88
1.13
480 / 400
M1450B
7.50
6.12
5.12
3.77
3.30
1.37
5.50
0.88
590
M1551B
7.88
7.86
5.94
5.13
3.95
1.50
5.88
1.13
240 / 200
M1275B
9.38
7.86
6.84
3.93
4.19
2.00
5.88
1.13
480 / 400
M1475B
9.38
7.86
6.25
5.13
3.95
1.50
7.38
1.13
590
M1575B
9.38
240
5
(3.7)
7.5
(5.5)
MODEL
7.86
6.25
5.13
3.95
1.50
7.38
1.13
6.84
3.93
4.19
2.00
7.75
1.38
7.86
6.84
3.93
4.19
2.00
5.88
1.13
7.86
7.40
3.93
4.19
2.00
5.88
1.13
240/200
6.84
3.93
4.19
2.00
9.25
1.38
480/400
6.84
3.93
4.19
2.00
7.75
1.38
590
6.84
3.93
4.19
2.00
9.75
1.38
5.13
5.00
2.50
9.25
1.38
480/400
6.84
3.93
4.19
2.00
9.25
1.38
590
7.40
3.93
4.19
2.00
9.25
1.38
5.13
5.00
480/400
5.13
5.00
2.50
9.25
1.38
590
5.13
5.00
2.50
9.25
1.38
5.13
5.00
480/400
5.13
5.00
2.50
9.25
1.38
590
5.13
5.00
2.50
9.25
1.38
40
(30)
480/400
5.13
5.00
590
5.13
5.00
50
(37.5)
480/400
5.13
5.75
590
5.13
5.75
60
(45)
480/400
5.13
5.75
590
5.13
5.75
10
(7.5)
15
(11)
20
(15)
25
(18.5)
30
(22)
590
M15100B 9.38
Table of Contents
4.2
0.31"
IF W = 13.00"
1.50"
H
1.36"
0.36"
Dia.
Mounting Tab Detail
0.92"
Conduit Holes:
1.13" Dia.
S Dia.
0.43"
IF W > 16.64"
1.50"
3.00"
0.44"
Dia.
1.36"
HP/kW
INPUT
VOLTAGE
40/30
60/45
75/55
MODEL
6.50
6.50
2.62
1.38
See below
6.88
6.88
3.12
1.75
6.50
4.50
2.50
6.50
4.50
2.50
4.00"
4.00"
6.88"
See below
7.25"
9.00"
7.00"
9.00"
6.50"
Table of Contents
4.3
Conduit Holes:
Q
S Dia.
0.88" Dia.
S Dia.
1.00"
IF W > 10.26"
T = 0.28"
U = 0.44"
V = 0.24"
T
Dia. Slot
IF W < 7.86"
T = 0.20"
U = 0.34"
V = 0.19"
U
V
HP
(kW)
INPUT
VOLTAGE
MODEL
0.25
(0.18)
240 / 120
M1103S
7.88
6.12
3.63
3.06
2.00
1.37
5.88
0.88
240 / 120
M1105S
7.88
7.86
3.75
4.80
2.10
1.37
5.88
0.88
240
M1205S
7.88
6.12
4.35
3.06
2.70
1.37
5.88
0.88
0.5
(0.37)
1
(0.75)
1.5
(1.1)
2
(1.5)
3
(2.2)
240/200
M1205
7.88
6.12
4.35
3.06
2.70
1.37
5.88
0.88
240 / 200
M1110S
7.88
7.86
4.90
4.80
3.25
1.37
5.88
0.88
240
M1210S
7.88
6.12
4.35
3.06
2.70
1.37
5.88
0.88
240 / 200
M1210
7.88
6.12
4.35
3.06
2.70
1.37
5.88
0.88
480 / 400
M1410
7.88
6.12
4.35
3.06
2.70
1.37
5.88
0.88
590
M1510
7.88
6.12
4.35
3.06
2.70
1.37
5.88
0.88
240/120
M1115S
7.88
7.86
4.90
4.80
3.25
1.37
5.88
0.88
240
M1215S
7.88
7.86
4.90
4.80
3.25
1.37
5.88
0.88
240/200
M1215
7.88
6.12
5.25
3.06
3.60
1.37
5.88
0.88
240
M1220S
7.88
7.86
4.90
4.80
3.25
1.37
5.88
0.88
240 / 200
M1220
7.88
7.86
4.90
4.80
3.25
1.37
5.88
0.88
480/400
M1420
7.88
7.86
4.90
4.80
3.25
1.37
5.88
0.88
590
M1520
7.88
7.86
4.90
4.80
3.25
1.37
5.88
0.88
240
M1230S
7.88
7.86
5.90
4.80
4.25
1.37
5.88
0.88
240 / 200
M1230
7.88
7.86
5.90
4.80
4.25
1.37
5.88
0.88
480 / 400
M1430
7.88
7.86
4.90
4.80
3.25
1.37
5.88
0.88
590
M1530
7.88
7.86
4.90
4.80
3.25
1.37
5.88
0.88
Table of Contents
DIMENSIONS - TYPE 4, 4X, AND 12 ENCLOSED (continued)
HP
(kW)
5
(3.7)
7.5
(5.5)
10
(7.5)
15
(11)
20
(15)
25
(18.5)
30
(22)
INPUT
VOLTAGE
MODEL
240 / 200
M1250
480 / 400
M1450
590
5.13
5.25
2.00
7.75
1.13
7.88
7.86
5.90
4.80
4.25
1.37
5.88
0.88
M1550
7.88
7.86
5.90
4.80
4.25
1.37
5.88
0.88
240 / 200
M1275
5.13
5.75
2.00
9.75
1.13
480 / 400
M1475
5.13
5.25
2.00
7.75
1.13
590
M1575
5.13
5.25
2.00
7.75
1.13
240 / 200
5.13
5.75
480 / 400
5.13
5.75
2.00
9.75
1.13
590
5.13
5.75
2.00
9.75
1.13
240/200
5.13
5.75
480/400
5.13
5.75
590
5.13
5.75
5.13
5.75
480/400
5.13
5.75
590
5.13
5.75
5.13
5.75
5.13
5.75
5.13
5.75
5.13
5.75
590
5.13
5.75
5.13
5.75
40
(30)
5.13
5.75
5.13
5.75
50
(37.5)
5.13
6.10
5.13
6.10
60
(45)
5.13
6.10
5.13
6.10
590
590
590
590
Table of Contents
4.4
0.31"
1.36"
H
1.50"
0.36"
Dia.
IF W = 14.00"
Mounting Tab Detail
0.92"
Q
0.43"
Conduit Holes:
1.13" Dia.
1.36"
S Dia.
0.44"
Dia.
3.00"
P
1.50"
IF W > 18.00"
N
HP/kW
INPUT
VOLTAGE
75/55
MODEL
8.00
3.13
7.14
1.75
4.50
9.14
2.50
4.50
9.14
2.50
Table of Contents
5.0
MC1000 RATINGS
The following tables indicate the input and output ratings of the MC1000 Series.
NOTE: The output current ratings are based on operation at carrier frequencies
of 8 kHz and below. At full ambient temperature, operation at carrier frequencies
above 8 kHz require derating the drive by multiplying the output current rating by
the following factors: 0.94 at 10 kHz, 0.89 at 12 kHz, and 0.83 at 14 kHz. Refer to
Parameter 23 - CARRIER in Section 18.0 - DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS.
INPUT
OUTPUT
(0 - 230 Vac)
FOR MOTORS
MODEL
NUMBER1
1
2
NOMINAL
NOMINAL
INPUT
CURRENT
POWER
CURRENT
POWER
HP
kW
PHASE
(AMPS)
(KVA)
(AMPS)
(KVA)
M1103S
0.25
0.18
6.0 / 3.0
0.72
1.4 / 1.4
0.56
M1105S
0.5
0.37
9.2 / 4.6
1.1
2.2 / 2.2
0.88
M1110S
0.75
16.2 / 8.1
1.9
4.0 / 4.0
1.6
M1115S
1.5
1.1
21 / 10.4
2.5
5.2 / 5.2
2.1
RATED
10
Table of Contents
M1200 SERIES RATINGS
MODEL
INPUT
OUTPUT
(0 - 200/230 Vac)
FOR MOTORS
MODEL
NUMBER1
1
2
NOMINAL
NOMINAL
INPUT
CURRENT
POWER
CURRENT
POWER
HP
kW
PHASE
(AMPS)
(KVA)
(AMPS)
(KVA)
M1205S
0.5
0.37
5.8 / 5.0
1.2
2.5 / 2.2
0.9
M1205
0.5
0.37
3.1 / 2.7
1.1
2.5 / 2.2
0.9
M1210S
0.75
10.4 / 9.0
2.2
4.6 / 4.0
1.6
M1210
0.75
5.5 / 4.8
2.0
4.6 / 4.0
1.6
M1215S
1.5
1.1
13.3 / 11.6
2.8
6.0 / 5.2
2.1
M1215
1.5
1.1
7.1 / 6.2
2.6
6.0 / 5.2
2.1
M1220S
1.5
17.1 / 14.9
3.6
7.8 / 6.8
2.7
M1220
1.5
9.3 / 8.1
3.4
7.8 / 6.8
2.7
M1230S
2.2
24 / 21
5.0
11.0 / 9.6
3.8
M1230
2.2
13.0 / 11.3
4.7
11.0 / 9.6
3.8
M1250
3.7
20 / 17.7
7.4
17.5 / 15.2
6.1
M1275
7.5
5.5
30 / 26
10.6
25 / 22
8.8
M12100
10
7.5
37 / 32
13.2
32 / 28
11.2
M12150
15
11
55 / 48
19.8
48 / 42
16.7
M12200
20
15
70 / 61
25.3
62 / 54
21.5
M12250
25
18.5
89 / 77
32.0
78 / 68
27.1
M12300
30
22
104 / 90
37.6
92 / 80
31.9
M12400
40
30
119 / 99
41.0
120 / 104
41.4
M12600
60
45
174 / 145
60.5
177 / 154
61.3
RATED
11
Table of Contents
M1400 SERIES RATINGS
MODEL
INPUT
OUTPUT
(0 - 400/460 Vac)
FOR MOTORS
MODEL
NUMBER1
NOMINAL
NOMINAL
INPUT
CURRENT
POWER
CURRENT
POWER
HP
kW
PHASE
(AMPS)
(KVA)
(AMPS)
(KVA)
M1410
0.75
2.8 / 2.4
2.0
2.3 / 2.0
1.6
M1420
1.5
4.7 / 4.1
3.4
3.9 / 3.4
2.7
M1430
2.2
6.6 / 5.7
4.7
5.5 / 4.8
3.8
M1450
3.7
10.2 / 8.9
7.3
8.7 / 7.6
6.1
M1475
7.5
5.5
14.7 / 12.8
10.6
12.6 / 11.0
8.8
M14100
10
7.5
18.3 / 15.9
13.2
16.0 / 14.0
11.2
M14150
15
11
28 / 24
19.8
24 / 21
16.7
M14200
20
15
36 / 31
25.3
31 / 27
21.5
M14250
25
18.5
44 / 38
31.9
39 / 34
27.1
M14300
30
22
52 / 45
37.6
46 / 40
31.9
M14400
40
30
68 / 59
49.0
60 / 52
41.4
M14500
50
37.5
85 / 74
61.5
75 / 65
51.8
M14600
60
45
100 / 87
72.3
88 / 77
61.3
M14750
75
55
109 / 91
75.5
110 / 96
76.5
M141000
100
75
139 / 116
96.4
143 / 124
98.8
M141250
125
90
175 / 146
121.4
179 / 156
124.3
M141500
150
110
202 / 168
139.7
207 / 180
143.4
RATED
12
Table of Contents
M1500 SERIES RATINGS
MODEL
INPUT
OUTPUT
(0 - 460/575 Vac)
FOR MOTORS
MODEL
NUMBER1
NOMINAL
NOMINAL
INPUT
CURRENT
POWER
CURRENT
POWER
HP
kW
PHASE
(AMPS)
(KVA)
(AMPS)
(KVA)
M1510
0.75
1.9 / 1.9
1.9
1.6 / 1.6
1.6
M1520
1.5
3.3 / 3.3
3.4
2.7 / 2.7
2.7
M1530
2.2
4.6 / 4.6
4.7
3.9 / 3.9
3.9
M1550/51
3.7
7.1 / 7.1
7.3
6.1 / 6.1
6.1
M1575
7.5
5.5
10.5 / 10.5
10.7
9.0 / 9.0
8.8
M15100
10
7.5
12.5 / 12.5
12.8
11.0 / 11.0
11.0
M15150
15
11
19.3 / 19.3
19.7
17.0 / 17.0
16.9
M15200
20
15
25 / 25
25.4
22 / 22
21.5
M15250
25
18.5
31 / 31
31.2
27 / 27
26.9
M15300
30
22
36 / 36
37.1
32 / 32
31.9
M15400
40
30
47 / 47
47.5
41 / 41
40.8
M15500
50
37.5
59 / 59
60.3
52 / 52
51.8
M15600
60
45
71 / 71
72.5
62 / 62
61.7
RATED
13
Table of Contents
6.0
6.1
THEORY
DESCRIPTION OF AC MOTOR OPERATION
Three phase AC motors are comprised of two major components, the stator and
the rotor. The stator is a set of three electrical windings held stationary in the motor
housing. The rotor is a metal cylinder, xed to the motor drive shaft, which rotates
within the stator. The arrangement of the stator coils and the presence of three
phase AC voltage give rise to a rotating magnetic eld which drives the rotor. The
speed at which the magnetic eld rotates is known as the synchronous speed of
the motor. Synchronous speed is a function of the frequency at which the voltage
is alternating and the number of poles in the stator windings.
The following equation gives the relation between synchronous speed, frequency,
and the number of poles:
Ss = 120 f/p
Where: Ss = Synchronous speed (rpm ), f = frequency (Hz),
p = number of poles
In three phase induction motors the actual shaft speed differs from the synchronous
speed as load is applied. This difference is known as slip. Slip is commonly
expressed as a percentage of synchronous speed. A typical value is three percent
at full load.
The strength of the magnetic eld in the gap between the rotor and stator is
proportional to the amplitude of the voltage at a given frequency. The output torque
capability of the motor is, therefore, a function of the applied voltage amplitude at
a given frequency. When operated below base (rated) speed, AC motors run in
the range of constant torque. Constant torque output is obtained by maintaining
a constant ratio between voltage amplitude (Volts) and frequency (Hertz). For
60 Hz motors rated at 230, 460, and 575 Vac, common values for this V/Hz ratio
are 3.83, 7.66, and 9.58 respectively. Operating with these V/Hz ratios generally
yields optimum torque capability. Operating at lower ratio values results in lower
torque and power capability. Operating at higher ratio values will cause the motor
to overheat. Most standard motors are capable of providing full torque output from
3 to 60 Hz. However, at lower speeds, where motor cooling fans become less
effective, supplemental cooling may be needed to operate at full torque output
continuously.
If the frequency applied to the motor is increased while the voltage remains constant,
torque capability will decrease as speed increases. This will cause the horsepower
capability of the motor to remain approximately constant. Motors run in this mode
when operated above base speed, where drive output voltage is limited by the
input line voltage. This operating range is known as the constant horsepower
range. The typical maximum range for constant horsepower is about 2.3 to 1
(60 to 140 Hz). The diagram below depicts the characteristics of a typical AC
induction motor with a 60 Hz base speed.
WARNING!
14
Table of Contents
CONSTANT TORQUE
150
CONSTANT HP
130
TORQUE (%)
110
TORQUE
HORSEPOWER
TOR
90
QUE
ER
OW
70
EP
RS
HO
50
30
10
20
40
60
80
100
120
FREQUENCY (Hz)
6.1.1
Variable frequency drives, and the loads they are applied to, can generally be
divided into two groups: constant torque and variable torque. Constant torque loads
include: vibrating conveyors, punch presses, rock crushers, machine tools, and
just about every other application that is not considered variable torque. Variable
torque loads include centrifugal pumps and fans, which make up the majority of
HVAC applications.
Variable torque loads are governed by the afnity laws, which dene the relationships
between speed, ow, torque and horsepower. The diagram below illustrates these
relationships:
100%
75%
50%
OW
FL
UE
RQ
25%
TO
WE
PO
E
RS
HO
0%
0%
25%
50%
75%
100%
% SPEED
Variable torque refers to the fact that the torque required varies with the square of
the speed. Also, the horsepower required varies with the cube of the speed, resulting
in a large reduction in horsepower for even a small reduction in speed. It is easily
seen that substantial energy savings can be achieved by reducing the speed of a
fan or pump. For example, reducing the speed to 50% results in a 50 HP motor
having to produce only 12.5% of rated horsepower, or 6.25 HP.
15
Table of Contents
Variable torque drives usually have a low overload capacity (110% - 120% for
60 seconds), because variable torque applications rarely experience overload
conditions. To optimize efciency and energy savings, variable torque drives are
usually programmed to follow a variable V/Hz ratio.
The term constant torque is not entirely accurate in terms of the actual torque
required for an application. Many constant torque applications have reciprocating
loads, such as vibrating conveyors and punch presses, where the rotational motion
of the motor is being converted to a linear motion. In such cases, the torque required
can vary greatly at different points in the cycle. For constant torque loads, this
uctuation in torque is not a direct function of speed, as it is with a variable torque
load. As a result, constant torque drives typically have a high overload rating (150%
for 60 seconds) in order to handle the higher peak torque demands. To achieve
maximum torque, constant torque drives follow a constant V/Hz ratio.
Both MC Series product lines (MC1000 and MC3000) have full overload capacity
(150% for 60 seconds, 180% for 30 seconds), so that either one can be used for either
type of application. The V/Hz ratio can also be changed to optimize performance
for either type of application.
16
Table of Contents
6.2
6.2.1
DRIVE OPERATION
6.2.2
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
The control section consists of a control board with a 16 bit microprocessor, keypad
and display. Drive programming is accomplished via the keypad or the serial
communications port. During operation the drive can be controlled via the keypad,
by control devices wired to the control terminal strip, or by the serial communications
port. The Power Board contains the control and protection circuits which govern
the six output IGBTs. The Power Board also contains a charging circuit for the bus
lter capacitors, a motor current feedback circuit, a voltage feedback circuit, and a
fault signal circuit. The drive has several built in protection circuits. These include
phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground short circuit protection, high and low line
voltage protection, protection against excessive ambient temperature, and protection
against continuous excessive output current. Activation of any of these circuits will
cause the drive to shut down in a fault condition.
6.2.3
The drive has two analog inputs (0-10 VDC and 4-20 mA) that can be used for
speed reference, PID set point reference, or PID feedback. A speed potentiometer
(10,000 Ohm) can be used with the 0-10 VDC input.
There are also two analog outputs: one is proportional to speed (frequency), and
the other is proportional to load.
The drive has three programmable outputs for status indication: one Form C relay
and two open-collector outputs.
NOTE: Models rated above 30 Hp at 200/240 Vac and 60 Hp at 400/480 Vac have
a second Form C relay.
Refer to Sections 14.0 - CONTROL WIRING and 15.0 - CONTROL WIRING
DIAGRAMS for more information.
17
Table of Contents
7.0
INSTALLATION
WARNING!
SPACING REQUIREMENTS
HP
SPACING
INCHES
mm
0.25 - 5
50
7.5 - 25
100
30 - 60
150
75 - 150
200
All drive models MUST be mounted in a vertical position for proper heatsink cooling.
Fans or blowers should be used to insure proper cooling in tight quarters. Do not
mount drives above other drives or heat producing equipment that would
impede the cooling of the drive. Note the ambient operating temperature ratings
for each drive model.
If it is necessary to drill or cut the drive enclosure or panel, extreme care must be
taken to avoid damaging drive components or contaminating the drive with metal
fragments (which cause shorting of electrical circuits). Cover drive components
with a clean cloth to keep out metal chips and other debris. Use a vacuum cleaner
to clean drive components after drilling, even if chips do not appear to be present.
Do not attempt to use positive air pressure to blow chips out of drive, as this tends
to lodge debris under electronic components. Contaminating the drive with metal
chips can cause drive failure and will void the warranty.The MC1000 Series is UL
approved for solid state motor overload protection. Therefore, a separate thermal
overload relay is not required for single motor applications. In applications where
one drive is operating more than one motor, a separate thermal overload relay is
required for each motor per NEC.
18
Table of Contents
7.1
WARNING!
Severe damage to the drive can result if it is operated after a long period of
storage or inactivity without reforming the DC bus capacitors!
If input power has not been applied to the drive for a period of time exceeding
three years (due to storage, etc), the electrolytic DC bus capacitors within the drive
can change internally, resulting in excessive leakage current. This can result in
premature failure of the capacitors if the drive is operated after such a long period
of inactivity or storage.
In order to reform the capacitors and prepare the drive for operation after a long
period of inactivity, apply input power to the drive for 8 hours prior to actually operating
the drive/motor system.
7.2
Explosion proof motors that are not rated for inverter use lose their certication when
used for variable speed. Due to the many areas of liability that may be encountered
when dealing with these applications, the following statement of policy applies:
AC Technology Corporation inverter products are sold with no warranty of
tness for a particular purpose or warranty of suitability for use with explosion
proof motors. AC Technology Corporation accepts no responsibility for any
direct, incidental or consequential loss, cost, or damage that may arise through
the use of its AC inverter products in these applications. The purchaser
expressly agrees to assume all risk of any loss, cost, or damage that may
arise from such application."
19
Table of Contents
8.0
INPUT AC REQUIREMENTS
WARNING!
Hazard of electrical shock! Disconnect incoming power and wait three minutes
before servicing the drive. Capacitors retain charge after power is removed.
8.1
8.1.1
VOLTAGE
The input voltage must match the drives nameplate voltage rating. Voltage
uctuation must not vary by greater than 10% over voltage or 15% under voltage.
NOTE: Drives with dual rated input voltage must be programmed for the proper
supply voltage. Refer to Parameter 0 - LINE VOLTS in Section 18.0 - DESCRIPTION
OF PARAMETERS.
The UL le for this drive shows that it is suitable for use on a circuit capable of
delivering not more than 200,000 RMS symmetrical amperes, at the drives rated
voltage. The CSA le identies a short-circuit withstand rating of 5,000 RMS
symmetrical amperes at the drives rated voltage.
Three phase voltage imbalance must be less than 2.0% phase to phase. Excessive
phase to phase imbalance can cause severe damage to the drives power
components.
Motor voltage should match line voltage in normal applications. The drives maximum
output voltage will equal the input voltage. Use extreme caution when using a motor
with a voltage rating which is different from the input line voltage.
8.1.2
If the kVA rating of the AC supply transformer is greater than ten times the input
kVA rating of the drive, a drive isolation transformer, or a 2 - 3% input line reactor
(also known as a choke) must be added.
8.2
20
Table of Contents
9.0
VOLTAGE SELECTION
M1100 Series drives are rated for 240/120 Vac, 50-60 Hz input. The drive will
function with input voltage of 120 Vac (+ 10%, -15%) at 48 to 62 Hz when wired
for 120 Vac input, or with input voltage of 240 Vac (+ 10%, - 15%), at 48 to 62 Hz,
when wired for 240 Vac input.
M1200 Series drives are rated for 240/200 Vac, 50-60 Hz input. The drive will function
with input voltages of 200 to 240 Vac (+ 10%, - 15%), at 48 to 62 Hz.
M1400 Series drives are rated for 480/400 Vac, 50-60 Hz input. The drive will
function with input voltages of 400 to 480 Vac (+ 10%, - 15%), at 48 to 62 Hz.
M1500 Series drives are rated for 590/480 Vac, 50-60 Hz input. The drive will
function with input voltages of 480 to 590 Vac (+ 10%, - 15%), at 48 to 62 Hz.
Hazard of electrical shock! Wait three minutes after disconnecting incoming power
before servicing drive. Capacitors retain charge after power is removed.
Note drive input and output current ratings and check applicable electrical codes
for required wire type and size, grounding requirements, over current protection,
and incoming power disconnect, before wiring the drive. Size conservatively to
minimize voltage drop.
Input fusing and a power disconnect switch or contactor MUST be wired in series
with terminals L1, L2, and L3 (L1 and L2 if input is single phase). If one has not been
supplied by AC Technology Corporation, a disconnect means must be wired during
installation. This disconnect must be used to power down the drive when servicing,
or when the drive is not to be operated for a long period of time, but should not be
used to start and stop the motor.
Repetitive cycling of a disconnect or input contactor (more than once every
two minutes) may cause damage to the drive.
10.1
If the drive is name plated for 240/120 Vac single phase input, wire the input to
terminals L1 and N and jumper terminals L1 to L2 for 120 Vac input voltage, or wire
to terminals L1 and L2 (do not wire to N) for 240 Vac input voltage. Refer to Section
11.0 - MC1000 POWER WIRING DIAGRAM.
If the drive is name plated for three phase input only, wire the input to terminals
L1, L2, and L3.
All three power output wires, from terminals T1, T2, and T3 to the motor, must be
kept tightly bundled and run in a separate conduit away from all other power and
control wiring.
It is not recommended to install contactors or disconnect switches between the
drive and motor. Operating such devices while the drive is running can potentially
cause damage to the drive's power components. If such a device is required, it
should only be operated when the drive is in a STOP state. If there is potential for
the device to be opened while the drive is running, the drive must be programmed
for COAST TO STOP (see Parameter 26 - STOP), and an auxiliary contact on the
device must be interlocked with the drive's run circuit. This will give the drive a stop
command at the same time the device opens, and will not allow the drive to start
again until the device is closed.
21
Table of Contents
11.0 MC1000 POWER WIRING DIAGRAM
L1 L2 N
T1
T2
T3
L1 L2
L3
GND GND
L1 L2 N
THREE PHASE
AC MOTOR
DISCONNECT
MEANS
(REQUIRED)
GND
FUSED INPUT
VOLTAGE
WARNING!
Do not connect incoming AC power to output terminals T1, T2, or T3! Severe
damage to the drive will result.
INSTALL, WIRE, AND GROUND IN ACCORDANCE WITH ALL APPLICABLE
CODES.
NOTES:
1. Wire the motor for the proper voltage per the output rating of the drive. Motor
wires MUST be run in a separate steel conduit away from control wiring and
incoming AC power wiring.
2. Do not install contactors between the drive and the motor. Failure to do so
may result in drive damage. See Section 10.1.
3. Remove any existing, and do not install, power factor correction capacitors
between the drive and the motor. Failure to do so will result in drive
damage.
4. Use only UL and CSA listed and approved wire.
5. Minimum wire voltage ratings: 300 V for 120, 200 and 240 Vac systems,
and 600 V for 400, 480, and 590 Vac systems.
6. Wire gauge must be based on a minimum of 125% of the rated input/output
current of the drive, and a minimum 75C insulation rating. Use copper wire
only.
7. Wire and ground in accordance with NEC or CEC, and all applicable local
codes.
22
Table of Contents
12.0 INITIAL POWER UP
WARNING!
Hazard of electrical shock! Wait three minutes after disconnecting incoming power
before servicing drive. Capacitors retain charge after power is removed.
Before attempting to operate the drive, motor, and driven equipment be sure all
procedures pertaining to installation and wiring have been properly followed.
WARNING!
Severe damage to the drive can result if it is operated after a long period of
storage or inactivity without reforming the DC bus capacitors!
If input power has not been applied to the drive for a period of time exceeding
three years (due to storage, etc), the electrolytic DC bus capacitors within the drive
can change internally, resulting in excessive leakage current. This can result in
premature failure of the capacitors if the drive is operated after such a long period
of inactivity or storage.
In order to reform the capacitors and prepare the drive for operation after a long
period of inactivity, apply input power to the drive for 8 hours prior to actually operating
the drive/motor system.
Disconnect the driven load from the motor. Verify that the drive input terminals (L1,
L2, and L3) are wired to the proper input voltage per the nameplate rating of the
drive.
WARNING!
DO NOT connect incoming AC power to output terminals T1, T2, and T3! Do
not cycle input power to the drive more than once every two minutes. Damage
to the drive will result.
Energize the incoming power line. The LCD display should light and ash TESTING
and then show the voltage and horsepower rating of the drive. The display should
then show STOP > 20.00 HZ which indicates that the drive is in a STOP condition,
and the speed set point is 20.00 Hz:
STOP
>
20.00 HZ
If the display does not appear, remove the incoming power, wait three minutes for
the bus capacitors to discharge, and verify correct installation and wiring. If the
wiring is correct, re-apply incoming power and note the display for drive status. If
the display still does not appear contact the factory for assistance.
NOTE 1: If the drive's display is blank after power up, and it is a model equipped with
heatsink fans, check to make sure the fans are operating (they should be spinning
anytime power is applied to the drive). If they are not spinning, the drive's display
will be blank and the drive cannot be operated. If the fans are clogged or jammed,
disconnect power from the drive and remove any obstructions from the fans. Reapply power to the drive and check the fans. If they are spinning, the drive's display
should appear and the drive should operate properly. If there are no obstructions,
the fan itself may be defective. Please contact the factory for assistance.
23
Table of Contents
If the drive powers up correctly, follow the procedure given below to check the
motor rotation:
1. Use the key to decrease the speed set point to the minimum value allowed
(.50 Hz if Parameter 10 - MIN FRQ has not been changed).
2. Press the START key. The drive should indicate RUN, but if the speed set
point is .50 Hz, the motor may not rotate. Press the key to increase the
speed set point until the motor starts to rotate.
3. If the motor is rotating in the wrong direction, press the STOP key and
remove power from the drive. Wait three minutes for the bus capacitors to
discharge, and swap any two of the motor wires connected to T1, T2, and
T3.
NOTE 2: The drive is phase insensitive with respect to incoming line voltage.
Therefore, to change the motor rotation, the phases must be swapped at the drive
output terminals or at the motor.
13.1
START/STOP
To start the drive, press the START key. To stop the drive,
press the STOP key.
NOTE: The STOP key is active in both LOCAL and
REMOTE modes.
FAULT RESET
24
Table of Contents
13.2
MC1000 DISPLAY
The following describes the possible display congurations for the MC1000 Series
drive.
SPEED
SET POINT
STOP
> 60.00 HZ
DIRECTION
(FORWARD)
SPEED
UNITS
NOTE: See Parameter 31 - UNITS for the SPEED UNITS display options.
Pressing the ENTER key will change the display from the SPEED indication to the
% LOAD indication:
DRIVE
STATUS
PERCENT
LOAD
STOP
> 0% LOAD
DIRECTION
(FORWARD)
Pressing the ENTER key again will change the display from the % LOAD indication
to the VAC (motor voltage) indication:
DRIVE
STATUS
MOTOR
VOLTAGE
STOP
>
0 VAC
DIRECTION
(FORWARD)
Pressing ENTER again will change the display back to the SPEED indication.
25
Table of Contents
The following table shows the possible DRIVE STATUS indications that can appear
on the drive display:
DESCRIPTION
STOP
RUN
Drive is in RUN mode and is within + 0.3 Hz of the speed set point.
FAULT
Drive has shut down due to a FAULT condition. If the fault condition has
passed, pressing the STOP key will clear the fault and return the
drive to the STOP mode.
LOCK
BRAKE
DC BRAKE is energized.
LIMIT
F DEC
RUN
SPEED
SET POINT
>
60.00 HZ
DIRECTION
(FORWARD)
SPEED
UNITS
As in the STOP mode, the ENTER key can be used to toggle the display from
SPEED to % LOAD to VAC (motor voltage):
DRIVE
STATUS
RUN
PERCENT
LOAD
DIRECTION
(FORWARD)
26
Table of Contents
DRIVE
STATUS
MOTOR
VOLTAGE
RUN
>
460 VAC
DIRECTION
(FORWARD)
NOTE: During acceleration and deceleration to the SPEED SET POINT, the DRIVE
STATUS will show the actual drive speed. When the SPEED SET POINT is reached,
the DRIVE STATUS will change to RUN (or STOP if the drive is decelerating to a
STOP).
FAULT
MESSAGE
FAULT: OVERLOAD
In FAULT mode, the ENTER key will toggle the display between four screens:
FAULT, SPEED, % LOAD and VAC. The DRIVE STATUS for these displays will
be FAULT. An example is shown below of the drive in the FAULT mode displaying
SPEED.
DRIVE
STATUS
SPEED
SET POINT
SPEED
UNITS
NOTE: To clear a FAULT, press the STOP key, issue a remote STOP command
at TB-1, or use TB-13D (refer to Parameter 50 - TB13D).
27
Table of Contents
13.2.4 MC1000 DISPLAY IN AUXILIARY MODE
If the ENTER key is held down, the display will enter the auxiliary mode, which
indicates the control source (LOCAL, REMOTE, or SERIAL), AUTO or MANUAL
mode, and the speed reference source. When the ENTER key is released, the
display will return to the previous screen. An example of the auxiliary mode display
is shown below:
CONTROL
SOURCE
AUTO/MAN
MODE
SPEED
REFERENCE
SOURCE
DESCRIPTION
KEY
VDC
IDC
SP#1
PRESET SPEED #1
SP#2
PRESET SPEED #2
SP#3
PRESET SPEED #3
SP#4
PRESET SPEED #4
JOG
MOP
28
Table of Contents
14.0 CONTROL WIRING
14.1
GENERAL
WARNING!
29
Table of Contents
WARNING!
WARNING!
This method requires TB-13C to be set for RUN REVERSE, which will disable
TB-1 as a STOP switch! Incorrect use of TB-1 may result in damage to equipment
and/or injury to personnel! Refer to Parameter 49 - TB13C.
FORWARD ROTATION ONLY
1. Select REMOTE mode (see above).
2. Program Parameter 27 - ROTATION to FWD & REV.
3. Program Parameter 49 - TB13C to RUN REVERSE. This will force TB-12A
to act as RUN FORWARD.
4. Wire a normally open maintained contact between TB-12A and TB-2. Close
this contact to RUN the drive in FORWARD, and open this contact to STOP
the drive.
30
Table of Contents
FORWARD and REVERSE ROTATION with TWO RUN CONTACTS
1. Follow 1-4 above and also wire a normally open maintained contact between
TB-13C and TB-2. Close this contact to RUN the drive in REVERSE, and
open this contact to STOP the drive.
FORWARD and REVERSE ROTATION with ONE RUN CONTACT
1. Follow 1-3 above and wire a normally open maintained contact between
TB-2 and the common of a single-pole, double-throw toggle switch. Wire
the poles of the toggle switch to TB-12A and TB-13C. Select the desired
rotation with the toggle switch. Close the maintained contact to RUN, and
open to STOP.
31
Table of Contents
14.2.5 SPEED REFERENCE SIGNALS
The drive allows for three analog speed reference inputs: a speed potentiometer
(10,000 Ohm), 0-10 VDC, or 4-20 mA.
SPEED POT
0-10 VDC
4-20 mA
32
Table of Contents
JOG
The JOG function only works when the drive is in REMOTE mode, and only when
the drive is in a STOP condition. TB-13B can be programmed to select either JOG
FORWARD or JOG REVERSE. The jog speed is set by PRESET SPEED #2. Close
TB-13B to TB-2 to JOG, and open the contact to STOP.
WARNING!
When operating in JOG mode, the STOP key WILL NOT stop the drive. To stop
the drive, the contact between TB-13B and TB-2 must be opened.
MOP - MOTOR OPERATED POT
TB-13A and TB-13B are used for this function, which sets the speed of the drive
using contacts wired to the terminal strip. Program TB-13A to select DEC FREQ,
and program TB-13B to select INC FREQ. Closing TB-13A to TB-2 will activate
the DEC FREQ function, and will cause the speed set point to decrease until the
contact is opened. DEC FREQ will operate when the drive is in RUN mode or STOP
mode. Closing TB-13B to TB-2 will activate the INC FREQ function, and will cause
the speed set point to increase until the contact is opened. INC FREQ will only
operate when the drive is in RUN mode.
NOTE: If TB-13A, TB-13B, and TB-13C are all programmed to select speed
references, and two or three of the terminals are closed to TB-2, the higher terminal
has priority and will override the others. For example, if TB-13A is programmed
to select 0-10VDC, and TB-13C is programmed to select PRESET SPEED #3,
closing both terminals to TB-2 will cause the drive to respond to PRESET SPEED
#3, because TB-13C overrides TB-13A.
33
Table of Contents
15.0 MC1000 CONTROL WIRING DIAGRAMS
15.1
Shown below is the terminal strip on the main control board, along with a brief
description of the function of each terminal. Wiring shown above the terminal strip
indicates internal wiring on the main control board.
FORM C
RELAY
The TB-2 terminals are internally tied together
16 17 18
RS-485 SERIAL
COMMUNICATIONS
OPEN-COLLECTOR OUTPUT
CIRCUIT COMMON
OPEN-COLLECTOR OUTPUT
START
CIRCUIT COMMON
CIRCUIT COMMON
STOP
34
Table of Contents
15.2
Shown below is the wiring diagram for a typical two-wire start/stop control scheme,
using one maintained contact (such as that from a PLC) for RUN and STOP
commands. Close the contact to RUN, and open the contact to STOP. Also shown
is the wiring for a 0-10 VDC or 4-20 mA speed reference signal.
The TB-2 terminals are internally tied together
START REVERSE
CIRCUIT COMMON
START FORWARD
4-20 mA INPUT
STOP
CIRCUIT COMMON
FWD
16 17 18
REV
(see Note 2)
MAINTAINED
RUN/STOP
CONTACT
NOTES:
1. Close TB-1 to TB-2 to RUN, and open to STOP.
2. If REVERSE direction is required, ROTATION must be set to FWD&REV,
and TB-13C must be set to START REVERSE (refer to Parameters: 27
- ROTATION, and 49 - TB-13C).
If REVERSE is not required, jumper TB-2 to TB-12A and eliminate the
FWD/REV switch.
3. Program TB-13A, 13B, or 13C to select the appropriate speed reference
signal that will control the drive speed (refer to Parameters 47, 48, and
49). When that TB-13 terminal is closed to TB-2, the drive will respond
to the selected speed reference signal. In the diagram above, TB-13A is
programmed to select either a 0-10 VDC or 4-20 mA signal.
4. If the contact closure is not made between TB-13A and TB-2 to select a
speed reference, the drive will default to MANUAL speed control, which is
determined by Parameter 29 - MANUAL.
35
Table of Contents
15.3
Shown below is the wiring diagram for a typical three-wire start/stop control scheme,
using momentary contacts (such as push buttons) for START and STOP commands.
Also shown is the wiring for a 0-10 VDC or 4-20 mA speed reference signal.
The TB-2 terminals are internally tied together
MOMENTARY
STOP CONTACT
START REVERSE
START FORWARD
CIRCUIT COMMON
4-20 mA INPUT
STOP
CIRCUIT COMMON
FWD
16 17 18
REV
(see Note 2)
MOMENTARY
START CONTACT
NOTES:
1. Momentarily close TB-12A to TB-2 to START, and momentarily open TB-1
to TB-2 to STOP.
2. If REVERSE direction is required, ROTATION must be set to FWD&REV,
and TB-13C must be set to START REVERSE (refer to Parameters: 27
- ROTATION, and 49 - TB13C).
If REVERSE is not required, wire the Start button directly to TB-12A
and eliminate the FWD/REV switch.
3. Program TB-13A, 13B, or 13C to select the appropriate speed reference
signal that will control the drive speed (refer to Parameters 47, 48, and
49). When that TB-13 terminal is closed to TB-2, the drive will respond
to the selected speed reference signal. In the diagram above, TB-13A is
programmed to select either a 0-10 VDC or 4-20 mA signal.
4. If the contact closure is not made between TB-13A and TB-2 to select a
speed reference, the drive will default to MANUAL speed control, which is
determined by Parameter 29 - MANUAL.
36
Table of Contents
15.4
Shown below is the wiring diagram for a control scheme that utilizes a speed
pot and PRESET SPEEDS for speed control, and either a two-wire or three-wire
START/STOP circuit:
The TB-2 terminals are internally tied together
16 17 18
CIRCUIT COMMON
PRESET SPEED
PRESET SPEED
PRESET SPEED
CIRCUIT COMMON
START
10 VDC SUPPLY
STOP
CIRCUIT COMMON
SPEED POT
(10 K)
NOTES:
1. Program the PRESET SPEEDS (Parameters 1-4) to the desired values.
2. Program TB-13A to select SPEED #1, TB-13B to select SPEED #2, and
TB-13C to select SPEED #3 (refer to Parameters 47, 48, and 49).
3. To select a preset speed, close the appropriate terminal to TB-2. To select
SPEED #4, close any two of the preset speed terminals to TB-2.
4. Speed pot control can be selected by one of two methods. If none of
the preset speeds are selected (all TB-13 terminals are open), the drive
will default to speed pot control if Parameter 29 - MANUAL is set to 0-10
VDC. The speed pot can also be selected if one of the TB-13 terminals is
programmed to select 0-10 VDC and that terminal is closed to TB-2.
5. If REVERSE rotation is required, TB-13C cannot be used to select SPEED
#3. TB-13C must be programmed to select RUN REVERSE or START
REVERSE, leaving only TB-13A and TB-13B to select preset speeds.
37
Table of Contents
16.0 PROGRAMMING THE MC1000 DRIVE
16.1
The MC1000 keypad serves two purposes: operating the drive when in the LOCAL
mode, and programming the parameters for particular applications. The keypad
is shown below, along with the display that should appear when the drive is rst
powered up:
STOP
PROG
RUN
ENTER
> 20.00 HZ
AUTO
MAN
START
FWD
STOP
REV
To program the drive, the PROGRAM mode must be entered by pressing the PROG/
RUN button. If the password protection is disabled, pressing the PROG/RUN button
will result in direct entry into the PROGRAM mode. If the password protection is
enabled, the PASSWORD prompt will appear when an attempt is made to enter the
PROGRAM mode. The PASSWORD prompt appears as follows:
PASSWORD
0000
CURSOR
To enter the password, use the UP and DOWN arrow keys to scroll to the password
value, and then press the ENTER key.
Note:
The factory default password is 0019.
38
Table of Contents
Once the correct password is entered, the PROGRAM mode will be entered and
the rst parameter will be displayed, which is Parameter 0 - LINE VOLTS. This is
shown below:
PARAMETER
NAME
PARAMETER
VALUE
LINE VOLTS
AUTO
CURSOR
To scroll through the parameters, use the UP and DOWN arrow buttons on the
keypad. When the desired parameter is found, press the ENTER key to shift the
cursor from the parameter name to the parameter value. In this example, the cursor
shifts from LINE VOLTS to AUTO:
PARAMETER
NAME
PARAMETER
VALUE
LINE VOLTS
AUTO
CURSOR
The parameter value can then be changed using the UP and DOWN arrow buttons.
If the parameter has a numerical value, the UP arrow will increase the value and
the DOWN arrow will decrease the value. If the parameter has specic choices
that can be selected, the UP and DOWN arrow keys will scroll through the list of
possible settings. When the desired value or option is selected, press the ENTER
key to store the new setting. If the new setting is not ENTERED, it will not take
effect and the old setting will still be valid.
If the PROG/RUN key is pushed while the cursor is highlighting the parameter value,
the value will change back to the original setting (if it had been changed, but not
ENTERED), and the cursor will shift back to the parameter name. Pressing PROG/
RUN again will exit the PROGRAM mode. If the PROGRAM mode is entered again
within two minutes, the last parameter that was viewed, or changed, will come up on
the display. After two minutes has elapsed, the password will have to be entered
again when attempting to access the PROGRAM mode.
39
Table of Contents
16.2
SPEED DIAL is used to access parameters quickly using the parameter number.
Once accessed, the parameter can be programmed as described in Section 16.1.
SPEED DIAL is accessed by pressing the AUTO/MAN key while in the PROGRAM
mode. This will activate the SPEED DIAL display as shown below:
- SPEED DIAL Once in SPEED DIAL, the UP and DOWN arrow keys will allow the operator to scroll
through the parameter numbers. The display will continue to show SPEED DIAL
while scrolling through the parameter numbers, as shown below:
#11
SPEED DIAL
When the desired parameter is reached, the SPEED DIAL display will be replaced
by the parameter name:
#11
MAX FRQ
Once the desired parameter is displayed on the screen, press the ENTER key to
display the parameter name and present setting. The parameter setting can now
be changed by the method described in Section 16.1. Press the AUTO/MAN key
to return to SPEED DIAL.
40
Table of Contents
17.0 PARAMETER MENU
PARAMETER MENU
PARAM.
PARAMETER
NAME
ADJUSTMENT
DEFAULT
LINE VOLTS
AUTO
SPEED #1
20.00 Hz
SPEED #2
20.00 Hz
SPEED #3
20.00 Hz
SPEED #4
20.00 Hz
SKIP #1
0.00 Hz
NUMBER
RANGE OF
FACTORY
SKIP #2
0.00 Hz
BAND WID
0.00 - 10.00 Hz
1.00 Hz
ACCEL
(NOTE 1)
30.0 SEC
DECEL
(NOTE 1)
30.0 SEC
10
MIN FRQ
0.50 Hz
11
MAX FRQ
60.00 Hz
12
DC BRAKE
(NOTE 1)
0.0 VDC
13
DC TIME
0.0 SEC
14
DYN BRAKE
OFF, ON
OFF
16
CURRENT
25 - 180 % (NOTE 3)
180 %
17
MOTOR OL
25 - 100 %
100 %
18
BASE
60.00 Hz
19
FX BOOST
0.0 - 30.0 %
(NOTE 1)
20
AC BOOST
0.0 - 20.0 %
0.00 %
21
SLIP CMP
0.0 - 5.0 %
0.00 %
22
TORQUE
CONSTANT, VARIABLE,
CT / NOCMP
CONSTANT
23
CARRIER
2.5 kHz
25
START
NORMAL
26
STOP
COAST
27
ROTATION
FORWARD, REVERSE,
FWD&REV, FWD@LOC
FORWARD
41
Table of Contents
PARAMETER MENU
PARAM.
PARAMETER
NAME
ADJUSTMENT
28
AUTO/MAN
BOTH
29
MANUAL
KEYPAD
30
CONTROL
LOCAL
NUMBER
RANGE OF
FACTORY
DEFAULT
UNITS
32
HZ MULT
0.10 - 650.0
1.00
33
SPEED DP
XXXXX
sp: HERTZ
34
LOAD MLT
95 - 139 %
100 %
35
CONTRAST
MED
36
SLEEP TH
0.00 - 360.0 Hz
0.00 Hz
37
SLEEP DL
30.0 SEC
38
SLEEP BW
FB @ MIN - FB @ MAX
0%
39
TB5 MIN
0.00 Hz
40
TB5 MAX
60.00 Hz
41
AIN FLTR
0.02 SEC
42
TB10A OUT
NONE
43
@TB10A
0.00 - 360.0 Hz
60.00 Hz
44
TB10B OUT
NONE
45
@TB10B
10 - 200 %
125 %
47
TB13A
NONE
48
TB13B
NONE
49
TB13C
NONE
50
TB13D
EXT FAULT
42
Table of Contents
PARAMETER MENU
PARAM.
NUMBER
PARAMETER
RANGE OF
FACTORY
NAME
ADJUSTMENT
DEFAULT
52
53
54
TB14 OUT
TB15 OUT
RELAY
NONE
55
TB5B LOSS
FAULT
57
SERIAL
DISABLE
58
ADDRESS
1 - 247
30
61
PASSWORD
0000 - 9999
0019
63
SOFTWARE
(VIEW - ONLY)
(N/A)
64
MONITOR
OFF, ON
ON
65
PROGRAM
RESET 60
66
HISTORY
MAINTAIN, CLEAR
MAINTAIN
70
PID MODE
OFF
74
PID FB
TB-5A, TB-5B
TB-5A
75
FB @ MIN
-32768 to 32767
0.0 %
76
FB @ MAX
-32768 to 32767
100.00 %
77
P GAIN
0.0 - 999.9 %
5.0 %
78
I GAIN
0.0 SEC
79
D GAIN
0.0 SEC
80
PID ACC
30.0 SEC
81
MIN ALRM
FB @ MIN - FB @ MAX
0.0 %
82
MAX ALRM
FB @ MIN - FB @ MAX
98
LANGUAGE
99
FAULT HISTORY
0.0 %
ENGLISH
(VIEW - ONLY)
(N/A)
NOTE 4: "RST HIGH" WILL APPEAR ON UNITS SET UP FOR HIGH FREQUENCY.
NOTE!
If you are working with Software M108313 or ealier (see Parameter 63),
parameters 69 and 70 are shown here as parameters 98 and 99.
43
Table of Contents
18.0 DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
LINE VOLTS
(LINE VOLTAGE)
This parameter calibrates the drive for the correct input voltage, and can be set to
AUTO, HIGH, or LOW.
When set to AUTO, the drive measures the DC bus voltage when power is applied
and automatically calibrates itself according to the measured value (DC bus voltage
is equal to input voltage multiplied by 1.4).
This parameter can also be set manually, using the HIGH or LOW settings. For
actual line voltages of 230/240 Vac (on 240/200 Vac models), 460/480 Vac (on
480/400 Vac models), or 575/590 Vac (on 590/480 Vac models), set this parameter
to HIGH. Also use the HIGH setting for 240/120 Vac single-phase input models.
Refer to the table below.
For actual line voltages of 200/208 Vac (on 240/200 Vac models), 380/415 Vac (on
480/400 Vac models), or 460/480 Vac (on 590 Vac models), set this parameter to
LOW. Refer to the table below.
M1200(S)
M1400
M1500
1-4
RATED INPUT
VOLTAGE
INPUT
PHASE
ACTUAL INPUT
VOLTAGE
PARAM.
SETTING
240 Vac
LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
LOW
SPEED #1- #4
HIGH
HIGH
PRESET SPEEDS are only active when the drive is in AUTO mode, and are activated
via contact closures between terminal TB-2 and terminals TB-13A, TB-13B, and
TB-13C. These terminals must be programmed as preset speed selects using
Parameters 47 - 49: TB13A, TB13B, and TB13C.
The preset speeds can only be set to values that are within the operating range
dened by the minimum and maximum frequency (see Parameters: 10 - MIN FREQ,
and 11 - MAX FREQ).
The following table shows how each preset speed is selected using the TB-13
terminals. The terms OPEN and CLOSED refer to the state of the TB-13 terminal
relative to TB-2.
44
Table of Contents
PRESET ACTIVATION
PRESET #
TB - 13A
TB - 13B
TB - 13C
CLOSED
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
CLOSED
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
CLOSED
CLOSED
CLOSED
OPEN
CLOSED
OPEN
CLOSED
OPEN
CLOSED
CLOSED
NOTE: SPEED #4 is selected if any two of the three TB-13 terminals are closed
to TB-2.
5,6
SKIP #1 & #2
BAND WID
(SKIP BANDWIDTH)
These parameters are used to prevent the drive from operating continuously at critical
speeds, or frequencies, that cause excessive mechanical vibration of the driven
equipment. The SKIP SPEEDS (Parameters 5 and 6) and the SKIP BANDWIDTH
(Parameter 7) are used to dene up to two speed avoidance ranges. The SKIP
SPEED settings dene the starting point of the speed range that is to be avoided,
and the SKIP BANDWIDTH setting denes how far the speed range extends beyond
SKIP SPEED. Setting the SKIP SPEEDS to .00 Hz disables this function.
Example: The critical frequency is 21 Hz, and a bandwidth of 2 Hz is desired.
Therefore, set SKIP #1 to 20 Hz and set SKIP BANDWIDTH to 2 Hz. This results in
a speed range from 20 Hz to 22 Hz that the drive will not operate within continuously.
If the drive were operating at 25 Hz and then commanded to operate at a speed
within the range of avoidance, the drive would decelerate to 22 Hz and remain at
that frequency until commanded to 20 Hz or below. The drive would then decelerate
through the range of avoidance to the new frequency. Likewise, if the drive were
operating at 18 Hz, and then commanded to operate at a speed within the range of
avoidance, the drive would accelerate to 20 Hz and remain at that frequency until
commanded to a speed of 22 Hz or above. The drive would then accelerate through
the range of avoidance to the new frequency.
45
Table of Contents
8
ACCEL
(ACCELERATION TIME)
ACCEL sets the acceleration rate for all speed reference sources (keypad, speed
pot, 4-20 mA, 0-10 VDC, jog, and the preset speeds). The ACCEL setting is the time
to accelerate from 0 Hz to the BASE FREQUENCY (Parameter 18). The range of
adjustment for ACCEL depends on horsepower. Refer to the following table:
ACCELERATION LIMITS
120 - 240 Vac
Models
RANGE OF ADJUSTMENT
0.25 - 20 HP
1 - 20 HP
25 - 30 HP
25 - 60 HP
40 - 60 HP
75 - 150 HP
DECEL
(DECELERATION TIME)
DECEL sets the deceleration rate for all speed reference sources. The DECEL
setting indicates the time to decelerate from BASE FREQUENCY to 0 Hz. As with
Parameter 8 - ACCEL, this is a linear function. If the drive is set to COAST to stop,
this parameter will have no effect when a STOP command is given. The range of
adjustment for DECEL depends on horsepower, voltage, and whether Dynamic
Braking (DB) is being used. Refer to the table below:
DECELERATION LIMITS
HORSEPOWER / VOLTAGE RATING
120 - 240 Vac
Models
(NOTE 1)
480/400 Vac
Models
RANGE OF ADJUSTMENT
WITHOUT DB
(NOTE 2)
WITH DB
0.25 - 7.5 HP
1 - 7.5 HP
----
10 - 15 HP
10 - 20 HP
1 - 7.5 HP
20 - 30 HP
25 - 60 HP
10 - 20 HP
40 HP
----
----
----
----
25 - 60 HP
60 HP
75 HP
----
----
100 - 150 HP
----
NOTE 1: 120/240 Vac units have the same limits as 240/200 Vac units.
NOTE 2: The parameter value can be set below the minimum value shown, but
the value shown is the operational limit of the drive. For example, if DECEL is set
for 0.1 seconds on a 10 HP, 480 Vac drive without dynamic braking, the actual
deceleration time would be 0.5 seconds.
46
Table of Contents
If an attempt is made to decelerate a high-inertia load too quickly, the motor will
regenerate voltage back into the drive. This will cause the DC bus voltage to rise,
which can result in a HI VOLTS fault. In order to prevent faulting, the drive will enter
DECEL FREEZE, which halts the deceleration until the DC bus voltage returns to
a normal level. The drive will then begin to decelerate again, and if necessary, will
enter DECEL FREEZE repeatedly to avoid faulting. If a very short deceleration
time is programmed, DECEL FREEZE may not be able to compensate fast enough,
resulting in a HI VOLTS fault.
In applications where very short deceleration times are required on high-inertia
loads, dynamic braking may be required. Consult the factory for more information
on the Dynamic Braking option.
10
MIN FRQ
(MINIMUM FREQUENCY)
This parameter denes the lower limit of the drives speed range. MIN FRQ is
used in conjunction with MAX FRQ (Parameter 11 below) to dene the operating
range of the drive.
If MIN FRQ is set to a value above 0.0 Hz, the drive will ramp up from 0.0 Hz when
given a start command. Once running, however, the drive will not operate below
the MIN FRQ setting unless the rotation is changed, or a stop command is issued
and the drive is programmed to ramp to a stop.
If the MINIMUM FREQUENCY is set to 0.0 Hz, the drive may be operated in ZERO
SPEED mode (drive is in RUN state, but there is no output to the motor). ZERO
SPEED operation can be used in applications requiring the ability to start and stop
the drive using only the selected speed reference. The drive will start when the
speed reference is raised above 0 VDC or 4 mA, and it will stop when the reference
is lowered to 0 VDC or 4 mA. Note that the drive must be initially started using one
of the normal start commands (keypad or terminal strip).
11
MAX FRQ
(MAXIMUM FREQUENCY)
This parameter denes the upper limit of the drives speed range. MAX FRQ is
used in conjunction with MIN FRQ (Parameter 10 above) to dene the operating
range of the drive.
WARNING!
47
Table of Contents
12
DC BRAKE
DC braking creates a braking torque by injecting DC voltage into the motor. This
parameter sets the magnitude of that DC voltage. The point at which the drive
applies DC braking to the motor depends on which STOP mode is programmed
(either COAST or RAMP, see Parameter 26 - STOP).
If the drive is set to COAST, DC braking is activated when the stop command is given.
In this case, DC braking helps decelerate the motor. This is useful in applications
where a quick deceleration is desired on a load that would normally take a long
time to coast to a stop.
If the drive is set to RAMP, DC braking is activated when the output frequency
reaches 0 Hz. In this case, the drive decelerates the load to a near stop and then
DC braking is used to stop and hold the motor. This is useful in applications where
the load needs to be stopped in a certain position. Similar applications with highinertia loads utilize both dynamic braking and DC braking. The dynamic braking
allows the high-inertia load to be decelerated quickly, while the DC braking stops
the load in the desired position.
Due to heat generated in the motor, DC braking should only be used in applications
where the load is stopped infrequently. In high duty-cycle applications, dynamic
braking is recommended because the heat is dissipated through external resistor
banks, rather than in the motor. When used, DC BRAKE should be set to the lowest
voltage that provides satisfactory operation in order to minimize motor heating. The
maximum voltage available depends on the voltage rating of the drive. Refer to
the table below:
13
MODEL M1100
240 / 200 Vac
MODEL M1200
240 / 200 Vac
MODEL M1400
480 / 400 Vac
MODEL M1500
590 / 480 Vac
24 VOLTS
24 VOLTS
48 VOLTS
59 VOLTS
DC TIME
This parameter determines the length of time that the DC braking voltage is applied
to the motor. DC TIME should be set to the lowest value that provides satisfactory
operation in order to minimize motor heating.
NOTE: If this parameter is set to 999.9 seconds (the maximum value), the DC
braking will be continuous. If it is set to .0 seconds, it is disabled.
14
DYN BRAK
(DYNAMIC BRAKE)
This parameter enables the dynamic braking circuit. Set this parameter to ON only
if the optional dynamic braking circuit board and resistors are installed.
Dynamic braking is used in applications where high-inertia loads need to be
decelerated quickly. When this is attempted, the motor regenerates voltage back
into the drive, causing the DC bus voltage to rise, eventually resulting in a HI
VOLTS fault. With the dynamic braking option, the DC bus voltage is monitored,
and when it reaches a certain level, a transistor is switched on that connects an
external resistor bank across the DC bus. This allows the regenerated energy from
the motor to be dissipated through the resistors as heat, which keeps the DC bus
voltage below the trip level.
48
Table of Contents
16
CURRENT
(CURRENT LIMIT)
This parameter sets the maximum allowable output current of the drive, which also
determines the torque capability of the motor. For most applications, CURRENT is
left at the maximum setting, which is 150% or 180% (of the drives output current
rating), depending on whether the input voltage to the drive is low or high (see
Parameter 0 - LINE VOLTS).
The drive will enter current limit when the current draw of the motor exceeds the
current limit setting. To respond to this condition, the drive will enter "frequency
foldback", which commands the drive to decelerate in order to reduce the output
current and regain synchronization with the motor. When the over current condition
passes, the drive will return to normal operation and reaccelerate to the speed set
point. However, if "frequency foldback" cannot correct the condition and the drive
remains in current limit for too long, it will trip into an OVERLOAD fault. If the drive
enters current limit while accelerating, the time required to reach the speed set point
will be longer than the time programmed into ACCEL (Parameter 8).
Regardless of the CURRENT setting, the drive is capable of delivering a maximum
of 150% current for one minute, and 180% current for approximately 30 seconds,
before tripping into an OVERLOAD fault. See Parameter 17 MOTOR OL.
17
MOTOR OL
(MOTOR OVERLOAD)
The MC1000 Series is UL approved for solid state motor overload protection.
Therefore, a separate thermal overload relay is not required for single motor
applications. The MOTOR OVERLOAD circuit is used to protect the motor
from overheating due to excessive current draw. The trip time for the MOTOR
OVERLOAD setting is based on what is known as an inverse I2t function. This
function allows the drive to deliver 150% of the rated output current for one minute,
and even higher current levels for shorter periods of time. Once the overload circuit
times out, the drive will trip into an OVERLOAD fault.
The MOTOR OVERLOAD should be set to a value which is equal to the ratio (in
percentage) of the motor full load current rating to the drive output current rating.
This will result in an overload capacity of 150% of the MOTOR current rating for one
minute. If this parameter is set to 100%, the motor will be allowed to draw 150%
of the DRIVE output current rating for one minute. This distinction is important in
cases where the motor full load current rating is signicantly less than the drive
output current rating, such as applications where the drive is oversized to meet
torque requirements.
Example 1: A 5 Hp, 480 Vac drive is operating a 3 HP motor with a full load current
rating of 4.8 amps. Divide the motor current rating by the drive output current rating:
4.8 / 7.6 = 63%. Entering this value will allow continuous operation at 4.8 amps,
and will also allow the motor to draw 7.2 amps (150% of 4.8 amps) for one minute.
If the setting is left at 100%, the motor could draw 11.4 amps (150% of 7.6 amps)
for one minute before tripping the drive.
The MC Series drive has two options for thermal overload protection. One depends on the
speed of the drive, and the other does not. The diagram below illustrates the difference
between speed compensated and non-compensated thermal overload protection.
The speed-compensated thermal overload circuit offers additional protection
from high load conditions at low speeds, where motor cooling is often less effective
(e.g., motors with shaft-mounted fans). As seen on the diagram below, the drive
reduces the allowable continuous output current when operating at frequencies
less than 30 Hz.
49
Table of Contents
Example 2: A 480 Vac, 20 HP drive is operating a motor at 10 Hz. From the
diagram, a drive operating at 10 Hz can deliver about 75% of its output current
rating continuously. A 480 Vac, 20 HP drives output current rating is 27 Amps.
Therefore, the drive would be able to operate continuously at 20 Amps. The drive
would also be able to deliver 150% of that value (30 Amps) for one minute before
tripping into an OVERLOAD fault.
The speed compensated thermal overload is the factory default and should be
used in applications where the motor does not normally experience high loads at
low speeds for extended periods of time.
NON-COMPENSATED
MAXIMUM CONTINUOUS
OUTPUT CURRENT (%)
100
ED
AT
OM
80
C
ED
S
EN
SP
60
40
20
10
20
30
40
50
60
FREQUENCY (Hz)
NOTE 1: The above diagram is based on a MOTOR OL setting of 100%. For lower
MOTOR OL settings, reduce the % CURRENT values by the same percentage. For
example, if MOTOR OL is set to 75%, reduce the % CURRENT values by 25%.
Therefore, the curve shifts down, but the shape of the curve remains the same.
The non-compensated thermal overload circuit allows 100% current continuously,
and 150% current for one minute, at all speeds. In the example above, the motor
operating at 10 Hz without speed-compensated protection would be allowed to
operate continuously at 27 Amps, and could draw 40.5 Amps for one minute before
tripping. Without sufcient motor cooling, this can result in motor failure due to
overheating.
The non-compensated circuit is selected by setting Parameter 22 - TORQUE to
CT/NOCMP. The non-compensated setting should only be used in applications
where the motor is properly cooled at all speeds, or the motor manufacturer has
approved the motor for full-load operation at low speeds.
NOTE 2: The operation of the motor thermal overload circuit is affected by the
setting of Parameter 34 - LOAD MLT.
50
Table of Contents
BASE
18
(BASE FREQUENCY)
The BASE FREQUENCY determines the V/Hz ratio by setting the frequency at
which the drive will output full voltage to the motor. For most applications the base
frequency should be set to match the motors rated frequency.
For example, if the drive is rated for 460 Vac output, and the BASE FREQUENCY is
set to 60 Hz, the drive will maintain a constant ratio of 7.66 V/Hz (except when AC
BOOST or FX BOOST are active, see Parameters 19 and 20) from 0 Hz to 60 Hz.
This range is the region of constant torque. If the motor speed is increased past 60
Hz, the output voltage remains constant while the frequency increases, resulting in a
reduced V/Hz ratio. This range, from 60 Hz to about 90 Hz, is the region of constant
horsepower. Above 90 Hz, horsepower begins to decrease as frequency increases.
Refer to Section 6.1 - DESCRIPTION OF AC MOTOR OPERATION.
19
FX BOOST
(FIXED BOOST)
This parameter is used in applications which require high starting torque. FX BOOST
increases the output voltage at lower output frequencies (below 30 Hz for 60 Hz
base frequency), in order to boost the torque capability of the motor. Refer to the
diagram below. The factory default for FX BOOST depends on the horsepower
rating. Refer to the table below:
FX BOOST FACTORY DEFAULT SETTINGS
HP
FACTORY DEFAULT
(ALL VOLTAGES)
HP
FACTORY DEFAULT
(240 / 200 VAC)
FACTORY DEFAULT
(400+ VAC)
0.25 - 1 HP
5.30 %
40 HP
2.30 %
1.20 %
1.5 - 2 HP
4.40 %
50 HP
---
0.80 %
3 HP
3.60 %
60 HP
2.10 %
0.80 %
5 HP
3.00 %
75 HP
---
2.00 %
7.5 HP
2.70 %
100 HP
---
1.90 %
10 HP
2.40 %
125 HP
---
1.90 %
15 HP
2.20 %
150 HP
---
1.80 %
20 HP
2.00 %
25 HP
1.80 %
30 HP
1.60 %
51
Table of Contents
AC BOOST
20
(ACCELERATION BOOST)
AC BOOST is similar to FX BOOST, but is only active when the drive is accelerating.
During acceleration, the output voltage is increased according to the setting of AC
BOOST, which increases motor torque. Refer to the diagram below. AC BOOST,
like FX BOOST, is used in applications with high-inertia loads.
The diagram below illustrates how FX BOOST and AC BOOST alter the V/Hz ratio
to increase motor torque.
FX BOOST sets the boost at 0 Hz (approximately 15% in the example above), and
as the output frequency approaches 30 Hz, the boost decreases to zero.
100
AC BOOST
90
80
OUTPUT VOLTAGE (%)
70
60
FX BOOST
50
40
30
20
CONSTANT V/Hz
10
10
20
30
40
50
60
AC BOOST only functions during acceleration. In the diagram above, the drive
is operating at 35 Hz and is then commanded to 50 Hz. The output voltage is
increased by the AC BOOST setting (approximately 15% in the example above)
during acceleration to the new speed set point. Once the new set point is reached,
the output voltage returns to normal.
21
SLIP CMP
(SLIP COMPENSATION)
52
Table of Contents
22
TORQUE
This parameter is used to select whether the output of the drive follows a constant
or variable V/Hz curve. The following selections are available:
CONSTANT
VARIABLE
CT / NOCMP
23
CARRIER
(CARRIER FREQUENCY)
This parameter sets the carrier, or switching, frequency of the output IGBTs. Higher
switching rates result in less audible noise from the motor, but the efciency of the
drive decreases as the carrier frequency increases. Therefore, this parameter should
be set to the lowest value which yields acceptable sound levels. Available settings
are: 2.5 kHz, 6 kHz, 8 kHz, 10 kHz, 12 kHz and 14 kHz.
NOTE 1: The 2.5 kHz carrier frequency setting is a variable carrier. The carrier
frequency remains xed at 1.5 kHz up to 25 Hz output frequency. Above 25 Hz, the
carrier is a xed multiple of 60 times the drives output frequency. For example, if
the output frequency of the drive was set to 45 Hz, the carrier frequency would be
2.7 kHz (45 Hz x 60 = 2700 Hz).
NOTE 2: The ability to operate a drive in the quiet (high carrier frequency) mode
is dependent on the drive horsepower rating, driven load, drive enclosure, and the
ambient temperature. At full ambient temperature, operation above 8 kHz requires
derating the drive by multiplying the output current rating by the following factors:
0.94 at 10 kHz, 0.89 at 12 kHz, and 0.83 at 14 kHz.
NOTE 3: If the drive is equipped with the High Output Frequency option, and MAX
FRQ is set above 120 Hz, CARRIER will automatically change to 14 kHz, and the
CARRIER parameter will disappear from the parameter menu. Operation at 14 kHz
carrier frequency requires derating as shown in NOTE 2 above.
53
Table of Contents
25
START
(START MODE)
WARNING!
POWER UP
AUTO RE-
RE-BRAKE
NOTE 1: POWER UP, AUTO RE-, and RE-BRAKE settings are only active when
the drive is in REMOTE mode (see Parameter 30 - CONTROL).
NOTE 2: After a fault, the drive will attempt to restart ve times, and if unsuccessful,
will shut down on a FAULT LOCKOUT. Every 15 minutes that passes will decrement
the restart counter by one. Therefore, 75 minutes after a successful restart, the
restart counter is fully reset, and the drive can once again attempt ve restarts.
NOTE 3: The drive WILL NOT restart after the following faults: CONTROL and
PWR SAG. Also, if an OUTPUT fault occurs below 1.5 Hz, only one restart will be
attempted, after a four minute delay. If unsuccessful, it will then trip into FAULT
LOCKOUT, which will require a manual reset. This is done to protect the drive in
case of a shorted motor.
26
STOP
(STOP MODE)
This parameter selects whether the motor will COAST to a stop, or RAMP to a stop,
when the drive is given a stop command.
COAST
When a stop command is given, the drive shuts off the output
to the motor, allowing it to coast to a stop. The time required
for the motor to stop is governed by the inertia of the load.
RAMP
RAMP 2
Same as RAMP, but without the 200 ms start delay. This allows
faster start/stop cycles for applications that require it.
54
Table of Contents
27
ROTATION
(ROTATION DIRECTION)
WARNING!
REVERSE
FWD&REV
FWD@LOC
NOTE: If the rotation is changed while the drive is running, the drive will decelerate to
0 Hz, and then accelerate back up to the speed set point in the opposite direction.
28
AUTO / MAN
This parameter is used to select the method of speed control when the drive is in
the LOCAL mode. The choices are explained below:
MANUAL
The drive will accept a speed reference from the keypad (UP
and DOWN ARROW keys) or a speed potentiometer (wired
to TB-2, 5A, and 6). Parameter 29 - MANUAL below selects
either keypad or speed potentiometer. The AUTO/MAN button
on the keypad is disabled.
AUTO
The drive will accept a 0-10 VDC input signal on TB-5A and
TB-2, a 4-20 mA input signal on TB-5B and TB-2, or one of the
four PRESET SPEEDS. The programming of TB-13A, TB-13B
and TB-13C determines which AUTO reference is selected.
The AUTO/MAN button on the keypad is disabled.
BOTH
NOTE: If the drive is in the AUTO mode, and a speed reference is not selected
using TB-13A, TB-13B, or TB-13C, the speed reference source will default to the
setting of Parameter 29 - MANUAL (KEYPAD or 0-10 VDC).
29
MANUAL
(MANUAL)
This parameter selects the speed reference source when the drive is set for MANUAL
speed control (see Parameter 28 - AUTO/MAN above). The speed reference options
are KEYPAD (UP and DOWN ARROW keys), or 0 - 10 VDC (from a speed pot wired
to TB-2, 5A, and 6; or some other 0-10 VDC source).
55
Table of Contents
30
CONTROL
(START/STOP CONTROL)
WARNING!
WARNING!
REMOTE
BOTH
31
UNITS
(SPEED/PID UNITS)
UNITS sets the units of the output speed or PID display on the keypad.
The following choices are available:
Speed mode: HERTZ, RPM, %HZ, /SEC, /MIN, /HR, GPH, NONE
PID mode:
NOTE: If one of the "pid" units is selected, but the drive is in Manual (open-loop)
speed control mode or PID MODE is DISABLED, the displayed speed units will
default to HERTZ. If one of the "speed" units is selected, but PID MODE is ENABLED
and the drive is in Auto mode, the displayed PID units will default to %.
32
HZ MULT
(HERTZ MULTIPLIER)
The HZ MULTIPLIER is used to scale the output speed indication on the display.
If UNITS is set for HERTZ or % HZ, this parameter has no effect. Multiplying the
output frequency by the HZ MULTIPLIER will yield the desired speed value on the
display.
Example: The desired speed units is RPM with a standard 60 Hz, 1800 RPM
motor. Set UNITS to RPM and set HZ MULT to 30.00. This will result in a speed
display of 1110 RPM for an output frequency of 37 Hz (37 Hz X 30 = 1110 RPM).
Also, if there was a 100:1 gear reducer in the system, Parameter 33 - SPEED DP
below could be set to XX.XX to represent the output of the gear reducer (11.10
RPM in the example).
56
Table of Contents
33
SPEED DP
This parameter is used to move the decimal point location in the speed display. This
parameter will not have any effect if UNITS is set to HERTZ or % HZ. The possible
settings are: XXXXX, XXX.X, XX.XX, X.XXX, and .XXXX. Refer to Parameter 32
- HZ MULT above for an example on the use of SPEED DP.
34
LOAD MLT
(LOAD MULTIPLIER)
This parameter is used to scale the % LOAD display. If the drive output current rating
is higher than the motor full load current rating, the drive will not display 100% load
when the motor is at full load. Setting this parameter to the ratio (in %) of the drive
output current rating to the motor full load current rating will scale the load display
to show motor load instead of drive load. This will result in a display of 100% when
the motor is at full load.
The motor overload circuitry is also affected by this parameter. When the display
reads 150% load, the drive will trip on OVERLOAD in one minute, regardless of the
actual motor current. If this parameter is used to scale the display to show actual
motor load, then Parameter 17 - MOTOR OL should be left at 100%. Likewise, if
MOTOR OL has been set according to the motor full load rating, this parameter
should be left at 100%. Changing both parameters will result in an OVERLOAD
fault sooner than expected.
The output signal at TB-10B is also affected by this parameter. When set to the
ratio of current ratings as explained above, the output signal will be proportional to
motor load instead of drive load.
35
CONTRAST
This parameter is used to adjust the contrast of the drive display and can be set
to LOW, MED, or HIGH in order to obtain the most visible display. If the drive is
mounted lower than eye level, a HIGH setting may make the display more visible.
Likewise, if the drive is mounted higher than eye level, a LOW setting may make
the display more visible.
36
SLEEP TH
(SLEEP THRESHOLD)
The MC1000 Series drive has a Sleep Mode function that allows the drive to cease
operation when system demand falls below a preset level. This is to prevent the
motor from operating at low speeds for long periods of time. It is commonly used
along with the PID Set point Control feature, but can also be used in standard speed
control mode.
When the commanded speed falls below the SLEEP THRESHOLD setting for the
dened SLEEP DELAY time (see Parameter 37 below), the drive will "go to sleep"
and the motor will go to zero speed. The drive will remain "sleeping" until it is
commanded to operate at a speed that is 2 Hz above the SLEEP THRESHOLD, at
which point it will "wake up" and ramp the motor up to the commanded speed.
NOTE 1: While the drive is in Sleep Mode, the Status portion of the display will
read SLEEP.
NOTE 2: If the drive's commanded speed goes below the SLEEP THRESHOLD,
the SLEEP DELAY timer will start to count down. If the commanded speed equals
or exceeds the SLEEP THRESHOLD before the SLEEP DELAY times out, the
SLEEP DELAY timer will be reset.
NOTE 3: If the drive is in a Stop state, and the commanded speed is below the
SLEEP THRESHOLD, the drive will immediately go to sleep upon a Start command,
bypassing the SLEEP DELAY.
57
Table of Contents
37
SLEEP DL
(SLEEP DELAY)
This parameter sets the amount of time the drive must operate below the SLEEP
THRESHOLD (see Parameter 36 above) before the drive "goes to sleep" and brings
the motor to zero speed.
Example: SLEEP THRESHOLD is set to 15 Hz and SLEEP DELAY is set to 60
seconds. If the drive operates below 15 Hz for 60 seconds, the drive will "go to
sleep" and the motor will stop. The drive's display will indicate SLEEP, and the
drive will remain "sleeping" until the drive commanded to a speed equal to greater
than 17 Hz. At this point, the drive will "wake up" and ramp the motor up to the
commanded speed.
38
SLEEP BW
(SLEEP BANDWIDTH)
This parameter allows the PID feedback signal to determine when drive should
"wake up" when operating in Sleep Mode. In process systems that utilize Integral
Gain (see Parameter 78), the drive may cycle in and out of Sleep Mode more often
than desired, due to the Integral function of the PID algorithm.
When SLEEP BANDWIDTH is used, the feedback signal must decrease or increase
(depending on whether the system is normal or reverse-acting) by the programmed
amount before the drive will "wake up". This parameter is set in PID units.
Example: In a normal-acting system, the PID set point is 50 PSI, SLEEP
THRESHOLD is set to 20 Hz, and SLEEP BANDWIDTH is set to 5 PSI. The drive
will enter Sleep Mode when the commanded speed drops below 20 Hz for the
time dened in SLEEP DELAY. The drive will wake up when the feedback signal
drops below 45 PSI (50 PSI set point minus 5 PSI bandwidth = 45 PSI), even if the
commanded speed is still below 20 Hz.
NOTE: If SLEEP BANDWIDTH is set to 0, this function is disabled, and the drive
will wake up when the commanded speed exceeds the SLEEP THRESHOLD plus
2 Hz, as described in Parameters 36 and 37.
39
TB5 MIN
TB5 MIN selects the output frequency of the drive that will correspond to the
minimum analog speed reference input (0 VDC or 4 mA). This parameter is used in
conjunction with Parameter 40 - TB5 MAX to dene a speed range that corresponds
to the analog speed reference input (0 - 10 VDC or 4 - 20 mA).
40
TB5 MAX
TB5 MAX selects the output frequency of the drive that will correspond to the
maximum analog speed reference input (10 VDC or 20 mA). This parameter is used
in conjunction with Parameter 39 - TB5 MIN to dene a speed range that corresponds
to the analog speed reference input (0 - 10 VDC or 4 - 20 mA).
Example 1: The drive is required to operate from 0 to 60 Hz in response to a 0-5
VDC speed reference signal (rather than the normal 0-10 VDC). Because TB5 MAX
is based on a 0-10 VDC (or 4-20 mA) signal, the drive will operate at half of the TB5
MAX value if it is given a 5 VDC signal. Therefore, setting TB5 MAX to 120 Hz will
cause the drive to run at 60 Hz when it is given a 5 VDC speed reference signal.
NOTE: The drive can be programmed for inverse operation so that as the speed
reference increases, the drive speed will decrease, and as the speed reference decreases,
the drive speed will increase. This is accomplished by setting TB5 MIN to the desired
maximum output frequency, and TB5 MAX to the desired minimum output frequency.
58
Table of Contents
Example 2: The drive is being controlled by a pressure transducer that provides a
4-20 mA signal proportional to duct pressure. The minimum frequency desired is 20
Hz, and the maximum is 60 Hz. Set TB5 MIN for 60 Hz, and TB5 MAX for 20 Hz. As
the duct pressure rises, the output signal from the transducer will increase, causing
the speed of the drive to decrease. This results in a decrease in duct pressure and
a decreasing transducer signal. The drive responds to the decreasing signal by
increasing speed, which again raises the duct pressure. In this way, the average duct
pressure can be maintained at a certain level. If the acceleration and deceleration
rates are set too fast however, the drive will react quickly to signal changes which
will cause the drive speed to hunt up and down excessively.
41
AIN FLTR
This parameter adjusts the lter on the analog input terminals (TB-5A and TB-5B)
to reduce the effect of any electrical noise that may be present on the analog input
signals. This lter works in both PID mode and standard speed control mode. It
should be set to the lowest value that yields acceptable performance, as setting it
too high may cause the drive to react too slowly to signal changes.
42
TB10A OUT
The analog output signal at TB-10A is proportional to the output frequency of the
drive. This parameter selects whether that signal is 0-10 VDC or 2-10 VDC. The
2-10 VDC signal can be converted to a 4-20 mA signal by connecting a resistor
in series with the signal such that the total load resistance is 500 Ohms. If set to
NONE, the function is disabled.
NOTE: This output cannot be used with loop-powered devices that derive power
from a 4-20 mA signal.
43
@ TB10A
This parameter scales the analog output signal at TB-10A. This setting is the output
frequency that is indicated when the TB-10A output measures 10VDC.
Example: The drive is part of a control system that requires a 0-5 VDC signal
(rather than 0-10 VDC) that is proportional to 0-60 Hz output frequency. The output
signal is linear, so setting this parameter to 120 Hz would yield 10 VDC at 120 Hz,
and 5 VDC at 60 Hz.
44
TB10B OUT
The analog output signal at TB-10B is proportional to the drive load. This parameter
selects whether that signal is 0-10 VDC or 2-10 VDC. The 2-10 VDC signal can
be converted to a 4-20 mA signal by connecting a resistor in series with the signal
such that the total load resistance is 500 Ohms.
NOTE: This output cannot be used with loop-powered devices that derive power
from a 4-20 mA signal.
45
@ TB10B
This parameter scales the analog output signal at TB-10B. This setting is the load
(in %) that is indicated when the TB-10B output measures 10 VDC.
Example: The drive is part of a control system that requires a 0-10 VDC signal to
indicate 0-150% drive load. If this parameter were set to 150%, the drive would
output 10 VDC at 150% load (and about 6.7 VDC at 100% load).
NOTE: The output signal at TB-10B is affected by the setting of Parameter 34
- LOAD MLT.
59
Table of Contents
47
TB13A
This parameter is used to select the function of terminal TB-13A. Closing TB-13A
to TB-2 activates the TB-13A input function.
The following functions can be selected:
NONE
0-10VDC
4-20 MA
SPEED#1
LOC SEL
DEC FREQ
48
TB13B
WARNING!
When operating in JOG mode, the STOP key WILL NOT stop the drive. To stop
the drive, the contact between TB-13B and TB-2 must be opened.
This parameter is used to select the function of terminal TB-13B. Closing TB-13B
to TB-2 activates the TB-13B function. The following functions can be selected:
NONE
0-10VDC
4-20 MA
SPEED#2
INC FREQ
JOG FWD
JOG REV
49
TB13C
WARNING!
60
Table of Contents
This parameter is used to select the function of terminal TB-13C. Closing TB13C to TB-2 activates the TB-13C input function. The following functions can be
selected:
NONE
0-10VDC
4-20 MA
SPEED#3
LOC SEL
RUN REV
STRT REV
50
TB13D
(TB-13D FUNCTION)
WARNING!
EXT / FAULT
EXT CLEAR
Sets TB-13D as a normally open FAULT RESET. Close TB13D to TB-2 to clear a fault.
NOTE: When set to CLEAR, TB-13D becomes the only terminal that can be used
to clear a fault (TB-1 will not work). However, the keypad STOP key can still be
used to clear faults.
61
Table of Contents
52
TB14 OUT
This parameter sets the open-collector output indication for terminal TB-14.
The following conditions can be selected:
NONE
RUN
FAULT
/ FAULT
LOCK
@ SPEED
ABOVE #3
I LIMIT
AUT/MAN
FLWR PR
REVERSE
62
Table of Contents
MIN/MAX ALARM The relay energizes when the feedback signal (in PID mode) or
the speed reference signal (in open-loop speed mode) is within
the limits set by MIN ALARM and MAX ALARM (Parameters
81 and 82), and de-energizes when the signal falls below the
MIN ALARM setting or exceeds the MAX ALARM setting.
INV MIN/MAX A
MIN ALARM
The relay de-energizes when the feedback signal (in PID mode)
or the speed reference signal (in open-loop speed mode)
equals or exceeds the MIN ALARM setting (Parameter 81),
and energizes when the signal falls below the MIN ALARM
setting.
MAX ALARM
The relay de-energizes when the feedback signal (in PID mode)
or the speed reference signal (in open-loop speed mode) is less
than or equal to the MAX ALARM setting (Parameter 82), and
energizes when the signal exceeds the MAX ALARM setting.
SLEEP
SPD = 0HZ
TB15 OUT
This parameter sets the open-collector output indication for terminal TB-15. It has
the same functionality as Parameter 52 - TB14 OUT above.
54
RELAY
(RELAY FUNCTION)
The control board has one set of FORM C relay contacts at TB-16, 17, and 18
that can be programmed for the same indications as the open-collector outputs
described in parameter 52.
63
Table of Contents
The FORM C contacts at TB-16, 17, and 18 are rated 2 amps at 28 VDC or 120 Vac.
Control wiring diagrams show relays in the rest state (coils NOT energized).
NOTE: Models rated above 30 Hp at 200/240 Vac and 60 Hp at 400/480 Vac have a
second Form C relay at terminals TB-19, TB-20, and TB-21. This relay is controlled
by Parameter 52 - TB14 OUT.
55
TB5B LOSS
This parameter selects the action taken by the drive if the follower signal is lost at
TB-5B. This function is only active if the follower signal is 4-20 mA. The signal is
considered lost if it falls below 2 mA.
FAULT
SP #4
NONE
57
(SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS)
This parameter is used to activate serial communications. When using this feature,
the drive can communicate with a personal computer (PC), programmable logic
controller (PLC), or other external device that utilizes RS-485 serial communications
for control. The serial interface may be used to read present parameter settings
(uploading to the control device), write new parameter settings (downloading from
the control device), monitor present drive activity, and control drive activity. The
following settings are available:
DISABLE
W / TIMER
W / O TIMR
NOTE 1: The keypad STOP button is always active, regardless of what method
(LOCAL, REMOTE, or SERIAL) is being used to control the drive. The remote STOP
input (TB-1) may also be active, depending on how the drive is programmed.
NOTE 2: If a RESET command (Parameter 65 - PROGRAM) is issued through
the serial link, this parameter will not default back to DISABLE. However, explicitly
setting this parameter to DISABLE through the serial link will cut off communication
with the drive.
If developing an application for serial communications, refer to the RS-232/RS-485
Modbus Communications Protocol Specication.
58
ADDRESS
(SERIAL ADDRESS)
This parameter is used with the serial communications feature, and is intended for
use in a multiple drive network (RS-485). The serial link will support drives with
addresses from 1 up to 247.
64
Table of Contents
61
PASSWORD
(PASSWORD NUMBER)
This feature limits access to the programmable parameters for added security. The
correct password must be entered in order to change the parameters.
Pressing the PROG/RUN button on the keypad will activate the PASSWORD
prompt. If the correct password is entered, the PROGRAM MODE is entered and
parameters can be changed.
If the wrong password is entered, the drive will ash ERROR: INCORRECT and
then return to the PASSWORD prompt to allow another attempt at entering the
correct password.
If the ENTER key is pressed while PASSWORD reads 0000, the MONITOR MODE
will be entered (if Parameter 64 - MONITOR, is set to ON), which will allow the
parameters to be viewed (except for PASSWORD), but not changed.
NOTE 1: The factory default value is 0019.
NOTE 2: If PASSWORD is set to 0000, the function is disabled. Pressing the
PROG/RUN key will result in direct entry into the PROGRAM mode without having
to enter a password.
63
SOFTWARE
(SOFTWARE VERSION)
This parameter displays the software code and revision number of the control board
software. This information is useful when contacting the factory for programming
or troubleshooting assistance. This is a view-only parameter, and cannot be
changed.
64
MONITOR
(MONITOR MODE)
This parameter is used to enable (ON) or disable (OFF) the MONITOR MODE
function. The functionality is explained below:
ON
OFF
65
PROGRAM
WARNING!
65
Table of Contents
This parameter is used to reset the programmable parameters back to the factory
default settings. This parameter has four possible settings:
MAINTAIN
RESET 60
RESET 50
RST HIGH
HISTORY
This parameter is used to clear the previous faults in the FAULT HISTORY. When set
to CLEAR and the ENTER key is pushed, the display will change to MAINTAIN, and
the FAULT HISTORY will display NO FAULT for each of the eight fault histories.
70
PID MODE
This parameter activates the PID function, and selects whether the PID control
will be direct or reverse acting. Refer to Section 19.0 - MC1000 PID SET POINT
CONTROL. The following options are available:
OFF
NORMAL
REVERSE
NOTE: The REVERSE selection is not used to compensate for reverse acting feedback
devices. If a reverse acting feedback device is used, program Parameters 75 and 76
- FB @ MIN and FB @ MAX as described in Section 19.1 - FEEDBACK DEVICES.
When PID is enabled, and the drive is in REMOTE and AUTO mode, the drive will
operate in a CLOSED LOOP fashion, responding to the feedback signal in order
to maintain the process set point. In this case, the set point reference can be a
0-10 VDC or 4-20 mA signal, or the keypad. The SPEED REFERENCE SOURCE
indication in the CONTROL display will indicate VDC (0-10 VDC), IDC (4-20 mA),
or AKB (keypad), depending on the set point reference.
66
Table of Contents
When PID is enabled, and the drive is in LOCAL and AUTO mode, the drive will
also operate in a CLOSED LOOP fashion. However, in this case, the only set point
reference available is the keypad, and the SPEED REFERENCE SOURCE indication
in the CONTROL display will indicate AKB.
When PID is enabled, and the drive is in MANUAL and LOCAL or REMOTE mode,
the drive will operate in an OPEN LOOP fashion, responding directly to speed
commands from the keypad only. The SPEED REFERENCE SOURCE indication
in the CONTROL display will indicate MKB.
When PID is disabled, the drive will operate in an OPEN LOOP mode, responding
directly to speed commands from either the keypad (MANUAL mode) or an analog
input signal or preset speed (AUTO mode).
74
PID FB
This parameter selects the terminal to be used for the feedback signal, and can be
set to TB-5A or TB-5B. TB-5A is used for 0-10 VDC signals, and TB-5B is used
for 4-20 mA signals.
NOTE: The MC1000 has only one analog input of each type, so the same type of
signal cannot be used for feedback and set point reference. For example, a 4-20
mA signal from a transducer could not be used as a feedback signal if the set point
is being controlled by a 4-20 mA signal from a PLC.
75
FB @ MIN
This parameter should be set to the value of the process variable that corresponds
to the minimum transducer feedback signal (0 VDC or 4 mA).
76
FB @ MAX
This parameter should be set to the value of the process variable that corresponds
to the maximum transducer feedback signal (10 VDC or 20 mA).
NOTE: If a reverse acting feedback device is being used, FB @ MIN should be
set to the maximum process variable value, and FB @ MAX should be set to the
minimum process variable value.
77
P GAIN
(PROPORTIONAL GAIN)
This parameter setting represents the speed command output (in % of maximum
speed) that results from each 1% of error (1% of the feedback range; FB @ MAX
minus FB @ MIN).
Example: If P GAIN is programmed for 5%, and the error (difference between set
point and feedback) is 10%, the speed command output of the Proportional term is
50% (10 x 5 = 50) of maximum speed.
78
I GAIN
(INTEGRAL GAIN)
This parameter setting represents the ramp rate of the speed command output (in
% of maximum speed per second) that results from each 1% of error.
Example: If I GAIN is programmed for 0.5 seconds, and the error is 5%, the rate
of rise of the speed command output of the Integral term is 2.5% (0.5 x 5 = 2.5) of
maximum speed per second.
79
D GAIN
(DIFFERENTIAL GAIN)
This parameter setting represents the speed command output (in % of maximum
speed) that results from each 1% per second change in the error.
67
Table of Contents
Example: If D GAIN is programmed for 5 seconds, and the error is increasing
at 2% per second, the speed command output of the Differential term is
10% (5 x 2 = 10) of maximum speed.
NOTE: Differential gain is used as a shock-absorber to dampen overshoots in
fast-acting systems. However, it can be very sensitive to noise on the feedback
signal and to digitizing errors, so it must be used with caution.
80
PID ACC
(PID ACCEL/DECEL)
This parameter sets the acceleration and deceleration rate of the set point reference
into the PID unit. When the set point changes, this function will lter the input
to the PID unit by ramping the set point reference from the previous value to the
new value. This will help prevent overshoots that can occur when the PID control
attempts to respond to step changes in set point, resulting in smoother operation.
If PID ACC is set to 0.0 seconds, it is effectively disabled.
81
MIN ALRM
This parameter setting represents the value that the feedback signal (in PID mode)
or speed reference signal (in open-loop speed mode) must fall below to activate the
MIN ALARM output (see Parameters 52, 53, and 54).
82
MAX ALRM
This parameter setting represents the value that the feedback signal (in PID mode)
or speed reference signal (in open-loop speed mode) must exceed to activate the
MAX ALARM output (see Parameters 52, 53, and 54).
NOTE 1: The MIN/MAX ALARM function can be used to start and stop the drive
based on the level of the speed reference signal or PID feedback signal. This is
done by wiring a 2-wire start/stop circuit through the drive's Form C relay or opencollector output, and setting the Form C relay or open-collector output for MIN/MAX
(see Parameters 52, 53, and 54). When the signal drops below the MIN ALARM
setting, the relay or open-collector output will de-energize, which opens the start
contact and stops the drive. When the signal is equal to or greater than the MIN
ALARM setting, the relay or open-collector output will energize, which closes the
start contact and starts the drive. The drive must be in REMOTE mode to use the
MIN/MAX function to start and stop the drive.
NOTE 2: When using the MIN and MAX ALARM functions in open-loop speed
mode (PID is disabled), parameter 74 - PID FB must still be set to match the speed
reference signal being used.
98
LANGUAGE
(LANGUAGE SELECTION)
The MC Series drive can support other languages with the addition of an optional
LANGUAGE EEPROM chip installed in socket U11 on the control board of the
drive. If the EEPROM is not present, the default language will be ENGLISH. Also,
this parameter is not affected when the parameters are reset using Parameter 65
- PROGRAM. Therefore, if a language other than ENGLISH is selected, it will
remain in effect after a RESET.
99
FAULT HISTORY
The FAULT HISTORY stores the previous eight fault conditions that caused the drive
to trip. The information stored here is view-only, it cannot be altered. The FAULT
HISTORY can be used to determine if there is a pattern, or trend, to the faults, which
may indicate a problem in the system. Refer to Section 19.0 - TROUBLESHOOTING
for more information on faults.
68
Table of Contents
The FAULT HISTORY indicates the number of the fault (number 1 is the most
recent fault), the fault message, and the status of the drive at the time of the fault.
An example is shown below:
FAULT
NUMBER
FAULT
MESSAGE
3 OVERLOAD
DRIVE
STATUS
RUN
In the example above, the third fault log is being viewed, which is an OVERLOAD
fault that occurred while the drive was in a RUN state
69
Table of Contents
19.0 MC1000 PID SET POINT CONTROL
PID Set point Control allows the MC1000 to maintain a process set point, such
as PSI or CFM, without using an external controller. When PID is activated, the
MC1000 will operate in a closed-loop fashion, automatically adjusting the motor
speed to maintain the set point.
PID set point control requires feedback from the process in order to compare the
process variable value to the set point. The difference between the process variable
value and the set point is called the error. The MC1000 will increase or decrease
the motor speed in an attempt to minimize the error. By constantly adjusting the
motor speed, the PID control will drive the process toward the set point. Refer to
the PID block diagram below:
P
SET
Error
Speed
Command
Motor
Process
Process Variable
Feedback (transducer)
19.1
FEEDBACK DEVICES
4-20 mA
70
Table of Contents
Example 1: A 0-100 psi transducer outputs a 4 mA signal at 0 psi and 20 mA at
100 psi. Program Parameter 75 to 0.0 PSI, and Parameter 76 to 100.0 PSI (This
assumes that Parameter 31 - UNITS is set to pid PSI, and Parameter 33 - UNITS
DP is set to XXX.X).
For a reverse acting transducer, set Parameter 75 - FB @ MIN to the maximum
process variable feedback value, and set Parameter 76 - FB @ MAX to the minimum
process variable feedback value. In other words, Parameter 75 is set higher than
Parameter 76. See the example below:
Example 2: A 0-100 psi transducer outputs a 20 mA signal at 0 psi and 4 mA at
100 psi. Program Parameter 75 to 100.0 PSI, and Parameter 76 to 0.0 PSI (This
assumes that Parameter 31 - UNITS is set to pid PSI, and Parameter 33 - UNITS
DP is set to XXX.X).
19.2
The entire system can also be direct or reverse acting. In a direct acting system,
an increase in motor speed causes an increase in the process variable. This is
equivalent to requiring an increase in motor speed in response to a decreasing
process variable feedback.
In a reverse acting system, an increase in motor speed causes a decrease in the
process variable. This is equivalent to requiring an increase in motor speed in
response to an increasing process variable feedback. Examples of direct and
reverse acting systems are described in the next section.
19.3
The PID Set point Control software can be direct or reverse acting, and must be
set to match the system. This is accomplished with Parameter 70 - PID MODE.
When set to NORMAL (for direct acting systems), the PID unit will command an
increase in motor speed if the process variable feedback decreases, and a decrease
in motor speed if the process variable feedback increases. When set to REVERSE
(for reverse acting systems), the opposite is true.
NOTE: The REVERSE setting for Parameter 70 - PID MODE is not used to
compensate for reverse acting feedback devices. If a reverse acting feedback device
is used, program Parameters 75 and 76 as described above.
An example of a direct acting system is one that maintains duct pressure. Duct
pressure is the process variable that is monitored by the feedback device. As duct
pressure rises, motor speed needs to be decreased to maintain the pressure. A
direct acting PID control will command a decrease in motor speed in response to
an increasing process variable feedback.
An example of a reverse acting system is one that maintains water temperature in
a cooling tower. Water temperature is the process variable that is monitored by the
feedback device. As the water temperature rises, motor speed needs to be increased
to lower the temperature of the water. A reverse acting PID control will command an
increase in motor speed in response to an increasing process variable feedback.
71
Table of Contents
19.4
19.5
Once the PID control is set up correctly, it needs to be tuned in order to maintain the
process set point. First, set the Integral and Differential Gains to zero, and increase
the Proportional Gain (Parameter 77) until the system becomes unstable, then lower
the gain until the system stabilizes again. Set the Proportional Gain about 15% less
than that value that stabilizes the system. If only Proportional Gain is used, and
the system is operating in a steady-state condition (set point is xed and process
variable has settled to a xed value), there will always be a certain amount of error
in the system. This is called the steady-state error.
Integral Gain (Parameter 78) is used to force the steady-state error to zero by
increasing the output speed command with respect to time. Over time, the error
will be forced to zero because the Integral term will continue to change the speed
command, even after the Proportional term reaches steady state and no longer
affects the speed command. The Integral Gain affects the rate of rise of the output
speed command from the Integral term. Small amounts of Integral Gain can cause
large changes in PID performance, so care must be taken when adjusting Integral
Gain. Too much Integral Gain will result in overshoots, especially if large step
changes in error occur.
Typically, Proportional and Integral Gain are all that is needed to ne-tune the
system. However, it may be necessary to use Differential Gain (Parameter 79) to
further stabilize the system, especially when quick responses are required. The
Differential term responds to the rate of change of the error, not the actual error
itself. Differential Gain acts like a shock-absorber to dampen overshoots that can
occur when the PID tries to react quickly to changes in error or set point. This allows
fast PID response, with reduced risk of becoming unstable due to overshoots. The
Differential term is very sensitive to electrical noise on the feedback signal and to
digitizing errors, so it must be used with caution.
The other parameter setting that affects the response of the PID control is Parameter
80 - PID ACC. This sets the acceleration (and deceleration) rate of the set point
reference into the PID unit. When the set point changes, this function will lter the
input to the PID unit by ramping the set point reference from the previous value to the
new value. This will help prevent overshoots that can occur when the PID control
attempts to respond to step changes in set point, resulting in smoother operation.
If PID ACC is set to 0.0 seconds, it is effectively disabled.
72
Table of Contents
19.6
When the drive is in PID mode, the DRIVE STATUS portion of the display will indicate
actual output frequency (in Hertz) instead of RUN, and the right side of the display
will indicate PID SET POINT, % LOAD, or PID FEEDBACK. The ENTER key is
used to toggle between the different displays. Examples of the possible displays
are shown below:
DRIVE
STATUS
PID
SET
42.53 HZ
35.0 PSI
PID
UNITS
DRIVE
STATUS
42.53 HZ
PERCENT
LOAD
57% LOAD
PID
FEEDBACK
DRIVE
STATUS
42.53 HZ
33.7 PSI
PID
UNITS
In the examples above, the drive is running at 42.53 Hz to maintain the PID SET
POINT of 35.0 psi. Pressing the ENTER key displays % LOAD, which is 57%.
Pressing ENTER again displays the PID FEEDBACK from the process, which is
33.7 psi.
When the PID SET POINT and PID FEEDBACK displays are entered, the display
will ash SET POINT or FEEDBACK before displaying the value to indicate which
display is being viewed.
73
Table of Contents
20.0 TROUBLESHOOTING
The table below lists the fault conditions that will cause the drive to shut down, as
well as some possible causes. Please contact the factory for more information on
troubleshooting faults.
NOTE: The drive will not automatically restart after a PWR SAG or a CONTROL
fault. Also, if an OUTPUT fault occurs below 1.5 Hz, the drive will only attempt
one restart, after a four minute delay. If unsuccessful, it will then trip into FAULT
LOCKOUT, which will require a manual reset. This is done to protect the drive in
case of a shorted motor.
FAULT MESSAGES
FAULT
OUTPUT
DESCRIPTION
POSSIBLE CAUSES
LO VOLTS
HI VOLTS
HI TEMP
OVERLOAD
PWR TRAN
Erratic AC line.
PWR SAG
LANGUAGE
74
Table of Contents
FAULT MESSAGES
FAULT
DESCRIPTION
EXTERNAL
DB ERROR
CONTROL
INTERNAL
INTERN (#)
FOLLOWER
75
POSSIBLE CAUSES
Table of Contents
21.0 USER SETTING RECORD
PARAMETER MENU: USER SETTING RECORD
PARAM.
NUMBER
PARAMETER
NAME
FACTORY
DEFAULT
LINE VOLTS
AUTO
SPEED #1
20.00 Hz
SPEED #2
20.00 Hz
SPEED #3
20.00 Hz
SPEED #4
20.00 Hz
SKIP #1
.00 Hz
SKIP #2
.00 Hz
BAND WID
1.00 Hz
ACCEL
30.0 SEC
DECEL
30.0 SEC
10
MIN FRQ
.50 Hz
11
MAX FRQ
60.00 Hz
12
DC BRAKE
.0 VDC
13
DC TIME
.0 SEC
14
DYN BRAKE
OFF
16
CURRENT
180 %
17
MOTOR OL
100%
18
BASE
60.00 Hz
19
FX BOOST
(NOTE 1)
20
AC BOOST
0.00%
21
SLIP CMP
0%
22
TORQUE
CONSTANT
23
CARRIER
2.5 kHz
76
USER
SETTING
Table of Contents
PARAMETER MENU: USER SETTING RECORD
PARAM.
NUMBER
PARAMETER
NAME
FACTORY
DEFAULT
25
START
NORMAL
26
STOP
COAST
27
ROTATION
FORWARD
28
AUTO/MAN
BOTH
29
MANUAL
KEYPAD
30
CONTROL
LOCAL
31
UNITS
sp: HERTZ
32
HZ MULT
1.00
33
SPEED DP
XXXXX
34
LOAD MLT
100%
35
CONTRAST
MED
36
SLEEP TH
.00 Hz
37
SLEEP DL
30.0 SEC
38
SLEEP BW
0%
39
TB5 MIN
.00 Hz
40
TB5 MAX
60.00 Hz
41
AIN FLTR
0.02 SEC
42
TB10A OUT
NONE
43
@TB10A
60.00 Hz
44
TB10B OUT
NONE
45
@TB10B
125%
47
TB13A
NONE
48
TB13B
NONE
49
TB13C
NONE
50
TB13D
EXT FAULT
77
USER
SETTING
Table of Contents
PARAMETER MENU: USER SETTING RECORD
PARAM.
NUMBER
PARAMETER
NAME
FACTORY
DEFAULT
52
TB14 OUT
NONE
53
TB15 OUT
NONE
54
RELAY
NONE
55
TB5B LOSS
FAULT
57
SERIAL
DISABLE
58
ADDRESS
30
61
PASSWORD
0019
63
SOFTWARE
(N/A)
64
MONITOR
ON
65
PROGRAM
RESET 60
66
HISTORY
MAINTAIN
70
PID MODE
OFF
74
PID FB
TB-5A
75
FB @ MIN
0.00 %
76
FB @ MAX
100.00 %
77
P GAIN
5.00 %
78
I GAIN
0.0 SEC
79
D GAIN
0.0 SEC
80
PID ACC
30.0 SEC
81
MIN ALRM
0.0 %
82
MAX ALRM
0.0 %
98
LANGUAGE
ENGLISH
99
FAULT HISTORY
(N/A)
78
USER
SETTING
Table of Contents
AC Technology Corporation
630 Douglas Street, Uxbridge MA 01569
Sales: 800 - 217 - 9100, FAX: 508 - 278 - 7873
Service: 508 - 278 - 9100 ext 125, FAX: 508 - 278 - 6620
www.actech.com
Document: M101T
Part No.
Qty.
DT_9 Controller
V000754.B09
Keyboard/Display Assembly
V000755.B09
Speed Sensor
FE11705
V003033.B06
Motor
FE14364
Novmber 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0
Novmber 2013
1272-0000 Revision 0